611 Pju

SIMODRIVE 611
Planning Guide 05.2001 Edition
Drive Converter
Manufacturer/Service Documentation
Foreword, Contents Overview of the Drive System System Configuration
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 A B C I
SIMODRIVE 611
Motor Selection and Position/Speed Sensing Power Modules
Planning Guide Drive Converter
Control Modules Infeed Modules Line Supply Connection Supplementary System Components Important Circuit Information Cabinet Design and EMC Block Diagrams Connection Diagrams Drawings EC Declaration of Conformance Abbreviations and Terminology References Index
Valid for 6SN11- series
05.2001 Edition
3ls
SIMODRIVE documentation
Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each edition is shown by the code in the Remarks column. Status code in the Remarks column: A.... New documentation B.... Unrevised reprint with new Order No. C.... Revised edition with new status If factual changes have been made on the page since the last edition, this is indicated by a new edition coding in the header on that page. Edition 04.93 08.93 12.94 11.95 02.98 08.98 05.01 Order No. 6SN10600AA010AA0 6SN11970AA000BP0 6SN11970AA000BP1 6SN11970AA000BP2 6SN11970AA000BP3 6SN11970AA000BP4 6SN11970AA000BP5 Note A C C C C C C
This Manual is included in the documentation on CDROM (DOCONCD) Edition Order No. Note 08.01 6FC5 2986CA000BG1 (840D) C 07.99 6FC51986CA000BG1 (840C) C
Trademarks SIMATICr, SIMATIC HMIr, SIMATIC NETr, SIROTECr, SINUMERIKr and SIMODRIVEr are trademarks from Siemens AG. All other product and system names are registered trademarks of their respective companies and must be treated accordingly.
Additional information is available in the Internet under: http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik This document was generated with Interleaf V 7 The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Functions may be executable in the control but are not described in this documentation. No claims can be made on these functions if included with a new shipment or when involved with service. We have checked the contents of this document to ensure that they coincide with the described hardware and software. Nonetheless, differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. We are thankful for any recommendations for improvement. Subject to change without prior notice.
Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved.
Order No. 6SN11970AA000BP5 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
SiemensAktiengesellschaft
Foreword
Structure of the documentation
The SIMODRIVE documentation is subdivided into the following levels:
S General Documentation/Catalogs S Manufacturer/Service Documentation S Electronic Documentation

You can obtain more detailed information on the documents listed in the documentation overview as well as additional SIMODRIVE documentation from your local Siemens office. This Manual does not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. The contents of this document are neither part of an earlier or existing contract, agreement or a contract nor do they change this. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements contained here do not create new warranties nor modify the existing warranty. The abbreviations used in this document are explained in Attachment B.
Target group
This documentation addresses machine manufacturers, who wish to configure, assemble and commission a drive group with SIMODRIVE components.
Goals
This Planning Guide provides detailed information about using and handling SIMODRIVE components. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise, which are not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens sales office.
Definition: Who are qualified personnel?
For the purpose of this documentation and product labels, a qualified person is a person who is familiar with the installation, mounting, startup and operation of the equipment and hazards involved. He or she must have the following qualifications:
S trained and authorized to energize, deenergize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
S trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance

with established safety procedures.
S trained in rendering first aid
Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved SIMODRIVE 611 Planning Guide (PJU) 05.01 Edition
Foreword
05.01
Explanation of the symbols
The following symbols are used in this documentation
Danger This symbol in the document indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning This symbol in the document indicates that death, severe personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution This symbol appears in the document indicating that minor personal injury or material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution This warning (without warning triangle) indicates that material damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice This warning indicates than undesirable situation or condition can occur if the appropriate instructions/information are not observed.
Note This symbol indicates important information about the product or part of the document, where the reader should take special note.
vi
05.01
Foreword
Technical information
Notice The listed line filters generate a high leakage current through the protective conductor. As a result of the high filter leakage current, the line filter and cabinet must be permanently connected to PE. The measures in accordance with EN 50178/94, Part 5.3.2.1 must be implemented, e.g. 1. A copper protective conductor with a minimum crosssection of 10 mm2 must be connected, or 2. A second conductor should be connected in parallel to the protective conductor through separate terminals. This conductor must fulfill the requirements for protective conductors according to IEC 3645543 itself.
Warning Operational electrical equipment has parts and components which are at hazardous voltage levels. Incorrect handling of these units, i. e., not observing the warning information can therefore result in severe bodily injury or material damage. Only appropriately qualified personnel may commission/startup this equipment. This personnel must have indepth knowledge regarding all of the warning information and service instructions according to this Guide. Perfect and safe operation of this equipment assumes professional transport, storage, mounting and installation as well as careful operator control and service. Hazardous axis motion can occur when working with the equipment. Further, all of the valid national, regional and plant/systemspecific regulations must be adhered to.
Caution Clear warning information indicating the danger associated with the DC link discharge voltage must be provided on the modules in the relevant language of the country where the equipment is used
Note When handling cables observe the following
S they must not be damaged, S they must not be stressed and S they must not come into contact with rotating components.
vii
Foreword
05.01
Note For IT and TT line supplies, the measuring equipment and programming devices which are connected must be referred to the reference potential of the module group.
Notice M600 and M500 are not PE potentials. A hazardous voltage of between 300 ... 400 V with respect to PE is present at the terminals. These potentials may not be connected to PE.
Warning The protective electrical separation can only be guaranteed when components certified for the system are used. Protective separation can only be guaranteed by ensuring the degree of protection of the system components. For protective separation the shield of the brake cable must be connected to PE through the largest possible surface area. Protective separation must be provided between the temperature sensor and the motor winding of thirdparty motors.
Warning Startup/commissioning is absolutely prohibited until it has been ensured that the machine, in which the components described here are to be installed, fulfills the regulations/specifications of the Directive 89/392/EEC.
Warning The information and instructions in all of the documentation supplied and any other instructions must always be observed to eliminate hazardous situations and damage.
S for special versions of the machines and equipment, the information in the
associated catalogs and quotation is valid.
S further, all of the relevant national, local and plant/systemspecific regulations and specifications must be taken into account.
S all work must be undertaken with the system in a novoltage condition

(powered down)!
viii
05.01
Foreword
Warning Residual hazardous voltage are still present even after all of the power supply voltages have been disconnected. The voltages can be present for up to 30 min for the capacitor modules. The voltage must be measured in order to ensure that there are no hazardous voltages present (generator principle for rotating motors)
Warning The rated current of the connected motor must match the rated drive converter current, as otherwise motor feeder cable protection is not guaranteed. The crosssection of the motor feeder cable must be dimensioned for the rated drive converter current.
Warning Before commissioning the 611D, the encoder cable must be checked to ensure that it has no ground faults. If there is a ground fault, uncontrolled movement could occur for pulling loads. No longer occurs from: 6SN11180DV2V0AA0 Version C.
Note The following limitations must be observed when the system is subject to a high voltage test: 1. Power down the equipment so that it is in a novoltage condition. 2. Withdraw the overvoltage module to prevent the voltage limiting responding. 3. Disconnect the line filter to prevent dips in the test voltage. 4. Connect the potential M600PE through a 100 k resistor (open the grounding bar in the NE modules). The units are subject in the factory to a highvoltage test with voltages of 2.25 kVDC, phasePE. The NE modules are shipped with the grounding bar open. 5. The maximum permissible test voltage for a highvoltage test in the system is 1.8 kVDC PhasePE.
Note The terminal blocks of the SIMODRIVE 611 modules are exclusively used to electrically connect the particular module. If they are used for any other application (e.g. as carrying handle), this can damage the module.
ix
Foreword
05.01
ESDS information
Electrostatic discharge sensitive devices Components which can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge are individual components, integrated circuits, or boards, which when handled, tested or transported, could be destroyed by electrostatic fields or electrostatic discharge. ESDS (ElectroStatic Discharge Sensitive Devices). Handling ESDS boards:
S When handling components which can be destroyed by electrostatic

discharge, it should be ensured that personnel, the work station and packaging are well grounded.
S Electronic boards should only be touched when absolutely necessary. S Components may only be touched, if
you are continuously grounded through an ESDS bracelet, you are wearing ESDS shoes or ESDS shoe grounding strips in conjunction with an ESDS floor surface.
S Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces (desk with ESDS

surface, conductive ESDS foam rubber, ESDS packing bag, ESDS transport containers).
S Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television

sets (a minimum of 10 cm should be kept between the board and the screen).
S Boards may not be brought into contact with materials which can be
chargedup and which are highly insulating, e. g. plastic foils, insulating desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from manmade fibers.
S Measuring work may only be carried out on the boards, if

the measuring equipment is grounded (e.g. via the protective conductor), or for floating measuring equipment, the probe is briefly discharged before making measurements (e. g. a bare control housing is touched).
Contents
1 Overview of the Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 2 Overview of SIMODRIVE 611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineering steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 1-17 1-21 2-23 2-24 2-25 2-26 2-27 2-27 2-29 2-30 2-30 2-31 2-31 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-33 2-33 2-34 2-34 2-35 2-35 2-36 2-37 2-38 2-39 2-41 2-42 2-44 2-46 2-46 2-46 2-46 2-46
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6 2.6.7 2.6.8 2.6.9 2.6.10 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 Module arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position sensing/speed actual value sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct position sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indirect position sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function of the power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive modules with induction motor regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive module with SIMODRIVE 611 universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control modules with analog setpoint interface and Motion Control with PROFIBUSDP SIMODRIVE 611 universal E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control modules for 1FT5 motors with analog setpoint interface for feed drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control modules for 1FK6 and 1FT6 motors with resolver and analog setpoint interface for feed drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control modules for 1PH induction motors with analog setpoint interface for main spindle drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control modules with analog setpoint interface for induction motors . Control modules with digital setpoint interface for FD and MSD . . . . Control modules with digital setpoint interface for hydraulic/analog linear drives HLA/ANA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NCU box for SINUMERIK 840D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infeed modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overvoltage limiting module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line supply connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HF commutating reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line filter packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line supply connection for voltage adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
05.01
2.8.5 2.8.6 3
Line supply types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-47 2-53 3-55 3-55 3-55 3-55 3-56 3-56 3-56 3-56 3-61 3-64 3-66 3-75 3-75 3-76 3-77 3-79 4-81 4-83 4-83 4-88 4-89 4-90 4-91 4-92 4-93 4-95 4-96 4-97 5-99 5-101 5-102 5-103 5-105 5-106 5-107 5-108 5-109 5-110 5-111
Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.5 3.6 3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.7 Motor selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motors with holding brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indirect position and motor speed sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct position sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoder systems which can be evaluated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoder power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Encoder power supply for SSI encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview, position sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Highresolution position (HGL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features and technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System configurations and cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.1.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.3 4.4 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data, power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information on the motordrive converter selection, MSD analog . . . Information on the motordrive converter selection, IM analog . . . . . Information on motorconverter selection, FD control, digital . . . . . . . Information on motorconverter selection MSD control, digital . . . . . Information on the motorconverter selection IM control digital . . . . . Technical data of the supplementary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load duty cycle definitions, drive modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.3 5.3.1 Feed control with userfriendly and analog setpoint interface 6SN11180AA110AA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function overview and settings using the parameter board 6SN11140AA010AA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface overview, feed control, userfriendly interface . . . . . . . . . . . Option module, main spindle functions 6SN11140AA020AA0 . . . . Interface overview, MSD option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feed control with standard interface and analog setpoint interface 6SN11180A_110AA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function overview and settings on the control module . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface overview, feed control, standard interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolver control with standard and analog interface 6SN11180B_110AA0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function overview and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
05.01
5.3.2 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.6 5.6.1 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.9 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.10 5.10.1 5.10.2 5.10.3 6
Interface overview, resolver control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main spindle control with analog setpoint interface 6SN11210BA1_0AA_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select relay functions/signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface overview, main spindle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Induction motor control with analog setpoint interface 6SN11220BA1_0AA_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select terminal functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select relay functions/signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface overview, induction motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive control with digital setpoint interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface overview, drive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control module SIMODRIVE 611 universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control module for 1 or 2 axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the terminals and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control module SIMODRIVE 611 universal E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control module with option module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the terminals and interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control module HLA module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test sockets (diagnostics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control module ANA module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-112 5-114 5-115 5-116 5-117 5-118 5-119 5-120 5-121 5-124 5-126 5-127 5-129 5-132 5-136 5-137 5-138 5-143 5-145 5-147 5-152 5-153 5-154 5-156 5-160 6-161 6-165 6-169 6-171 6-173 6-175 6-177 6-177 6-180 6-182 6-182 6-184 6-186 6-186 6-191 6-191 6-197 6-197 6-198
Infeed Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.6.4 Function overview and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power modules operated from an uncontrolled infeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data, line supply infeed modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data of the supplementary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface overview, NE modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface overview, 5 kW UI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mode of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical data (supplements the general technical data) . . . . . . . . . . Checking the permissible power supply rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC link options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capacitor module with 4.1 mF or 20 mF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overvoltage limiting module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulsed resistor module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External pulsed resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xiii
05.01
Line Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.1.7 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 Line supply fuses, commutating reactors, transformers and main switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the line supply fuses to the NE modules . . . . . . . . . . . HF commutating reactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning commutating reactors to the NE modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning autotransformers to the I/R modules2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning transformers to the I/R modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning transformers to the UI modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning main switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line filter and HF commutating reactors for I/R and UI modules . . . . Assigning the line filters to the I/R modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of the line filters to the UI modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter set and line filter package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-203 7-203 7-203 7-204 7-205 7-206 7-208 7-210 7-211 7-212 7-214 7-215 7-215 8-217 8-217 8-218 8-218 8-218 9-219 9-219 9-222 9-222 9-223 9-229 9-230 9-231 9-232 9-233 9-233 9-234 9-235 9-237 9-237 9-238 9-240 9-240 9-241 9-241 9-242 9-243 9-244 9-244 9-245 9-248 9-250
Supplementary System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 Signal amplifier electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting cable for 2tier arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter terminals for DC link connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shield connecting rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Circuit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.5 9.2.6 9.3 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.5 9.5.1 9.5.2 9.5.3 9.5.4 9.5.5 9.6 9.6.1 9.6.2 9.6.3 9.7 General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infeed modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threeconductor connection (standard circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the interfaces and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting several NE modules to a main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use, mode of operation and connection of the line contactor . . . . . . . Timing diagram for the ready signal in the I/R module . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence diagram, central signals at the NE module . . . . . . . . . . . . . Axis expansion using the monitoring module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection example, power supply (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection example, pulse enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the interfaces and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drive modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram, 611 analog feed module with standard interface . . . . Description of the interfaces and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start inhibit in the drive modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reason for using the start inhibit (IEC 204 No. 44/184/CDV) . . . . . . . Mode of operation of the start inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the start inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence and procedure when using the start inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the start inhibit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block diagram, application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Function description, application example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety technology and standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit examples =1 to =10 with SIMODRIVE 611 analog . . . . . . . .
xiv
05.01
9.7.1 9.8 9.8.1 9.8.2 9.8.3 9.9 9.10 9.11 9.11.1 9.11.2 9.12 9.12.1 9.12.2 9.12.3 9.13 9.14 10
Function description, circuit examples =1 to =10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information on applications with 611 digital/611 universal . . . . . . . . . . Circuit example 611 digital with SINUMERIK 840D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuits with 611 digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuits with 611 universal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master/slave operation SIMODRIVE 611 analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stardelta operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Induction motor operation 611A (611D/611U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Several induction motors 611A operated in parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor changeover, individual induction motors 611 analog . . . . . . . . . Operation at power failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application and mode of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC link buffering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SINUMERIK Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-265 9-281 9-282 9-282 9-283 9-284 9-285 9-289 9-289 9-291 9-293 9-293 9-293 9-299 9-301 9-302 10-305 10-305 10-308 10-309 10-310 10-312 10-312 11-315 12-317 13-321 A-363 B-369 C-371 I-375
J
Cabinet Design and EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4 10.2 Installation and connection regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shield connecting plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twotier unit arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMC measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 12 13 A B C I
Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EC Declaration of Conformance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Abbreviations and Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xv
05.01
Space for your notes
xvi
1
Overview of the Drive System
1
Supply
1.1
Overview of SIMODRIVE 611
Transformer (optional)
Switches, contactors, fuses Section 7 Filter optional
Reactor
Section 6
Supply e.g.: Power module 611 analog 611 digital 611 universal 810D
Section 5 Section 4
Closed Closed loop control loop control
Cables, reactors, VPM, cable protection
Section 3
Motor
Motor with position/ speed sensing
Fig. 1-1
Principle system configuration
1-17
1 Overview of the Drive System 1.1 Overview of SIMODRIVE 611
05.01
Line supply connection refer to Section 7 TN supply 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 415 V AC
Infeed modules refer to Section 6
Power modules refer to Section 4
HF commutating reactor Line filter Infeed/regenerative feedback module, internal cooling Power module with internal cooling
TN supply 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 415 V AC
Capacitor module refer to Section 6.6.1 Uncontrolled infeed module
3ph. 480 V AC
or 600 V DC Monitoring module
Power module with external cooling
3ph. 400 V AC
Matching, isolating transformer
External pulsed resistor 0.3/25 kW Pulsed resistor module
External pulsed resistor 1.5/25 kW
Power module with hose cooling
Fig. 1-2
Overview of the SIMODRIVE 611 drive system
1-18
05.01
Control modules refer to Section 5 Control modules with analog setpoint interface
Motors refer to Section 3
For 1FK6 motors with resolver 1axis version 2axis version
For 1FT5 motors 1axis version 2axis version
1FK6
1FT5 For induction motors Fixed setpoints/motorized potentiometer including analog speed input For 1PH motors Motor encoder, alternatively/additional direct spindle measuring system or spindle signal output can be selected 1PH4 1PH7 Induction motor, e.g. 1LA
Control modules with universal setpoint interface
For 1FT6/1FK6/1FN/1PH/1FE1 motors and induction motors 1axis version (resolver) 2axis version (resolver or encoder with sin/cos 1 Vpp) Standard: Analog setpoint interface Option modules: PROFIBUSDP or TERMINALS
1PH2 1PH3
1FE1 Control modules with digital setpoint interface For 1PH/1FE1/1LA or 1FT6/1FK6/1FN motors 1axis version (performance 1 control) 2axis version (standard control) For 1FT6/1FK6 motors 2axis version (performance 1 control) For 1FT6/1FK6 motors 1axis version 1FT6
1FN3
1FN1
For hydraulic linear axes 2axis version Control valve for hydraulic linear axes (not in the scope of supply) Fig. 1-3 Overview of the drive system
1-19
05.01
Note Siemens guarantees a satisfactory and reliable operation of the drive system as long as only original SIMODRIVE system components are used in conjunction with the original accessories described in this Planning Guide and in Catalog NC 60. The user must take into consideration the appropriate engineering specifications. The drive converter system is designed for installation in an electrical cabinet which is designed and implemented in compliance with the relevant Standards for processing machines/machine tools, especially EN 60204.
Description
The drive converter system comprises the following modules (refer to Fig. 1-2 and 1-3):
S Transformer S Switching and protecting elements S Line filter S Commutating reactors S Infeed modules S Power modules S Control modules harmonized with the application technology and motor
types
S Special modules and additional accessories

Different cooling types are available for the outputdependent supply infeed and drive modules.
S Internal cooling S External cooling S Hose cooling
1-20
05.01
1 Overview of the Drive System 1.2 Engineering steps
1.2
Engineering steps
Note When engineering/configuring SIMODRIVE 611 drive systems, it is assumed that the motors being used are known. Reference: /PJM/ Planning Guide, Motors
Procedure
A SIMODRIVE drive group is engineered in 2 phases:
S Phase 1 S Phase 2
Selecting the components Connection configuration
(refer to Fig. 1-4) (refer to Fig. 1-5)
Starting from the required torque, the motor is first selected followed by the drive module and the various encoder evaluation versions. When required, a second engineering phase can following the first one. Here, the appropriate circuit recommendations and measures are taken into account.
Note A PC tool is available to configure the 6SN series, e.g.:
S NCSD configurator
Please contact your local Siemens office for further information. The functions of the control modules are described in this Planning Guide in the form of bullet points and where relevant, with limit values. Please refer to the appropriate documentation for additional details. Basic engineering information/instructions and detailed ordering information are provided in Catalogs NC 60 and NC Z.
1-21
1 Overview of the Drive System 1.2 Engineering steps
05.01
Phase 1 when engineering
Selecting the components
Motor selection
refer to Section 3
Position sensing
refer to Section 3
Power modules
refer to Section 4
Control modules
refer to Section 5
Infeed modules
refer to Section 6
Line supply connection
refer to Section 7
Fig. 1-4
Selecting the components
Phase 2 when engineering
Connection configuration
Important circuit information
refer to Section 9
Electrical cabinet, EMC
refer to Section 10
Block diagrams
refer to Section 11
Connecting diagrams
refer to Section 12
Dimension sheets
refer to Section 13
Fig. 1-5
Connection configuration
Selecting cable and conductor protective devices and switching devices
The cable and conductor protective devices and switching devices should be selected taking into account the relevant Standards, regulations and the requirements at the point of installation. Reference: Reference: /NCZ/ /NSK/ Catalog Connection Technology and System Components Catalog LowVoltage Switchgear
1-22
System Configuration
Drive group
A SIMODRIVE drive group is of a modular design comprising line filter, commutating reactor, line supply infeed module, drive modules as well as when required: Monitoring, pulsed resistor, capacitor and HGL module(s). One SINUMERIK 840D can be integrated into a module group with digital drive module interfaces. Modules can be located in several tiers one above the other, or next to each other. In this case, a connecting cable is required for the equipment bus, and if relevant, also for the drive bus; Order designations, refer to Catalog NC60.
2-23
2 System Configuration 2.1 Module arrangement
05.01
2.1
Module arrangement
The modules can be arranged as required! The modules must be arranged according to their function and the crosssection of their DC link buses. The I/R or the monitoring module is always the first module starting from the left of the module group. The power modules should be arranged to the right next to the I/R and the monitoring modules.
The largest power module should be located next to the The infeed module is always the first module starting from the left of the module group. infeed module, and to the right next to it, all of the other power modules arranged according to their rating.
The capacitor modules should be located at the end of the drive group after the power modules. The shield connecting plates are required so that the connections can be established inline with the relevant EMC guidelines.
Fig. 2-1
Connection example
Due to the parasitic capacitances with respect to ground, when configuring and engineering the drive group, care should be taken regarding the complete length of the power cables used. The drive converter system is designed for operation in industrial environments, connected to grounded TNS and TNC line supplies (VDE 0100. Part 300). For all other line supply types, a transformer must be used with separate windings, vector group Yyn0 (dimensioning, refer to Section 7). The modules are designed for cabinet mounting. The modules of the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system have enclosed housings in compliance with the appropriate EMC regulations, conforming to DIN EN 60529 (IEC 60529). The electrical system is designed in compliance with EN 50 178 (VDE 0160) and EN 60204; Declarations of CE Conformance are available.
2-24
05.01
2 System Configuration 2.2 Ambient conditions
2.2
Ambient conditions
Note The components are insulated according to DIN EN 50178. Overvoltage Class III Degree of pollution II Installation altitude up to max. 2000 m above sea level Installation altitude, 2000 m 5000 m possible when an isolating transformer is used The unit must be derated when installed above 1000 m. Refer to Section 6.3.1 and Section 4.1.1. Neutral point of the line supply is directly grounded; the module housing is also grounded. Warning The I/R modules (Order No. 6SN114V1VV0V0VV1) are set for sinusoidal current operation when they are shipped from the factory: Please observe the commutating reactor or line filter data in Section 7.
Table 2-1
Ambient conditions Designation Description
Vibration and shock stressing in operation
Vibration stressing in operation With constant deflection = 0.075 mm With constant acceleration = 9.81 m/s2 (1 g)
Frequency range 10 ... 58 Hz Frequency range between 58 ... 500 Hz Applicable standards
IEC 65A (Co) 22l, DIN IEC 6826, Severity grade, Class 12 acc. to EN 60721 Part 30 and Part 33
Shock stressing in operation 49 m/s2 (5 g) Modules/devices without drive (hard disk, floppy disk): 11 ms Modules/devices with drive (hard disk, floppy disk): 30 ms IEC 65A (Co) 22I Shock immunity, acc. to IEC 60068 227 With constant deflection = 3.5 mm With constant acceleration = 9.81 m/s2 (1 g) DIN IEC 6826, IEC 65A (Co) 22l Severity grade according to EN 60721 Part 30 and Part 32 Note: The data are valid for originally packaged components
Acceleration Shock duration Applicable standards Vibration stressing during transport Frequency range 5 ... 9 Hz Frequency range between 9 ... 500 Hz Applicable standards
Protection against the ingress of foreign bodies and water
S S
Modules with internal cooling Modules with external cooling/hose cooling Heatsink in the cooling area Electronics area
IP20
IP 54 IP20
2-25
2 System Configuration 2.3 Motor selection
05.01
Table 2-1
Ambient conditions Designation Description 40 C +70 C Annual average 30 days (24h) annually U = 75 % td = 17 C U = 95 % td = 24 C U = 85 % td = 24 C
Transport and storage
Temperature range Moisture condensation temperature td and relative air humidity U
These days should be naturally distributed over the year. On all other days (<24 h) but still maintaining the annual average Applicable standards DIN IEC 6821 DIN IEC 6822 DIN IEC 6823 DIN VDE 0160, Section 5.2.1.3 EN 50178 0 C +55 C +55 C 2.5 % / C Annual average on 30 days (24h) over the year U = 75 % td = 17 C U = 95 % td = 24 C U = 85 % td = 24 C max. 10 K max. 1 K
Climatic ambient conditions in operation
Temperature range: for power module/NE modules (100% load): Current/power de rating above +40 C: Moisture condensation temperature td and relative air humidity U
These days should be naturally distributed over the year. On all other days (<24 h) but still maintaining the annual average Temperature change Moisture condensation Air pressure Gases which can have a negative effect on the function Applicable standards within one hour: within 3 minutes: Not permissible min. 860 mbar (86 kPa) max. 1080 mbar (108 kPa) acc. to DIN 40046, Part 36 and Part 37
DIN IEC 6821 DIN IEC 6822 DIN IEC 6823 DIN VDE 0160, Section 5.2.1.3 EN 50178
2.3
Motor selection
Selection
The Planning Guide, Motors is used to select the drive motors The selected motor and the (shorttime) overload capability defines the size of the power module (refer to Section 4).
2-26
05.01
2 System Configuration 2.4 Position sensing/speed actual value sensing
2.4
Position sensing/speed actual value sensing
Description
The encoder system is used to precisely position and determine the speed actual value of the drive motors for the particular application. The resolution of the measuring system and the selection of the control module is of decisive important for the positioning accuracy.
2.4.1
Direct position sensing
Measuring systems which can be evaluated
S Rotating encoders with TTL signals (only for analog MSD modules) S Rotating encoders with sinecosine voltage signals. S Linear scales with sinecosine voltage signals. S Distancecoded measuring systems (only SIMODRIVE 611 digital with NC) S Measuring systems with sinecosine voltage signals and EnDat/SSI interface (linear scales, single and multiturn encoders)
The analog main spindle drive modules and the digital drive modules for feed and main spindle applications can be optionally supplied with a second measuring system evaluation e.g. for a table measuring system or for spindle position sensing. The direct measuring system is, for example, required if high accuracy is to be achieved at the workpiece using a linear scale or if precise positioning is required when multistage gearboxes are used.
2-27
05.01
Main spindle drive module analog system
2
SIMODRIVE 611 digital, universal
An additional position measuring system with TTL signals can be connected at the main spindle control to directly sense the spindle position, or the spindle signals can be output for further processing. The HGL module is optionally available if it is necessary to transfer highresolution position actual values to a numerical control, when using 1PH motors with Caxis quality. This allows a resolution of up to 90,000 increments per revolution to be achieved by multiplying the motor encoder pulse signals (e.g. toothedwheel encoders for 1PH2 motors).
The optimum measuring system for position sensing is suitable to evaluate incremental encoders with sinecosine voltage signals. Linear scales and rotating encoders with sinusoidal voltage signals can be connected to the drive control systems to operate 1FT6 and 1FK6 feed motors. The measuring signals, received from the encoder system, are evaluated with a high resolution. Example: Using a linear scale (20 m grid constant), a position resolution of 0.01 mm (Performance control) can be achieved.
2-28
05.01
2.4.2
Indirect position sensing
Measuring systems which can be evaluated
2
S Incremental, integrated encoders in the feed and main spindle motors S Absolute integrated encoder with EnDat interface in the feed motors
Analog system
The controls are equipped, as standard with the connection for the measuring system integrated in the feed and main spindle motors. An HGL module (option) is available to condition position sensing signals from the 1PH motor directly coupled to the spindle (builtin motor). Signals can be derived from the motor signal using pulse multiplication for use in the CNC position measuring circuit. These signals have a resolution of up to: 90,000 increments/revolution, e.g. Caxis quality for feed operation 2048 increments/revolution, e.g. for the thread cutting function
SIMODRIVE 611 digital/universal
For the digital coupling between SINUMERIK 810D/840D/840C and SIMODRIVE 611, the measuring system is connected to the digital control modules. The controls are, as standard, equipped with the connection for the measuring system integrated in the feed and main spindle motors. In conjunction with the highresolution position sensing of the digital signal control, with the integrated motor measuring system, a resolution of 4,000,000 increments per revolution is achieved (Performance control). This means that it is not necessary to use an additional Caxis encoder even for the main spindle. The highresolution position actual value is additionally made available to CNC position control loops via the drive bus. This means, that for the appropriate mechanical arrangement, it is not necessary to use a direct table measuring system. The same secondary conditions apply for SIMODRIVE 611 universal and POSMO SI/CD/CA. The drive coupling is different, which is realized via PROFIBUS.
2-29
2 System Configuration 2.5 Power modules
05.01
2.4.3
Drive modules
The drive modules comprise the following components: Power module, control module, equipment bus cable and, where relevant, drive bus cable as well as option module. The permissible combinations of power module and control module are listed in the configuring tables (NC60, Section 10, Tables 2 and 3). Depending on the cooling type and the power module size, cooling components must either be additionally ordered or must be additionally provided by the user. The drive modules of the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system comprise, depending on the application as feed, main spindle or induction motors, the following components: Power module, control module, drive bus cable and, if required, option modules. A drive module is created by inserting the control module in the power module, e.g. for feed or main spindle applications. As a result of the modular drive system, many applications can be configured using only a few individual components.
Note Special contractual conditions apply for combinations which deviate from the engineering information/instructions in Catalog NC 60; this also applies when thirdparty products are also used. We accept the warranty for our scope of supply up to the system interfaces which we define.
2.5
Power modules
There is a broad range of power modules, 1axis and 2axis versions, graduated according to currents and subdivided into three different cooling types. The range of power modules permits an integrated, modular, spacesaving drive solution for:
S Small, compact machines (feed torques and main spindle outputs, e.g.
80 Nm at 500 RPM and 11 kW S1 at 1500 RPM) up to
S Complex machining centers and automatic lathes, e.g. 115 Nm or

145 Nm at 2000 RPM and 100 kW S1 at 1500 RPM The currents refer to the standard default setting. The output currents can be limited by the control module. After the control module has been inserted, the retaining screws at the control front panel must be tightened in order to guarantee a good electrical connection to the module housing. The appropriate derating must be observed for higher clock frequencies, ambient temperatures and installation altitudes above 1000 m above sea level. Matching and preassembled cables are available to connect the motors. The ordering data is provided in the motors Section of Catalog NC 60 Shield connecting plates, which can be mounted onto the module, are available so that the shielded power cables can be connectedup in compliance with the appropriate EMC Guidelines. The equipment bus cable is supplied with the power module. For the digital system, the drive bus cables must be separately ordered.
2-30
05.01
2 System Configuration 2.5 Power modules
2.5.1
Function of the power modules

The power module provides the required power for the control modules and the motor. The power module is selected depending on the motor and control module.
2.5.2
Connecting the power modules

The power module is grounded via the PE connecting studs. The power module must be mounted on a grounded, lowohmic conductive mounting surface and be connected with this through a good electrical connection. The power supply is realized from the DC link buses.
Power module, internal cooling
Control module (refer to Section 7)
M3 / 0.8 Nm
50 mm power module
Order No.
M4 / 1.8 Nm
Type plate/Order No. PE
Fig. 2-2
Power module with control module
2-31
2 System Configuration 2.6 Control modules
05.01
2.6
Control modules
Description
The control modules evaluate the encoders which are used with them and control (openloop) the connected motors through the power modules. The drive system fulfills almost every requirement of stateoftheart drive technology as a result of the wide range of control modules.
2.6.1
Drive modules with induction motor regulation

Induction motors can be operated with the drive module with induction motor control, which is designed for drive converter operation with a 600 V DC link voltage. The maximum motor stator frequency is 1100 Hz (for SIMODRIVE 611 universal and SIMODRIVE POSMO CD/CA: 1400 Hz). For motor frequencies above 200 Hz or rated motor currents above 85 A, it may be necessary to provide a series inductance or increase the drive converter switching frequency. The Dimensioning Guidelines under Section 5 must be observed.
2.6.2
Drive module with SIMODRIVE 611 universal

When the control module is inserted in the power module, the user obtains a drive module which can be universally used for the various SIMODRIVE motor systems, such as permanentmagnet synchronous motors 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FN, 1FE1 and induction motors 1PH and 1LA. The motors can also be operated from 2axis power modules corresponding to the power requirement. Setpoints can either be entered as analog signal or digitally via PROFIBUSDP. The permissible combinations of power modules and SIMODRIVE 611 universal are listed in the configuring tables (NC60, Section 10, Tables 2 and 3). SIMODRIVE 611 universal is a control module with analog speed setpoint interface and optional PROFIBUSDP interface as well as with/without positioning functionality with motor frequencies up to 1400 Hz. 1axis and 2axis control modules are available with option; 2axis versions can also be used in 1axis power modules. The following encoder evaluation circuits are available on various control modules
S Resolvers: Pole pair numbers 1 to 6, max. operating frequency, 375 Hz,

internal pulse multiplication, 4096 x pole pair number
S Incremental encoders with sin/cos 1Vpp signals 165535 pulses, max. up

to 350 kHz, internal pulse multiplication 128 x pulses.
S Absolute value encoder with EnDat interface the same as for sin/cos 1 Vpp
encoder, plus absolute position using the EnDat protocol.
2-32
05.01
2.6.3
Control modules with analog setpoint interface and Motion Control with PROFIBUSDP SIMODRIVE 611 universal E
SIMODRIVE 611 universal E is a control module with the Motion Control with PROFIBUSDP function for use with SINUMERIK 802D and SINUMERIK 840Di. They are suitable for motor frequencies up to 1400 Hz, speed/torque controlled for 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FE1, synchronous motors, 1FN linear motors, 1PH, 1LA induction motors with/without encoder and thirdparty motors if these are suitable for drive converter operation. SIMODRIVE 611 universal E can be used in 1axis and 2axis power modules. The following encoder evaluation circuits are available for the following encoders:
S Incremental encoders with sin/cos 1Vpp signals 1 65535 pulses, max. up

to 350 kHz, internal pulse multiplication, 128 x pulses.
S Absolute value encoders with EnDat interface and sin/cos 1 Vpp.

The drive is either commissioned using a 7segment display and keypad at the front of the module or using the SimoCom U startup tool for PCs under Windows 95/98/NT.
2.6.4
Control modules for 1FT5 motors with analog setpoint interface for feed drives
To use 1FT5 AC servomotors, two control versions are available with the same control quality, but with different interfaces to the higherlevel openloop machine control and operator control level. For the version with userfriendly interface, a parameter module is additionally required on which machinespecific parameters can be saved so that they cannot be lost. The parameter module is inserted into the control module from the front. The control modules with userfriendly interface can be expanded, using an option module, by special main spindle functions for basic main spindle drives using 1FT5 motors. For the version with standard interface, either a 1axis or 2axis version can be selected.
Table 2-2 Comparison table Standard interface 1 Modulespecific yes yes 2 LEDs 2 2 Axisspecific yes yes 7segment display Userfriendly interface
Control module with Speed setpoint inputs for each axis: Fixed setpoints for each axis: Start inhibit: Speed and current controlled operation: Controller and pulse inhibit: Alarm display with:
2-33
05.01
Table 2-2
Comparison table Standard interface yes Modulespecific yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Userfriendly interface
Control module with
Central group signal ( ready/fault ) Axisspecific relay signal Master/slave operation: Current setpoint limiting: Traverse to fixed endstop: Integrator inhibit for speed controller: Current actual value output: I2t monitoring
2.6.5
Control modules for 1FK6 and 1FT6 motors with resolver and analog setpoint interface for feed drives
This control module is intended for feed drives in transfer lines, handling equipment, basic machine tools for machines with general positioning tasks which do not require high requirements regarding the control quality and positioning accuracy. The data for speed actual value, motor rotor position and position actual value are derived from the encoder (resolver) integrated in the motor. This reduces the number of cables and conductors fed to the motor. The control module is available in either a 1axis or 2axis version.
2.6.6
Control modules for 1PH induction motors with analog setpoint interface for main spindle drives
The main spindle control modules of the SIMODRIVE 611A are used in conjunction with the 1PH AC main spindle motors. The control module has an input for a motor encoder, incremental sin/cos 1 Vpp or SIZAG2 and alternatively, an input for a direct spindle measuring system or encoder signal output for external processing. A display and operator unit is integrated for commissioning. Furthermore, commissioning software is available, which runs under MS DOS and Windows Me.
2-34
05.01
2.6.7
Control modules with analog setpoint interface for induction motors

The induction motor control modules are designed for the openloop speed control of standard induction motors or special induction motors for high speeds up to 32000 RPM. The maximum electrical base frequency for the motor is 1100 Hz. In the frequency range greater than 10 Hz, a fieldoriented control algorithm is used due to the actual value being emulated from the terminal quantities. This results in high dynamic response characteristics and high immunity against stalling. A display and operator unit is integrated in the control modules for commissioning. Furthermore, commissioning software which can run under MSDOS, is also available.
2.6.8
Control modules with digital setpoint interface for FD and MSD

The digital control modules of SIMODRIVE 611, in conjunction with SIMODRIVE 1FT6/1FK6 AC servomotors and 1FN linear motors, can be used for feed drives, and in conjunction with 1PH/1FE1 motors, for main spindle drives. The control modules evaluate the incremental sin/cos 1Vpp encoders integrated in the 1FT6/1FK6 or 1PH motor. This means, that up to 4.2 million increments/motor revolutions can be achieved as measuring circuit resolution. For 1FN motors, an incremental or an absolute coded measuring system with EnDat interface is required to sense the position, velocity actual value and pole position. The generated signals for velocity and position actual value are processed via the digital drive bus in the servo area of the SINUMERIK. For control modules with the direct position sensing function, a direct measuring system (DMS) can also be connected. This means that incremental encoders with sine/cosine voltage signals can be evaluated. The control modules with digital setpoint interface can be used, from the hardware perspective, as feed or main spindle drive in the 1axis version Performance control universal. The software with the control algorithms is saved in the SINUMERIK 810D/840D/840C. Each time that the drive control (openloop) is poweredup, the software is downloaded into the digital control modules. When commissioning the system, the drive configuration is used to define whether it involves a feed or main spindle drive. For control modules with digital setpoint interface, either the standard control or the Performance control can be selected. Both of these versions utilize the same drive interfaces and a firmware with the same control algorithms.
2-35
05.01
Table 2-3
Comparison table Standard interface 600 Hz 200 kHz 128 50 m Performance regulation 1333 Hz 350 kHz 2048 50 m
Control module with
Max. electrical base frequency for the motor: Encoder limiting frequency: Pulse multiplication: Maximum cable length for encoders with voltage signal
Motor encoder system and direct measuring systems Incremental encoder sin/ cos 1 Vpp: Absolute value encoder EnDat: Prerequisites for SINUMERIK Safety Integrated: Operation of 1FN linear motors: Applications: yes yes
yes yes with DMS
yes yes with DMS
Standard production machines
yes Precision machines
2.6.9
Control modules with digital setpoint interface for hydraulic/ analog linear drives HLA/ANA
Hydraulic linear drive (HLA)
The digital SIMODRIVE 611 HLA control module is designed to control and regulate electrohydraulic control values for hydraulic linear axes in conjunction with SINUMERIK 840D. Up to two hydraulic axes can be controlled with the module. An HLA module is obtained by inserting the control module in the 50 mm wide universal empty housing. This module can be integrated directly next to the SIMODRIVE 611 drive group both with the mechanical as well as the electrical interfaces, such as equipment bus, drive bus and DC link busbars. The HLA control module contains the control structures for an electronic control loop with high dynamic response characteristics. The HLA control module generates the power supply for the control valves and shutoff valves from an external DC power supply (e.g. SITOP power, refer to NC 60 Catalog) with a rated voltage of 26.5V. An analog axis with speed setpoint interface $10 V can also be controlled using the HLA control module. In this case, an appropriate axis must be selected. As far as the coarse structure is concerned, the control operates as D/A converter for the setpoint and communicates the position information from the encoder to the position controller in the SINUMERIK 840D via the drive bus.
2-36
05.01
An analog axis can essentially be used the same as a digital axis. It can be programmed just like a digital interpolating path axis or spindle. Or course, it is not possible to use the pure functions of the digital drive unit with a coupling via the analog speed setpoint interface. It involves a functionality which accesses the internal axis feedback loops and communications via the drive bus, e.g. SINUMERIK Safety Integrated. Separate EMC measures should also be provided, where necessary, for the external drive devices.
Analog axis (ANA)
Using SINUMERIK 840D, it is possible to operate a maximum of two analog axes on the digital drive bus via the ANA configuration. It is also possible to use an HLA and an ANA axis together.
2.6.10
NCU box for SINUMERIK 840D

If digital drive modules are used in conjunction with the SINUMERIK 840D CNC control, then the NCU box can be located directly to the right of the infeed module.
Fig. 2-3
Digital closedloop control with SINUMERIK 840D
2-37
2 System Configuration 2.7 Infeed modules
05.01
2.7
Infeed modules
The drive group is connected to the power supply via the infeed modules. The infeed modules generate the DC voltage for the DC link from the line supply voltage 3ph. 400 V AC $10% 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 3ph. 415 V AC $10 % 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 3ph. 480 V AC + 6% 10% 50 Hz / 60 Hz. In addition, the electronic voltages ( $24 V, $15 V +5 V etc.) are provided centrally to the drive modules, or the SINUMERIK 840D or SINUMERIK 810D, in the drive group, via the equipment bus. A transformer with separate windings in vector group Yyn0, according to the selection table, is required if the infeed modules are connected to a line supply other than TN line supply or to a line supply which is not equipped with DC sensitive residualcurrentoperated protective devices. An HF commutating reactor is also required for series transformers for the controlled infeed/regenerative feedback module. In addition, an appropriate transformer must be selected to adapt the voltage for line supply voltages 3ph. 200 V / 220 V / 240 V / 440 V / 500 V / 575 V AC 10% 50 Hz / 60 Hz. The necessary cooling components, such as separatelydriven fan and/or air guides to guide the air at the module heatsinks are, for modules up to 200 mm wide, included in the scope of supply, both for the internally as well as externally cooled versions. The appropriate instructions must be observed for the 300 mm modules. The infeed module must always be located as the first module to the left. This is then followed, if used, by the NCU box. This is then followed by the main spindle drive modules (induction motor drive modules) and the feed drive modules which should then be located, with decreasing rated currents from left to right at the infeed module. A minimum clearance of 50 mm to the side must be maintained between module groups mounted at the same height. SIMODRIVE 611 modules can be supplied with an internal heatsink for heat dissipation (cooling) within the cabinet; 300 mmwide modules also have the possibility of connecting a hose for hose cooling. All of the module widths are in a 50 mm grid and all of the modules are 480 mm high. However, it should be noted that the dimensions for the air guide and shield connection plate, mounted fans and hose cooling must be additionally taken into account. Alternatively, modules are also available with a heatsink which extends outside the module so that heat is dissipated externally. In this case, the modules are mounted on the rear side of the cabinet through which the heatsink extends; cooling is realized on the customers side. With this configuration, a mounting frame is required for every module (refer to Fig. 2-7). For internal cooling or hose cooling, all of the modules are 288 mm deep (without connector and mounted options) referred to the mounting plane; all externally cooled modules are 231 mm deep. The protrusion depth of the heatsink must be taken into account for the cooling duct.
2-38
05.01
2.7.1
Cooling components
Depending on the cooling type, matching supplementary fan units and fan components must be selected. A differentiation is made between three different cooling types. 1. For internal cooling, the complete heat loss remains in the electrical cabinet which is manifested as temperature rise. 2. For external cooling, the power module power losses are dissipated externally and the control section power loss is dissipated internally. 3. For hose cooling, the complete power loss is dissipated externally through a hose connected to the module.
Fig. 2-4
System configuration with 400 V fan (only for 300 mm modules)
Warning The fan may only be commissioned, if it is electrically connected with the module housing (the PE of the fan is connected via the module housing).
Caution Cooling is not guaranteed if the fan rotates with the wrong direction of rotation (refer to the arrow)!
2-39
05.01
2
Minimum, 300 mm
Fig. 2-5
System configuration with hose cooling (only for 300 mm modules)
Note DC link connection, refer to Section 10.1.3 Connection details for the DC link adapter set, refer to the dimension drawings
2-40
05.01
2.7.2
Internal cooling
2
min. 100 mm clearance
min. 100 mm clearance
Fig. 2-6
Power module with inserted control module, internal cooling
Note The power loss is dissipated inside the cabinet which means that this has to be taken into account when designing the cabinet cooling system.
2-41
05.01
2.7.3
External cooling
2
M5 screw
Tightening torque 3 Nm
Rear cabinet panel (bare metal)
Discharged air electronics
Discharged air, heatsink
Closed-loop control
Dimension, mounting frame according to the dimension sheet, Section 13. Seal the mounting frames with respect to one another and to the rear cabinet panel (e.g. using Terostat91 from the Teroson company) The sealing compound should be applied around the circumference so that degree of protection IP54 is guaranteed.
Fan assembly Power module with external cooling and heatsink seal
Air intake for the heatsink T400C Air intake for the electronics T400C
Mounting frame
Note: Observe the air flow direction as shown in the diagram and the ventilation clearance shown in dimension drawing, Section 13.
Fig. 2-7
Power module with inserted control module, external cooling
Note Observe the direction of the airflow according to the diagram and clearance for the cooling air in accordance with the dimension drawing, Section 13. Dimensions, mounting frame according to the dimension drawing, Section 13.
Notice For external heatsinks and fans, large amounts of accumulated dirt can have a negative impact on the module cooling. The temperature monitoring function in the power module can respond. The heatsink and fan must be checked for dirt accumulation at regular intervals. Clean as required!
2-42
05.01
Engineering information
For external cooling, the module heatsinks protrude through the mounting plane in the cabinet which allows the power loss to be dissipated to an external cooling circuit. An opening can be provided in the mounting plate for each module or for the complete module group. If an opening is used for the complete module group, then the specific module mounting frames must be used. The appropriate mounting frames (Order No.: 6SN11620BA040EA0) must always be used for the 300 mm modules. The dimension drawings for the openings are described in Section 13. The mounting frames should be mounted from either inside the cabinet or the rear side. This then guarantees the required EMC mounting surface
Note The dimensions of the openings for the reinforcing lugs have different lengths. Be sure that all of the modules are mounted/installed in the same way.
Sealing
The reinforcing lugs of the mounting frames, which are roundedoff towards the rear are provided with a seal at both sides. A sealing material must be used where the edges of the mounting frame come into contact with the mounting plate (e.g. Terostat96 from Teroson). Degree of protection IP 54 is achieved when the sealing material is correctly applied.
Mounted fan for 300 mm modules
The fan cable must enter the cabinet through a PG gland so that the degree of protection is maintained. The mounting plate should be sealed with respect to the rear cabinet panel so that an enclosed space or duct is obtained. Depending on how the cabinet is mounted (freestanding or installed in the machine), this must be cooled through the roof/floor assembly or rear panel.
2-43
05.01
2.7.4
Overvoltage limiting module
Application
The overvoltage limiting module limits the overvoltage, e.g. caused by switching operations at inductive loads and at line supply matching transformers, to acceptable values. For line supply infeed modules above 10 kW (100 mm wide), the overvoltage limiting module can be inserted at interface X181. The overvoltage limiting module is used if upstream transformers are used, or for line supplies which are not in conformance with IEC (unstable line supplies). For the 5 kW monitoring module, an appropriate protective circuit is already integrated as standard.
Application conditions
The following application conditions apply:
S Voltage limiting must be provided when using transformers in front of the

NE module.
S As voltage limiting due to switching overvoltages, for frequent power failures,

for arcing etc.
S Systems, which should fulfill UL/CSA requirements, must be equipped with

overvoltage limiting modules.
Mounting
1. Powerdown the equipment and bring it into a novoltage condition. 2. Withdraw connector X181 from the NE module. 3. Insert the overvoltage limiting module up to its endstop in plug connector X181. 4. Insert connector X181 on the overvoltage limiting module.
2-44
05.01
Fig. 2-8
If a line supply fault is displayed at the NE module or if the yellow LED is dark, after the line supply and the line fuse have been checked, the overvoltage limiting module should be checked and if required, replaced.
Procedure
1. Power down the equipment and bring it into a novoltage condition. 2. Withdraw the overvoltage limiting module and insert connector X181 on the NE module. If the NE module is not functioning correctly, then the overvoltage limiting module is defective and must be replaced. Otherwise, check the module group. Note A defective overvoltage limiting module indicates high overvoltage spikes in the line supply. The line supply should be investigated as to the reason for these voltage spikes.
Notice If a system high voltage test is made, the overvoltage limiting module must be removed in order to prevent the voltage limiting responding.
2-45
2 System Configuration 2.8 Line supply connection
05.01
2.8
Line supply connection

HF commutating reactor
The matching HF commutating reactor is required, in accordance with the selection table (refer to NC60, Section 9) when connecting the uncontrolled 28 kW infeed modules and the controlled infeed regenerative/feedback modules to the line supply. The HF commutating reactor should be mounted as close as possible to the line supply infeed module. Commutating reactors have the following tasks:
2.8.1
S Limit the harmonics fed back into the line supply. S Store the energy for DC link controlled operation in conjunction with the infeed and regenerative feedback module. HF commutating reactors for line supplies 3ph. 400 V AC 10% up to 480 V +6%; 50 Hz / 60 Hz $10%
2.8.2
Line filter
The line filters are assigned to the line supply infeed modules and limit the cableborne noise emitted by the drive system. The line filter should also be mounted, together with the HF commutating reactor, close to the line supply infeed module, whereby the filter must always be located on the line side. These cables must be shielded as they have high noise levels. We always recommend that the line filter products listed in Section 7 are used.
2.8.3
Line filter packages

The line filter and the HF commutating reactors are combined as logical unit in the form of line filter packages. In order to adapt the line filter packages to the mounting surface and to the mounting points of earlier filter modules, adapter sets are available. The filter package protrudes between 20 mm and 30 mm beyond the front plane of the drive group.
2.8.4
Line supply connection for voltage adaptation

The SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system is dimensioned for direct operation from TN line supplies with 3ph. 400 V AC, 3ph. 415 V AC and 3ph. 480 V AC. Matching transformers, tailored to the system, are available to adapt the system to other line supply types, e.g. operation from IT or TT line supplies. This wide range covers the line supply voltages normally found in industrial regions worldwide. TN line supplies distinguish themselves by a lowohmic electrical path between the reference ground potential of the current source and the protective conductor potential of the electrical equipment. If this arrangement is not available, then the connection conditions must be simulated using a transformer with separate windings whose secondary neutral point is grounded at the protective conductor potential and is connected with the drive converter protective conductor.
2-46
05.01
2.8.5
Line supply types

The SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system is designed for a rated voltage of 300 V phasegrounded neutral point. It is not permissible that this voltage is exceeded, as otherwise the drive converter insulation system could be damaged resulting in inadmissibly high touch voltages.
Caution The drive converter may only be connected directly to TN line supplies or through an autotransformer. For all other line supply types, an isolating transformer with grounded neutral point on the secondary side must be used.
Note UL requirements, maximum line shortcircuit currents at 480 V AC:
S Connected power, 1.1 to 37.3 kW, max. shortcircuit current = 5 kA S Connected power, 39149 kW, max. shortcircuit current = 10 kA
2-47
05.01
Connection types
2
Example: TNC line supplies
The drive converter can be directly connected to TN line supplies at 3ph. 400 V AC, 3ph. 415 V AC, 3ph. 480 V AC1) An autotransformer can be used to connect the drive converter to other voltage levels.
Direct connection to a TNC line supply Line supply/transformer for the plant L3 L2 L1
Direct connection to a TNC line supply with autotransformer Line supply/transformer for the plant L3 L2 L1
PEN
PEN
Z
Commutating reactor
Autotransformer N
Z
Commutating reactor PE U1 V1 1 W NE module
PE U1 V1 1 W NE module
Fig. 2-9
Connection diagram, TNC line supplies
Note When using an autotransformer or an isolating transformer upstream from NE modules (module width 100 mm), an overvoltage limiting module should be used, Order No.: 6SN11110AB000AA0, refer to Section 7.
TNC line supply TNS line supply TNCS line supply
Symmetrical 4conductor or 5conductor threephase line supply with grounded neutral point which can be loaded with a protective and neutral connector connected at the neutral point depending on the line supply, realized using one or several conductors.
1)
Direct connection to 480 V is only possible in conjunction with the following PM (Order No.: 6SN112V1VV0V0VV1) and I/R modules, Order No.: 6SN114V1VV0V0VV1 refer to Section 6.1 For motors with shaft height < 100: Utilization up to max. 60 K temperature values according to Catalog NC 60 Please observe the information in the Planning Guide, Motors.
2-48
05.01
For all other line supply types 1) the NE module must be connected via an isolating transformer.
TT line supply
Symmetrical 3conductor or 4conductor 3phase line supply with a directly grounded point, the loads are, e.g. connected to grounding electrodes, which are not electrically connected to the directly grounded point of the line supply.
TT line supply grounded phase conductor and isolating transformer Line supply/transformer for the plant L3 L2 L1 L3 L2 L1
TT line supply with grounded neutral point and isolating transformer Line supply/transformer for the plant
PE
PE
Isolating transformer
Z
Commutating reactor PE U1 V1 1 W NE module Commutating reactor
Z
Fig. 2-10
Connection diagram, TT line supplies
1)
Matching transformer types are described in Catalog NC 60, Part 8.
2-49
05.01
For all other line supply types 1) the NE module must be connected through an isolating transformer.
IT line supply
Symmetrical 3conductor or 4conductor threephase line supply without a directly grounded point, the loads are, e.g. connected to grounding electrodes.
IT line supply and isolating transformer Line supply/transformer for the plant L3 L2 L1 PE
IT line supply and isolating transformer Line supply/transformer for the plant L3 L2 L1 PE
Z
Commutating reactor PE U1 V1 1 W NE module Commutating reactor
Z
Fig. 2-11
Connection diagram, IT line supplies
Note When using isolating transformers upstream from I/R and UI modules (module width 100 mm), an overvoltage limiting module should be used, Order No.: 6SN11110AB0V0AA0; refer to Section 7 UI modules 5 kW Order No.: 6SN11462AB000BA1, a voltage limiting circuit is included.
1)
Matching transformer types are described in Catalog NC 60.
2-50
05.01
This means, that within the clocked transistor drive converter, the voltage stressing of the insulation distances between the power circuits referred to the line supply potential and the openloop and closedloop control circuits, referred to the neutral conductor is maintained according to a rated voltage of 300 V in compliance with DIN EN 50178. Upstream protective devices to protect against hazardous currents flowing through the human body or for fire protection (e.g. fault current protective devices) must be universal devices in compliance with DIN EN 50178. If other fault current protective devices are used, a transformer with separate windings must be connected upstream from the drive converter to decouple it from the line supply. DC current components may be present in fault currents which occur due to the 6pulse threephase bridge circuit in the line supply infeed module. This should be taken into account when selecting/dimensioning a fault current protective device.
Direct connection to line supplies with residual current protective device
The SIMODRIVE unit may be directly connected to TN line supplies with a universal currentsensitive residualcurrent protective device with selective cutout characteristics as protective measure. Note Only I/R modules, 16 kW and 36 kW, may be directly connected to a line supply with residualcurrent protective devices. Delayed universal currentsensitive residualcurrent protective device with selective cutout characteristics can be used without any restrictions to provide protection against hazardous currents flowing through the human body.
Connection diagram with residualcurrent protective device L3 L2 L1 Universal current sensitive residualcurrent protective device
Z
Commutating reactor
Fig. 2-12
Connection diagram, residualcurrent protective device
2-51
05.01
The following should be observed
S It is only permissible to use a delayed (selective) universal currentsensitive
residualcurrent protective device (connectedup corresponding to the diagram
S It is not possible to connect residualcurrent protective devices in series for

selective tripping
S The max. permissible ground resistance of the selective protective device
is maintained (83 max. for residualcurrent protective device with a rated differential current of 0.3 A) feeder cable including line supply feeder cables from the line filters up to the NE connecting terminals) must be less than 350 m.
S The total length of the shielded power cables used in the drive group (motor S Operation is only permissible with line filters when using the line filters described in Section 7
Notice The AC current or pulsedcurrentsensitive residualcurrent protective devices, which today are wellestablished, are not suitable!
Recommendation
SIEMENS universal currentsensitive residualcurrent protective devices (selective) corresponding to DIN VDE 0100 T480 and EN 50178, series 5SZVVVVVVVVV. (e.g. 5SZ6 4680KG00 or 5SZ64680KG30 with auxiliary isolating contact (1NC/1NO) for a rated current of 63 A, nominal fault current, 0.3 A)
2-52
05.01
2.8.6
Transformers
Matching transformers (auto/isolating transformers) with supply voltages of 3ph. 220 V AC to 3ph. 575 V AC, refer to Section 7.
Dimensioning the matching transformer for only an NE module
Only one NE module is connected to the matching transformer.
Line supply connection/ transformer for the plant
SK - plant = SK - line supply
SK - line supply
Other loads/ machines
Matching transformer for the machine
SK transformer
Z
Commutating reactor U1 V1 1 W NE module Commutating reactor
PE
U1 V1 1 W NE module
PE
Fig. 2-13
Connection diagram, matching transformer
2-53
05.01
Table 2-4
Engineering information/instructions if you dimension the transformer yourself Required rating Sn of the isolating/autotransformer Sn 21 kVA Sn 46.5 kVA Sn 70.3 kVA Sn 104 kVA Sn 155 kVA Rating Sn required for the isolating/autotransformer Sn 7.8 kVA Sn 14.5 kVA Sn 40.5 kVA Shortcircuit voltage required uk uk 3% uk 3% uk 3% uk 3% uk 3% Shortcircuit voltage required uk uk 10% uk 10% uk 10%
I/R module used 16/21 kW 36/47 kW 55/71 kW 80/104 kW 120/156 kW UI module used 5/10 kW 10/25 kW 28/50 kW
Note Switching elements (main switch, contactors) to switchin and switchout the line filter may have a max. 35 ms delay time between the closing/opening of the individual main contacts.
Connection through an isolating transformer
It is possible to use an isolating transformer in conjunction with a protective measure against hazardous currents going through the human body.
Notice When using an isolating transformer upstream from I/R and UI modules (module width 100 mm), an overvoltage limiting module should be used, Order No.: 6SN11110AB0V0AA0; refer to Section 7. A voltage limiting circuit is included for UE 5 kW, Order No.: 6SN11462AB000BA1.
If line filters are required and if the rated line supply voltage deviates from the permissible supply voltage of the line filters (3ph. 400 V AC or 3ph. 415 V AC), then one of the matching transformers, specified in the following, must be used. The SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system is designed for a rated voltage of 300 V phasegrounded neutral point. This voltage may not be exceeded, as otherwise the drive converter insulation system could be damaged resulting in inadmissibly high touch voltages. J
2-54
Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing
3
3
3.1
Motor selection
The motor should be selected according to the mechanical and dynamic response characteristics which it must fulfill. The motor overload capability required depends on the magnitude and number of load peaks during the operating time.
3.1.1
Motor protection
Motor protection circuitbreakers should be used to protect the motors which only switch a signal contact when the motor is overloaded. If the motor is isolated from the power module during operation with the drive pulses enabled, there is a danger that the power module and control module could be destroyed.
3.1.2
Motors with holding brake
Description
The holding brakes mounted onto the motors are used to brake the motor at standstill. It can also shorten the braking travel under emergency conditions. However, the holding brake is not an operating brake.
Note The motor holding brakes may only be actuated when the motor is at a standstill. If the holding brake is actuated during operation or while the motor is rotating, this results in increased wear and shortens the lifetime of the holding brake. This means that holding brake failure must be taken into account when engineering the drive system and a hazard analysis must be carried out.
Hanging loads
If holding brakes are used for hanging loads, this must be carefully analyzed as there is a high potential danger.
Monitoring
By traversing to a defined endstop, a reference quantity is obtained to monitor the braking travel. The measured braking travel is an indication of the brake wear.
3-55
3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing 3.4 Direct position sensing
05.01
3.2
Motor encoder
The motors are equipped with various encoder systems for rotor position and speed sensing. Reference: /PJM/ Planning Guide, Motors
1FT5 motors can be optionally ordered with a mounted or integrated encoder system for position sensing. Table 3-1 shows the assignment of SIMODRIVE units to the servo/main spindle motor types.
3.3
Indirect position and motor speed sensing

The various possibilities for indirect position and speed sensing and for positioning the motor shaft as a function of the drive configuration (SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE and motor) are listed in Tables 3-2 and 3-3 (Section 3.5).
3.4
3.4.1
Direct position sensing

Encoder systems which can be evaluated
The various possibilities for direct position sensing to position as a function of the drive configuration (SINUMERIK, SIMODRIVE and motor) and the encoder system used are listed in Tables 3-4 and 3-5 (Section 3.5). We recommend that measuring systems with sinusoidal voltage signals are used due to the higher data transmission reliability and integrity.
3-56
05.01
Incremental systems with two sinusoidal current signals A, B, displaced through 90 degrees and a (for distancecoded systems, several) reference mark(s) R. Signal transfer: Differential signals A, *A; B, *B and R, *R Amplitude A *A Amplitude B *B Amplitude R *R Supply: Max. supply current: Max. encoder signal frequency which can be evaluated: 716 Ass (for Rload = 1 k) 716 Ass 28 Ass (net component) 5 V 5 % (also refer to Section Encoder power supply) 300 mA 200 kHz
Note For the above mentioned max. encoder signal frequency, the signal amplitude must be 60 % of the rated amplitude and the deviation of the phase shift from the ideal 90d between tracks A and B x 30d. Observe the frequency characteristics of the encoder signals.
A*A
90_el.
360_ el.
B*B 0 Clear signal range R*R 0
Fig. 3-1
Signal characteristics for a clockwise direction of rotation
3-57
05.01
Incremental systems with two sinusoidal voltage signals A, B displaced by 90 degrees and one (for distancecoded systems, several) reference mark(s) R. Signal transfer: Differential signals A, *A; B, *B and R, R* 1 Vpp 30 % 1 Vpp 30 % 0.5 Vpp...1 Vpp 5 V 5 % (also refer to Section Encoder power supply) 300 mA 200 kHz standard module 350 kHz without suppressing the amplitude monitoring 650 kHz with suppression of the amplitude monitoring
Amplitude A *A Amplitude B *B Amplitude R *R Supply: Max. supply current: Max. encoder signal frequency which can be evaluated:
Note For the above specified max. encoder signal frequency, the signal amplitude must be 60 % of the rated amplitude and the deviation of the phase shift from the ideal 90d between tracks A and B 30d. Observe the frequency characteristics of the encoder signals.
A*A
90_el.
360_ el.
B*B 0 Clear signal range R*R 0
Fig. 3-2
3-58
05.01
Singleturn, multiturn and linear absolute systems with two sinusoidal voltage signals A, B displaced through 90 degrees and EnDat interface Incremental signal transfer: Amplitude A *A Amplitude B *B Transfer, serial signals: Signal level: Supply: Max. supply current: Max. encoder signal frequency which can be evaluated: Differential signals A, *A and B, *B 1 Vpp 30 % 1 Vpp 30 % Differential signals data, *data and clock, *clock according to EIA 485 5 V 5 % (also refer to Section Encoder power supply) 300 mA 200 kHz standard module 350 kHz without suppressing the amplitude monitoring 650 kHz with suppression of the amplitude monitoring
Note For the above specified max. encoder signal frequency, the signal amplitude must be 60 % of the rated amplitude and the deviation of the phase shift from the ideal 90d between tracks A and B 30d. Observe the frequency characteristics of the encoder signals.
A*A
90_el.
360_ el.
B*B 0
Fig. 3-3
Signal characteristics for incremental tracks for a clockwise direction of rotation
3-59
05.01
Incremental systems with two squarewave signals A, B, displaced through 90 degrees and a reference mark(s) R SIMODRIVE 611A Signal transfer: Signal level: Differential signals A, *A; B, *B and R, *R acc. to RS422 5 V 5 % (also refer to Section Encoder power supply) 300 mA 500 kHz
Supply: Max. supply current: Max. encoder signal frequency which can be evaluated:
Note For the above specified max. encoder signal frequency, the distance between the signal edges, tracks A and B must be 200 ns. Observe the frequency characteristic of the encoder signals!
A*A
0 90_el. B*B 360_ el.
0 R*R Clear signal range
Fig. 3-4
3-60
05.01
3.4.2
Encoder power supply

Remote/sense operation is possible with the encoder power supply for the motor measuring systems and the encoder power supplies for the measuring systems for direct position sensing, with the exception of the standard 1 Digital drive controls (the voltage is directly regulated at the encoder to 5 %).
Remote/sense operation means:
The power supply voltage of the measuring system is sensed via the sense lines P sense and M sense (this is essentially a nocurrent measurement). A controller compares the measuring systemsupply voltage, sensed via the remote/sense lines with the reference power supply voltage of the measuring system. It then adjusts the power supply voltage for the measuring system at the output of the drive module until the required power supply voltage is obtained directly at the measuring system This means, that the voltage drops along the power supply lines P encoder and M encoder are compensated and corrected by the encoder power supply. The power supply voltage is generated from a reference voltage source and is 5 V. This means that it is possible to use cables up to 50 m long without operating the measuring systems with an undervoltage.
Note All of the data are only valid for SIEMENS preassembled cables as these are dimensioned with the required conductor crosssection. For the SIMODRIVE connection technology and also for the measuring system suppliers, remote/sense operation is only provided for encoder systems with voltage signals. For encoder systems with current signals (7 A ... 16 A) the maximum possible cable length of 18 m is defined by the signal outputs of the encoder systems, as these can only drive a specific cable capacitance. For motor measuring systems and mounted SIMODRIVE Sensor encoders, the sense lines are connected in the encoder or in the connector at the encoder side. For thirdparty encoder systems, customers must make this connection themselves.
3-61
05.01
Main spindle control with analog setpoint interface Drive control, Performance Digital and standard 2 FD and MSD
Drive module
Pencoder Psense Mencoder Msense
Remote/sense operation
Remote/sense operation
Measuring system without remote/sense lines
l 50 m
l 5m
Pencoder Mencoder
Connections, Pencoder with Psense and Mencoder with Msense must be established by the customer Drive module
Measuring system with remote/sense lines

l 50 m
l 5m
Fig. 3-5
Signal overview of the connections
Connection system for measuring systems with current signals
Drive module
Measuring system without remote/sense lines l 18 m l 5m

Pencoder Mencoder
Connections, Pencoder with Psense and Mencoder with Msense already exist in SIEMENS cables
Fig. 3-6
Drive control, standard Digital
No remote/sense operation, max. cable length for 300 mA encoder current drain, 15 m (for low encoder current drain, appropriately longer cable lengths are possible, however max. 50 m!).
3-62
05.01
Drive module
Measuring system without remote/sense lines
l 5m
Pencoder Mencoder
Drive module
Connections, Pencoder with Psense and Mencoder with Msense must be established by the customer
3
Measuring system with remote/sense lines
l 5m
Fig. 3-7
3-63
05.01
3.4.3
Encoder power supply for SSI encoders
General information
For SIMODRIVE, an internal 5 V is provided to supply encoders. When using SSI encoders, the power supply voltage must be externally fedinto the encoder cable.
3
What has to be observed?
The following must be observed (refer to Fig. 3-8):
S The encoders should be supplied with a separate regulated 24 V voltage

(e.g. SITOP power), in order to prevent disturbances caused by contactors etc.
S The external 24 V power supply must have protective separation (PELV). S Filter data:
The special filter is required to filter out noise Max. continuous operating current = 0.8 A (use a fuse!) Max. voltage = 30 V 1 filter is designed for 2 encoders with max. current = 0.4 A
S The 24 V supply (reference potential) should be connected to the electronics

ground of the system (e.g. terminal X131 at the NE module) if this connection is not already provided in the encoder.
S Max. cable length between the 24 V supply and filter = 9.9 m S Max. encoder cable length = 50 m S The technical data of the encoder manufacturer must be observed.
24 VDC 0.8 A Filter 6SN11611DA000AA0 Power supply cables I 20cm
L+ L
e.g. at terminal X131 of the NE module
6FX80022CC80... l 50m
SIMODRIVE 611
SSI encoders
Fig. 3-8
Connecting SSI encoders to SIMODRIVE 611
3-64
05.01
+ Power supply M5x12 max. O10.5mm
3
Red Black
Fig. 3-9
Example of a connection at 6SN11180DG230AA1/0DH230AA1
+ Power supply M5x12 max. O10.5mm
Red Black
Fig. 3-10
Example of a connection at 6SN11150BA110AA1
3-65
3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing 3.5 Overview, position sensing
05.01
3.5
Table 3-1
Overview, position sensing

Assignment, motor measuring systems to the plugin control module
Resolver control plugin module
Feed control module with standard and userfriendly interface Main spindle control module with analog setpoint interface Drive control module Digital Performance (FD mode) Drive control module Digital Performance (MSD mode) Drive control module standard Digital Drive control module 611 Universal Resolver Drive control module 611 Universal Vpp voltage signals Motor type Encoder system yes yes
yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
3-66

yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
1FT5 Servomotor 1FT5 Servomotor 1FK6 Servomotor 1FT6 / 1FK6 Servomotor 1FT6 / 1FK6 Servomotor 1PH4 / 6 / 7 Main spindle motor 1FE1 / 1PH2 Main spindle motor Standard motor
3ph. tachometer and rotor position encoder AC tachometer and RLG with optionally mounted/integrated incremental or absolute value encoder Resolver Incremental encoder 1 Vpp Multiturn absolute value encoder Incremental encoder 1 Vpp Incremental encoder (hollowshaft encoder) Encoderless
05.01
Table 3-2
Indirect position (motor rotor position) and motor speed sensing, analog controls M: Max. possible measuring steps G: Encoder system accuracy Z: Pulse number M = 1024 4 per 360 degrees mech.
Control board Numerical control
Indirect position (motor rotor position) and motor speed sensing, analog controls
SIMODRIVE drive (analog) module
n*
l 50 m Resolver (incremental)
x4 Resolver control Positioning with NC Numerical control Feed control with standard and userfriendly interface n* WSG interface
G = " 0.12 degrees 1FK6
l 150 m Tach. and RPS
M and G are dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system and the evaluation technique in the NC
1FT5 Positioning with NC Numerical control n* Optional encoder system M = 2048 Z per 360 degrees mech. Z = 2048 !Positioning command! Spindle positioning with drive Numerical control SIMODRIVE drive (analog) module n* 1PH4/6/7 Incremental M=kZ4 per 360 degrees mech. Z = 2048 k...0.5, 1, 2, 4 (multiplication factor which can be set in the drive) G = " 0.006 degrees Incremental G = " 0.006 degrees
l 50 m
Main spindle control with analog setpoint interface
Main spindle control with analog setpoint interface WSG WSG interface (angular incremental e output Spindle positioning with the NC for NC
l 50 m
1PH4/6/7
3-67
05.01
Table 3-3
Indirect position (motor rotor position) and motor speed sensing, digital controls M: Max. possible measuring steps G: Encoder system accuracy Z: Pulse number M = 2048 Z per 360 degrees mech. Z = 2048 1FT6 1FK6 Positioning with NC n* SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK drive with digital (digital) module coupling Incremental l 50 m M = 2048 Z per 360 degrees mech. Z = 2048 1PH4/6/7 Spindle positioning with the NC n* SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK drive with digital (digital) module coupling Incremental l 50 m M = 2048 Z per 360 degrees mech. Z = 2048 1FT6 1FK6 1PH Incremental and multiturn, absolute Positioning with NC n* SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK drive with digital (digital) module coupling l 25 m M = 128 Z per 360 degrees mech. Z = 2048 G = " 0.006 degrees multiturn absolute 4096 revolutions G = " 0.006 degrees G = " 0.006 degrees
Control board version
Indirect position (motor rotor position) and motor speed sensing, digital controls
Drive control Perfor mance Digital FD and MSD basic version
n* SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK drive with digital (digital) module coupling
l 50 m
Drive control standard Digital FD basic version
1FT6 1FK6 Positioning with NC n* SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK drive with digital (digital) module coupling Incremental l 25 m
G = " 0.006 degrees
incremental and multiturn absolute
M = 128 Z per 360 degrees mech. Z = 2048 G = " 0.006 degrees multiturn absolute 4096 revolutions
1FT6 1FK6 Positioning with NC
3-68
05.01
Table 3-4
Direct position sensing, analog controls M: Max. possible measuring steps G: Encoder system accuracy Z: Pulse number M and G are dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system and the evaluation technique in the NC
Control board version Numerical control
Direct position sensing, analog controls
n*
l 50 m Resolver
Linear measuring system
Resolver control with standard interface
1FK6 Positioning with NC Numerical control SIMODRIVE drive (analog) module n* Linear measuring system Tach. and RPS M and G are dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system and the evaluation technique in the NC
l 50 m
Feed control with standard and user friendly interface
1FT5 Positioning with NC Numerical control SIMODRIVE drive (analog) module n* l 50 m M = 2048 Z per 360 degrees mech. Z = 2048 X432 !Positioning command! Spindle positioning with drive Numerical control SIMODRIVE drive (analog) module n* M=Z4 per 360 degrees mech. G is dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system. 1PH4/6/7 BERO GMotor encoder = " 0.006 degrees GBERO = 1)
Main spindle control with analog setpoint inter face Main spindle control with analog setpoint inter face and input spindle encoder
Incremental
l 50 m
1PH4/6/7 !Positioning command! Spindle encoder Spindle positioning with drive
1) The absolute accuracy when synchronizing with a BERO is a function of: the BERO switching time BERO hysteresis signal edge gradient of the BERO signal (dependent on the direction of rotation!) and the switching thresholds in the drive; high >13 V, low < 5 V the search speed or the signal run times in the evaluation electronics 2) Distancecoded reference marks can be evaluated
3-69
05.01
Table 3-4
Direct position sensing, analog controls M: Max. possible measuring steps G: Encoder system accuracy Z: Pulse number M and G are dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system and the evaluation technique in the NC
3
Main spindle control with analog setpoint inter face Main spindle control with analog setpoint inter face WSG output for NC
Numerical control
n*
l 50 m
Standard/Caxis operation Standard track Caxis track Caxis operation with NC
1PH4/6/7 Spindle encoder
Toothedwheel (measuring wheel) Numerical control SIMODRIVE drive (analog) module n* l 50 m 1PH2 Spindle WSG interface Incremental Sensing head
M = 2048 Z per 360 degrees mech. G depends on the precision of the toothed/measuring wheel encoder system Condition: Z = 2n
Spindle positioning with the NC
3-70
05.01
Table 3-4
Direct position sensing, analog controls M: Max. possible measuring steps G: Encoder system accuracy Z: Pulse number Standard track Numerical control n* (analog) SIMODRIVE drive module Toothed wheel L1 1PH2 Ms = ks Z 4 per 360 degrees mech. Caxis track Mc = kc Z 4 per 360 degrees mech. ks...1, 2, 4, 8 kc...175.78, 351.56 Spindle Sensing head ks, kc... factors which can be set in the HGL module G depends on the precision of the toothed/measuring wheel encoder system Standard track Ms = ks Z 4 per 360 degrees mech. Caxis track Sensing head Standard/Caxis operation x4 x4 l 50 m Caxis track l 50 m Spindle positioning with the NC HGL module: refer to Section 3.6 Standard track ks HGL module kc Mc = kc Z 4 per 360 degrees mech. ks...1, 2, 4, 8 kc...175.78, 351.56 ks, kc... factors which can be set in the HGL module G depends on the precision of the toothed/ measuring wheel encoder system
Main spindle control with analog setpoint inter face
Standard/Caxis operation x4 Standard track x4 l < 50 m Caxis track
L2 ks HGL module kc
Incremental L1 and L2 50 m
Caxis operation with NC HGL module: refer to Section 3.6
l 50 m Numerical control Main spindle control with analog setpoint inter face SIMODRIVE drive (analog) module n*
Toothed wheel
1PH4/6/7 Terminating connector
3-71
05.01
Table 3-5
Direct position sensing, digital controls M: max. possible measuring steps G: Encoder system accuracy V: Multiplication Z: Pulse number M = V*Z per 360 degrees mech. V = 2048 GMotor encoder = 0.006 degrees GBERO = 1)
Direct position sensing, digital controls
3
Numerical control Drive control Perfor mance digital FD and MSD Basic version
SIMODRIVE drive (digital) module
n*
BERO function for feed drives not released l 50 m Incremental
1PH4/6/7
BERO
Spindle positioning with the NC n* SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK drive with digital (digital) module coupling Toothed wheel l 50 m 1PH2 M = V*Z per 360 degrees mech.
Spindle Sensing head Voltage signals Spindle positioning with the NC n* SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE with digital drive (digital) coupling module Linear2) measuring system, incremental
G depends on the precision of the toothed/measuring wheel encoder system M = 2048 per encoder signal period and grid division G is dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system.
Voltage l 50 m signals
Drive control Perfor mance Digital FD and MSD with addi tional input, current signa
1FT6 1FK6 Current signals Positioning with NC Voltage signals l 50 m l 18 m Rotary measuring system, incremental Incremental
Numerical control
n*
M = V*Z per 360 degrees mech. V = 2048 G is dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system.
1PH4/6/7 Current signals Spindle positioning with the NC
l 18 m
3-72
05.01
Table 3-5
Direct position sensing, digital controls M: max. possible measuring steps G: Encoder system accuracy V: Multiplication Z: Pulse number Linear2) measuring system, incremental M = 2048 per encoder signal period and grid division G is dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system. l 50 m Linear2) measuring system, incremental M = 2048 per encoder signal period and grid division G is dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system.
n* SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE with digital drive (digital) coupling module
l 50 m
Drive control Perfor mance Digital FD and MSD with addi tional input voltage signal Positioning with NC
1FT6 1FK6 Voltage signals
n* SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE with digital drive (digital) coupling module
l 50 m
1FT6 1FK6 Voltage signals l 50 m Positioning with NC n* SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK drive with digital (digital) module coupling SVE Current signals Linear measuring system, incremental and absolute
l 18 m
l 50 m
M = 2048 per encoder signal period and grid division G is dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system.
1FK6 1FT6 Voltage signals and EnDat interface Positioning with NC n* Data Clock Rotary measuring system, incremental l 50 m Incremental l 50 m
Numerical control
M = 2048 Z per 360 degrees mech. Z...Pulse number V = 2048 G is dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system.
1PH4/6/7
Spindle positioning with the NC
l 50 m
3-73
05.01
Table 3-5
Direct position sensing, digital controls M: Max. possible measuring steps G: Encoder system accuracy M = 2048 per encoder signal period and grid division G is dependent on the accuracy of the optional encoder system.
Control board version SINUMERIK with digital coupling
n* (digital)
3
Drive control Standard Digital FD with addi tional input voltage signal
SIMODRIVE drive module
l 25 m
Linear2) measuring system, incremental
1FT6 1FK6 Voltage signals Positioning with NC n* SIMODRIVE SINUMERIK drive with digital (digital) module coupling l 25 m l 25 m Linear measuring system, incremental and absolute
1FK6 1FT6 Voltage signals and EnDat interface Positioning with NC Data Clock l 25 m 3)
M, G=function of the optional encoder system accuracy, the evaluation technique in the NC and the mechanical design. The resolution per encoder period and grid division in the drive is 128.
Note: It is not possible to convert current signals into voltage signals via an SVE (signal amplification electronics) due to the encoder power supply design! 1) The absolute accuracy when synchronizing with a BERO is a function of: the BERO switching time BERO hysteresis signal edge gradient of the BERO signal (dependent on the direction of rotation!) and the switching thresholds in the drive; high >13 V, low < 5 V the search speed or the signal run times in the evaluation electronics 2) Distancecoded reference marks can be evaluated when used as direct measuring system. 3) 25m cable: 6FX20022EQ101VVV 18m cable: 6FX20022EQ001VVV
3-74
05.01
3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing 3.6 Highresolution position (HGL)
3.6
3.6.1
Highresolution position (HGL)

Features and technical data
HGL is an optional hardware expansion for SIMODRIVE 611 for C axis operation. HGL allows the toothedwheel encoder to be independently used as spindle encoder for conventional spindle drives.
Applications
Mode of operation
The analog sinusoidal signals of the toothedwheel encoder are fed to the converter motor encoder connector for the closedloop speed control. The encoder signals are multiplied and converted into squarewave signals for the higherlevel closedloop position control. These are fed to the numerical control, once for spindle operation and once for Caxis operation. Various multiplication factors can be selected using a rotary switch. In addition, the phase sequence of the squarewave signals can be defined using the rotary switch. This allows the direction of rotation of the encoder to be adapted to the motor direction of rotation. Note When configuring SIMODRIVE 611 analog: Assessment factor for the electronics: EP = 2 Assessment factor for control: AP = 0
Order designation Technical data
SIMODRIVE 611 analog: 6SN11150AA110AA0 (module). The Instruction Manual is included with the equipment. Output signals resolution Set via rotary switch S1:
Table 3-6 Number of teeth 512 512 512 512 512 512 512 512 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 256 Resolution Caxis track Standard track Standard encoder phase position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Inverted encoder phase sequence 8 9 A B C D E F 8 9 A B C D E F
90 000 90 000 90 000 90 000 180 000 180 000 180 000 180 000 45 000 45 000 45 000 45 000 90 000 90 000 90 000 90 000
512 1 024 2 048 4 096 512 1 024 2 048 4 096 256 512 1 024 2 048 256 512 1 024 2 048
3-75
05.01
3.6.2
Connector assignment
X 511 X 512 Connection, toothedwheel encoder Output to SIMODRIVE or terminating connector
(Subminiature D 15pin; socket)
Table 3-7 PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Connector assignment, X511 and X512 Signal name P encoder M encoder A A inverse inside shield B B inverse nc 5 V sense R 0 V sense R inverse nc + Temp. Temp. Explanation Encoder power supply Encoder power supply Signal A Signal A, inverted Inner shield Signal B Signal B, inverted Not assigned Sensor cable Signal R Sensor cable Signal R, inverted Not assigned Temperature sensor Temperature sensor (ground) (voltage) (voltage) (voltage) (voltage)
(voltage) (ground) (voltage)
X 521 X 522
Output, standard track Output, C axis track
(subminiature D 15pin; plug connector)

Table 3-8 PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Connector assignment X521 and X522 Signal name nc M A A inverse nc B B inverse nc nc nc nc R R inverse nc nc Explanation Not assigned Ground Signal A Signal A, inverted Not assigned Signal B Signal B, inverted Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Not assigned Signal R Signal R, inverted Not assigned Not assigned
(voltage) (voltage)
(voltage)
(voltage) (voltage)
3-76
05.01
3.6.3
System configurations and cable connections

HGL is not required in this configuration.
1PH2 motor without Caxis operation
Toothed/measuring wheel 1PH2~
Spindle
Chuck
Workpiece
Sensing head Drive converter 611A X412 ~ 6FX20022CA310 VVV NC Measuring circuit 1, standard track
6FX20022CB1 10VVV X432 n1 x pulse number/3600 mech n1 = 1; 2; 4; 8
Fig. 3-11
System configuration, 1PH2 motor without Caxis operation
1PH2 motors with Caxis operation

Toothed/measuring wheel 1PH2~ Spindle Chuck Workpiece
Sensing head Drive converter ~ X412 611A HGL X512 X511 6FX20022CB1 10VVV X521 X522 n1 x pulse number/3600 mech n1 = 1; 2; 4; 8 n2 x 175.78125 x pulse number/3600 mech n2 = 1; 2 n1, n2= can be selected via switch S1 Fig. 3-12 System configuration, 1PH2 motor with Caxis operation ~ 6FC93480FY 6FX20022CA510 VVV NC Measuring circuit 1, standard track Measuring circuit 2, Caxis track
3-77
05.01
1PH4/6/7 motor with toothed wheel encoder as spindle encoder
For this configuration, HGL is required, both for standard spindle operation as well as for Caxis operation.
Note In order to ensure perfect operation with this configuration, the terminating connector must be inserted at X512. The terminating connector is included with the HGL.
Toothed/measuring wheel Sensing head Spindle
Chuck
Workpiece
ERN 1387 RON 350
1PH4 1PH6 1PH7
6FX20022CA510 VVV
6FX20022CA510 VVV 2048 611 converter X412 HGL X512 X511 6FX20022CB1 10VVV X521 X522 n1 x pulse number/360 mech n1 = 1; 2; 4; 8 n2 x 175.78125 x pulse number/360 mech n2 = 1; 2 n1, n2= can be selected via switch S1 Fig. 3-13 System configuration 1PH4/6/7 motor with C toothedwheel encoder as spindle encoder Terminating connector
NC Measuring circuit 1, standard track Measuring circuit 2, Caxis track
3-78
05.01
3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing 3.7 Ordering information
3.7
Ordering information
Order Nos. for the specified components, refer to the relevant Catalog
S Preassembled encoder cables with

appropriate maximum permissible cable lengths
refer to Catalog NC Z
S SVE signal amplification S HGL module S Toothed wheel encoder and the
required diagnostics box for adjustment
refer to Catalog NC 60 refer to Catalog NC 60 refer to Catalog NC Z or NC 60
S For drives with an analog speed setpoint interface, the encoder systems are
evaluated in the numerical control to sense the direct and indirect position. When using Siemens controls, the encoder systems which can be evaluated can be taken from the appropriate catalogs. The same is true for the associated Order Nos. for the controls and measuring circuit boards. J
3-79
3 Motor Selection, Position/Speed Sensing 3.7 Ordering information
05.01
3-80
Power Modules
4
4
Description
Together with the control module, the power module forms the drive module, e.g. for feed or main spindle applications. The power modules are suitable for operation with the following motors:
S 1FT5, 1FT6 and 1FK6 servomotors S 1FN linear motors S 1PH2, 1PH3, 1PH4, 1PH7 and 1FE1 main spindle motors S Standard induction motors
There is a wide range of power modules, in 1axis and 2axis versions graduated according to currents and subdivided into three different cooling types. The current data refers to the series default setting. Currents must be reduced as listed in the following, for higher basic fundamental frequencies, or for higher clock frequencies, ambient temperature and installation altitudes above 1000 m above sea level. Matching preassembled power cables are available to connect the motors. The ordering data is provided in Catalog NC 60, in the Motors section. Shield connecting plates for mounting on the module are available so that shielded power cables can be connected in compliance with EMC guidelines. The equipment bus cable is part of the scope of supply of the power module. For the digital system, the drive bus cables must be separately ordered. The current specified on the power modules are normalized values, which refer to all of the control modules. The output currents can be limited by the control module. After the control module has been inserted, the retaining screws at the front panel of the control module must be tightened in order to ensure a good electrical connection to the module housing.
Caution After the control module has been inserted, the retaining screws at the front panel of the control module must be tightened in order to ensure a good electrical connection to the module housing.
4-81
4 Power Modules
05.01
Power module, internal cooling
Control module (refer to Section 7)
4
M3 / 0.8 Nm 50 mm power module
Order No.
M4 / 1.8 Nm
Type plate/Order No. PE
Fig. 4-1
Power module with control module
4-82
05.01
4 Power Modules 4.1 Technical data
4.1
4.1.1
Table 4-1
Technical data
Technical data, power modules
Technical data/power module, 1axis version 6SN 11231AA0. 6SN 11241AA0. 6SN 11231AA0. 0HA1 0HA1 Non ventilated 0AA1 0AA1 Non ventilated 0BA1 0BA1 Force ventilated 0CA1 0CA1 Force ventilated 0DA1 0DA1 Force ventilated 0EA1 0EA1 Force ventilated 0FA1 0FA1 0FA1 Force ventilated
Internal cooling External cooling Hose cooling Cooling type
To use 1FT5 motors with control module 6SN11 180Ax11xxxx Rated current Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo1) X11) A A W kHz % 4 8 35 / 14 / 21 3.3 55 7.5 15 45 / 18 / 27 3.3 55 12.5 25 90 / 35 / 55 3.3 55 25 50 180 / 62 / 118 3.3 40 40 80 300 / 30 / 270 3.3 50 80 160 655 / 30 / 625 3.3 55 100 200 740 / 90 / 650 3.3 55
To use 1FT6 motors/1FK6 motors with control module 6SN11 180Bx11xxxx Rated current Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo1) X11) A A W kHz % 3 6 35 / 14 / 21 3.3 55 5 10 50 / 19 / 31 3.3 55 9 18 90 / 35 / 55 3.3 55 18 36 190 / 65 / 125 3.3 40 28 56 300 / 30 / 270 3.3 50 56 112 645 / 25 / 620 3.3 55 70 140 730 / 90 / 640 3.3 55
To use 1FT6 motors/1FK6 motors/1FN motors with control module 6SN11 180Dx11xxxx, 6SN11 18xNxxxxxxx Rated current Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo1) X11) A A W kHz % 3 6 35 / 14 / 21 4 55 5 10 50 / 19 / 31 4 55 9 18 90 / 35 / 55 4 55 18 36 190 / 65 / 125 4 50 28 56 300 / 30 / 270 4 50 56 112 645 / 25 / 620 4 55 70 140 730 / 90 / 640 4 55
To use 1PH and 1FE1 motors and induction motors with control module 6SN11 210BA11xxxx, 6SN11 220BA11xxxx To use 1PH and 1FE1 motors with control module 6SN11 180Dxxxxxxx Rated current Current for S640% Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo1) X11) A A A W 3 3 3 30 / 12 / 18 3.2 50 5 5 8 40 / 16 / 24 3.2 50 8 10 16 74 / 29 / 45 3.2 50 24 32 32 260 / 89 / 171 3.2 50 30 40 51 320 / 32 / 288 3.2 55 60 80 102 685 / 30 / 655 3.2 50 85 110 127 850 / 100 / 750 3.2 50
kHz %
_________ fo = inverter clock frequency 1) X1 = reduction factor of the current, current derating from the inverter clock frequency f0 of the power transistors (Fig. 4-2) 2) The 1st number is valid for cable lugs, the 2nd number is valid for finelystranded conductors without conn. sleeves. 3) If internal cooling or hose cooling is used, then only Pvtot should be considered. 4) For UL certification: only use copper cables designed for an operating temperature of w 60C.
4-83
05.01
Table 4-1
Technical data/power module, 1axis version 6SN 11231AA0. 6SN 11241AA0. 6SN 11231AA0. 0HA1 0HA1 Non ventilated 0AA1 0AA1 Non ventilated 0BA1 0BA1 Force ventilated 0CA1 0CA1 Force ventilated 0DA1 0DA1 Force ventilated 0EA1 0EA1 Force ventilated 0FA1 0FA1 0FA1 Force ventilated
To use induction motors with control module 6SN11 180Dxxxxxxx, 6SN11 18xNxxxxxxx
Rated current Current for S640% Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo1) X11)
A A A W
2.8 2.8 2.8 30 / 12 / 18 4 55
4.6 4.6 7.3 40 / 16 / 24 4 55
7.4 9.3 14.8 74 / 29 / 45 4 55
22 39 29 260 / 89 / 171 4 50
28 37 47 460 / 19 / 441 4 50
55 73 94 685 / 30 / 655 4 55
79 102 117 850 / 100 / 750 4 55
kHz %
General data for controlled infeed modules Input voltage Output voltage Efficiency Module width Max. crosssection 2)4) Weight, approx.: Internal cooling External cooling V V mm mm2 600/625/680 DC 3ph. 0 to 430 V 0.98 50 6/4 50 6/4 50 6/4 50 6/4 100 16/10 150 50 300 95 or 2x35 26 26
kg kg
6.5 6.5
6.5 6.5
6.5 6.5
6.5 6.5
9.5 9.5
13 13
_________ fo = inverter clock frequency 1) X1 = reduction factor of the current, current derating from inverter clock frequency f0 of the power transistors (Fig. 4-2) 2) The 1st number is valid for cable lugs, the 2nd number is valid for finelystranded conductors without conn. sleeves. 3) If internal cooling or hose cooling is used, then only Pvtot should be considered. 4) For UL certification: only use copper cables designed for an operating temperature of w 60C.
4-84
05.01
Table 4-2
Technical data/power module, 1axis version (additional power modules) 6SN 11231AA0. 6SN 11241AA0. 6SN 11231AA0. 0LA1 0LA1 Force ventilated 0JA1 0JA1 0JA1 Force ventilated 0KA1 0KA1 0KA1 Force ventilated
To use 1FT6 motors/1FK6 motors/1FN motors with control module 6SN11 180Bx11xxxx Rated current Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo 1) X1 1) A A W kHz % 42 64 460 / 25 / 435 3.3 55 100 100 1300 / 170 / 1130 3.3 55 140 210 1910 / 250 / 1660 3.3 55
To use 1FT6 motors/1FK6 motors/1FN motors with control module 6SN11 180Dxxxxxxx, 6SN11 18xNxxxxxxx Rated current Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo 1) X1 1) A A W kHz % 42 64 460 / 25 / 435 4 55 100 100 1300 / 170 / 1130 4 55 140 210 1910 / 250 / 1660 4 55
General data for controlled infeed modules Input voltage Output voltage Efficiency Module width Max. crosssection 2)4) Weight, approx.: Internal cooling External cooling V V mm mm2 600/625/680 DC 3ph. 0 to 430 V 0.98 150 50 300 95 or 2 x 35 26 26 300 150 or 2 x 50 28 28
kg kg
13 13
_________ fo = inverter clock frequency 1) X1 = reduction factor of the current, current derating from inverter clock frequency f0 of the power transistors (Fig. 4-2) 2) The 1st number is valid for cable lugs, the 2nd number is valid for finelystranded conductors without conn. sleeves. 3) If internal cooling or hose cooling is used, then only Pvtot should be considered. 4) For UL certification: only use copper cables designed for an operating temperature of w 60C.
4-85
05.01
Table 4-3
Technical data/power module, 2axis version 6SN 11231AB0. 6SN 11241AB0. 0HA1 0HA1 Non ventilated 0AA1 0AA1 Force ventilated 0BA1 0BA1 Force ventilated 0CA1 0CA1 Force ventilated
Internal cooling External cooling Cooling type
To use 1FT5 motors with control module 6SN11 180Ax11xxxx Rated current Peak current A A W kHz % 4 8 70 / 27 / 43 3.3 55 7.5 15 105 / 40 / 64 3.3 55 12.5 25 174 / 67 / 107 3.3 55 25 50 364 / 124 / 240 3.3 55
Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo 1) X1 1)
To use 1FT6 motors/1FK6 motors with control module 6SN11 180Bx11xxxx Rated current Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo 1) X1 1) A A W kHz % 3 6 70 / 27 / 43 3.3 55 5 10 100 / 38 / 62 3.3 55 9 18 180 / 69 / 111 3.3 55 18 36 380 / 130 / 250 3.3 55
To use 1FT6 motors/1FK6 motors/1FN motors with control module 6SN11 180Dxxxxxxx, 6SN11 18xNxxxxxxx Rated current Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo 1) X1 1) A A W kHz % 3 6 70 / 27 / 43 4 55 5 10 100 / 38 / 62 4 55 9 18 180 / 69 / 111 4 55 18 36 380 / 130 / 250 4 55
To use 1PH and 1FE1 motors and induction motors with control module 6SN11 18xNxxxxxxx Rated current Current for S640% Peak current Power loss, total/ internal/external 3) fo 1) X1 1) A A A W kHz % 3 3 3 76 / 28 / 48 3.2 55 5 5 8 118 / 42 / 76 3.2 55 8 10 16 226 / 74 / 152 3.2 55 24 32 32 538 / 184 / 354 3.2 55
General data for controlled infeed modules Input voltage Output voltage Efficiency Module width Max. crosssection 2)4) Weight, approx.: Internal cooling External cooling V V mm mm2 600/625/680 DC 3ph. 0 to 430 V 0.98 50 6/4 50 6/4 50 6/4 100 6/4
kg kg
7 7
7 7
7 7
13.5 13.5
_________ fo = inverter clock frequency 1) X1 = reduction factor of the current, current derating from inverter clock frequency f0 of the power transistors (Fig. 4-2) 2) The 1st number is valid for cable lugs, the 2nd number is valid for finelystranded conductors without conn. sleeves. 3) If internal cooling or hose cooling is used, then only Pvtot should be considered. 4) For UL certification only use copper cables designed for an operating temperature of w 60C.
4-86
05.01
Table 4-4
Order No. assignment
PM type Internal cooling PM 8 A PM 15 A PM 25 A PM 50 A PM 80 A PM 160 A PM 200 A PM 2x8 A PM 2x15 A PM 2x25 A PM 2x50 A 6SN11 23 1AA00 0HA1 6SN11 23 1AA00 0AA1 6SN11 23 1AA00 0BA1 6SN11 23 1AA00 0CA1 6SN11 23 1AA00 0DA1 6SN11 23 1AA00 0EA1 6SN11 23 1AA00 0FA1 6SN11 23 1AB00 0HA1 6SN11 23 1AB00 0AA1 6SN11 23 1AB00 0BA1 6SN11 23 1AB00 0CA1
Power modules External cooling 6SN11 24 1AA00 0HA1 6SN11 24 1AA00 0AA1 6SN11 24 1AA00 0BA1 6SN11 24 1AA00 0CA1 6SN11 24 1AA00 0DA1 6SN11 24 1AA00 0EA1 6SN11 24 1AA00 0FA1 6SN11 24 1AB00 0HA1 6SN11 24 1AB00 0AA1 6SN11 24 1AB00 0BA1 6SN11 24 1AB00 0CA1
4-87
4 Power Modules 4.2 Current derating
05.01
4.2
Current derating
For MSD/IMM digital and MSD/IMM analog: Sinusoidal current, current data are RMS values. 1. In continuous current 2. Is6 current for max. 4 min for S6 duty cycle 3. Imax Peak current (load duty cycle, refer to Section 4.3) For FD analog: Squarewave current, the current values are the amplitude of the squarewave current. For FD digital: The sinusoidal currents are RMS values. 1. In 2. Imax continuous current Peak current (load duty cycle, refer to Section 4.3) total module power loss power loss which can be dissipated through hose cooling power loss which can be dissipated through external cooling power loss which is not dissipated via hose or external cooling This power loss remains in the cabinet
Definition of the currents
4
Definition of the outputs
Pvtot Pvhose Pvext Pvint
Current derating depends on the inverter clock frequency
X1 = reduction factor of the current, current derating from inverter clock frequency f0 of the power transistors (refer to technical data).
I In 100 % X1 f1 [kHz] 0 Fig. 4-2 f0 8 Ambient temperature up to 40 _C
0%
Current derating depends on the inverter clock frequency
Formula: (100 % X1) (fT f0) 8kHz f0 x = the reduction factor obtained [in %] for In, Is6, Imax fT = selected inverter clock frequency X=100% InfT = x Inf0/100 % Is6fT = x Is6f0/100 % ImaxfT = x Imaxf0/100 %
Caution: The currents In, Is6 and Imax must be reduced in the same way.
4-88
05.01
4.2.1
Information on the motordrive converter selection, MSD analog

Various inverter clock frequencies can be parameterized; observe the current derating. Inverter clock frequency for MSD analog f0=3.2 kHz: The currents are a function of the inverter clock frequency fT.
Table 4-5
Currents as a function of the inverter clock frequency In/Is6/Imax in A In/Is6/Imax in A fT 4.70 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 6.30 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 7.80 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 2.80 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 3.90 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 5.00 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 5.90 kHz
PM type LT 50A LT 80A LT 108A LT 120A LT 160A LT 200A LT 300A LT 400A
Code No. 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12
fT 3.20 kHz
24/32/32 20/26/26 15/20/20 10/14/14 24/32/32 22/29/29 19/25/25 16/21/21 30/40/51 26/34/44 21/28/36 17/23/29 30/40/51 28/37/48 25/33/42 22/30/38 45/60/76 39/52/65 32/43/54 26/34/43 45/60/76 42/56/71 37/50/63 34/45/57 45/60/76 39/52/65 32/43/54 26/34/43 45/60/76 42/56/71 37/50/63 34/45/57 60/80/102 51/68/86 41/54/69 31/42/53 60/80/102 56/74/95 49/65/83 43/58/73 85/110/127 73/95/109 60/78/90 48/63/72 85/110/127 79/103/119 71/91/106 63/82/95 120/150/193 101/127/163 81/102/131 62/78/101 120/150/193 111/139/179 98/122/157 86/108/139 200/250/257 169/211/217 135/169/174 104/130/134 200/250/257 185/232/238 163/203/209 144/180/185 up to including FW 2.xx from FW 3.0
For special motors with a lower leakage induction, it may be necessary to provide a series reactor and/or increase the inverter clock frequency of the drive converter. From experience, motors with low leakage induction are those which can achieve high stator frequencies (maximum motor stator frequency> 300 Hz) or motors with a higher rated current (rated current > 85 A). IN Imin IS6 IShort I0Mot nFS nmax Rated module current at the converter pulse frequency (standard value: f0 3.2 kHz) Minimum motor current Max. motor current for an S6 load duty cycle Shorttime limiting current of the module used in Arms Noload motor current in Arms Speed at the start of field weakening Max. motor speed
Dimensioning the series reactor, refer to Section 6
4-89
05.01
4.2.2
Information on the motordrive converter selection, IM analog

The converter must be selected according to the required duty cycle. Further, the following restrictive conditions must be observed:
S The motor noload current must be less than the rated current of the drive
converter module (IM according to Table 4-6).
S As result of the current actual value resolution, the lowest noload motor
current must fulfill the following condition:
4
Table 4-6
nFS nmax
I0Mot
Imin
(Imin according to Table 4-6)
Various inverter clock frequencies can be parameterized; observe the current derating.
Inverter clock frequency IM analog f0=3.2 kHz: Currents as a function of the inverter clock frequency fT In/Is6/Imax in A PM type LT 8A LT 15A LT 25A LT 50A LT 80A LT 108A LT 120A LT 160A LT 200A LT 300A LT 400A Code No. 1 2 3 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12 fT 3.20 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 4.70 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 6.30 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 7.80 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 2.80 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 3.90 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 5.00 kHz In/Is6/Imax in A fT 5.90 kHz 0.6 1.1 1.8 3.6 5.7 8.5 11.3 11.3 14.1 21.2 28.3 Imin in A
3/3/3 2.5/2.5/2.5 2.0/2.0/2.0 1.6/1.6/1.6 3/3/3 2.8/2.8/2.8 2.4/2.4/2.4 2.2/2.2/2.2 5/5/8 4.2/4.2/6.8 3.4/3.4/5.4 2.6/2.6/4.2 5/5/8 4.6/4.6/7.4 4.1/4.1/6.5 3.6/3.6/5.8 8/10/16 6.9/8.6/13.8 5.7/7.1/11.4 4.6/5.7/9.1 8/10/16 7.4/9.3/15.0 6.7/8.3/13.3 6.0/7.5/12.0 24/32/32 20/26/26 15/20/20 10/14/14 24/32/32 22/29/29 19/25/25 16/21/21 30/40/51 26/34/44 21/28/36 17/23/29 30/40/51 28/37/48 25/33/42 22/30/38 45/60/76 39/52/65 32/43/54 26/34/43 45/60/76 42/56/71 37/50/63 34/45/57 45/60/76 39/52/65 32/43/54 26/34/43 45/60/76 42/56/71 37/50/63 34/45/57 60/80/102 51/68/86 41/54/69 31/42/53 60/80/102 56/74/95 49/65/83 43/58/73 85/110/127 73/95/109 60/78/90 48/63/72 85/110/127 79/103/119 71/91/106 63/82/95 120/150/193 101/127/163 81/102/131 62/78/101 120/150/193 111/139/179 98/122/157 86/108/139 200/250/257 169/211/217 135/169/174 104/130/134 200/250/257 185/232/238 163/203/209 144/180/185 up to including FW 2.xx from FW 3.0
IN Imin IS6 IShort I0Mot nFS nmax
Rated module current at the converter pulse frequency (standard value: f0 3.2 kHz) Minimum motor current Max. motor current for an S6 load duty cycle Shorttime limiting current of the module used in Arms Noload motor current in Arms Speed at the start of field weakening Maximum motor speed
S For motors with a low leakage induction, it may be necessary to provide a

series reactor and/or increase the inverter clock frequency of the drive converter. From experience, motors with low leakage induction are those which can achieve high stator frequencies (maximum motor stator frequency > 300 Hz) or motors with a higher rated current (rated current > 85 A).
4-90
05.01
4.2.3
Information on motorconverter selection, FD control, digital

Various inverter clock frequencies can be parameterized; observe the current derating. An inverter clock frequency is preset for FD digital fT=4.0 kHz: The currents are a function of the inverter clock frequency fT.
Table 4-7
Currents as a function of the inverter clock frequency In/Imax [A] In/Imax [A] fT 4.92 kHz 2.7/5.4 4.5/9.0 8.1/16.1 16/31 2x2.7/5.4 2x4.5/9.0 2x8.1/16.1 2x16/31 25/50 50/100 63/126 124/186 In/Imax [A] fT 5.33 kHz 2.6/5.2 4.3/8.6 7.8/15.5 14/29 2x2.6/5.2 2x4.3/8.6 2x7.8/15.5 2x14/29 23/47 48/97 60/121 117/175 In/Imax [A] fT 5.82 kHz 2.4/4.8 4.0/8.0 7.2/14.3 13/26 2x2.4/4.8 2x4.0/8.0 2x7.2/14.3 2x13/26 22/43 45/89 56/111 108/162 In/Imax [A] fT 6.40 kHz 2.2/4.4 3.7/7.3 6.6/13.3 12/23 2x2.2/4.4 2x3.7/7.3 2x6.6/13.1 2x12/23 20/39 41/82 51/102 98/147 In/Imax [A] fT 7.11 kHz 2.0/3.9 3.3/6.5 5.9/11.7 10/19 2x2.0/3.9 2x3.3/6.5 2x5.9/11.7 2x10/19 17/34 36/73 46/91 85/128 In/Imax [A] fT 8.00 kHz 1.7/3.3 2.8/5.5 5.0/9.9 7/14 2x1.7/3.3 2x2.8/5.5 2x5.0/9.9 2x7/14 14/28 31/62 39/77 70/105
PM type 8A 15 A 25 A 50 A 2x8 A 2x15 A 2x25 A 2x50 A 80 A 160 A A200 400 A
Code No. 17 18 20 22 17 18 20 22 23 25 26 28
fT 4.57 kHz 2.8/5.6 4.7/9.4 8.4/16.8 16/33 2x2.8/5.6 2x4.7/9.4 2x8.4/16.8 2x16/33 26/52 52/105 66/131 130/195
4-91
05.01
4.2.4
Information on motorconverter selection MSD control, digital

Various inverter clock frequencies can be parameterized; observe the current derating. An inverter clock frequency is preset for MSD digital fT=3.2 kHz: The currents are a function of the inverter clock frequency fT.
Table 4-8
Currents as a function of the inverter clock frequency In/Is6/Imax in A In/Is6/Imax in A fT 3.37 kHz 23/31/31 30/39/50 44/59/75 44/59/75 59/79/100 84/108/125 118/147/190 196/246/252 In/Is6/Imax in A fT 3.56 kHz 23/31/31 29/39/49 43/58/73 43/58/73 58/77/98 82/106/123 116/144/186 193/241/247 In/Is6/Imax in A fT 3.76 kHz 23/30/30 28/38/48 43/57/72 43/57/72 57/75/96 81/104/120 113/141/182 188/235/242 In/Is6/Imax in A fT 4.00 kHz 22/29/29 28/37/47 42/56/70 42/56/70 55/73/94 79/102/117 110/138/177 183/229/236 In/Is6/Imax in A fT 4.27 kHz 21/28/28 27/36/46 40/54/68 40/54/68 53/71/91 76/99/114 107/133/171 178/222/228
4
Code No. 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12 Power module type LT 50A LT 80A LT 108A LT 120A LT 160A LT 200A LT 300A LT 400A
fT 3.20 kHz 24/32/32 30/40/51 45/60/76 45/60/75 60/80/102 85/110/127 120/150/193 200/250/257
In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax in A in A in A in A Code No. 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12 Power module type LT 50A LT 80A LT 108A LT 120A LT 160A LT 200A LT 300A LT 400A fT 4.57 kHz fT 4.92 kHz fT 5.33 kHz fT 5.82 kHz
In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax In/Is6/Imax in A in A in A fT 6.40 kHz fT 7.11 kHz fT 8.00 kHz
16/22/22 14/19/19 12/16/16 10/13/13 19/25/25 18/23/23 20/27/27 17/22/28 24/32/41 23/30/38 21/28/36 19/25/32 25/34/43 26/35/44 32/42/53 29/38/48 25/33/42 38/50/64 36/48/61 34/45/57 39/52/66 25/33/42 34/45/57 32/42/53 29/38/48 38/50/64 36/48/61 39/52/66 36/47/60 30/40/51 49/66/84 47/62/79 44/58/74 40/53/68 51/69/87 60/77/89 54/70/80 47/61/70 71/92/107 68/88/102 64/83/96 74/96/111 60/75/97 103/129/165 98/123/158 93/117/150 87/109/140 80/100/129 71/89/114 1 171/214/220 164/205/21 156/195/200 145/182/187 133/167/171 119/148/152 100/125/129
4-92
05.01
4.2.5
Information on the motorconverter selection IM control digital

Two inverter clock frequencies can be parameterized: 4 kHz and 8 kHz. Please observe the current derating at 8 kHz.
Table 4-9 Current load as a function of the inverter clock frequency In/IS6/Imax in A Code No. 1 2 4 6 7 13 8 9 10 11 12 Power module type LT 8A LT 15A LT 25A LT 50A LT 80A LT 108A LT 120A LT 160A LT 200A LT 300A LT 400A fT 4.00 kHz 2.8/2.8/2.8 4.6/4.6/7.3 7.4/9.3/14.8 22/29/29 28/37/47 42/56/70 42/56/70 55/73/94 79/102/117 110/138/177 183/229/236 In/IS6/Imax in A fT 8.00 kHz 1.5/1.5/1.5 2.5/2.5/4.0 4.4/5.5/8.8 10/13/13 17/22/28 25/33/42 25/33/42 30/40/51 47/61/70 60/75/97 100/125/129 0.6 1.1 1.8 3.6 5.7 8.5 11.3 11.3 14.1 21.2 28.3 Imin in A
Dimensioning the series reactor, refer to Section 4.2.2
Heatsink temperature monitoring Current derating is dependent on the installation altitude
The individual power modules have different heatsink response temperatures. Range, approx. 80 C to 100 C at the measuring point. All of the specified load currents are valid up to an installation altitude of 1000 m. For installation altitude > 1000 m, the load currents must be derated according to the diagram below.
XH 100 % 80 % 60 % 40 % 20 % 0% 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 Installation altitude (m) Pn altitude=xHPn1000m/100% Pn altitude=xHPs61000m/100% Pmax. altitude=xHPmax. 1000m/100%
Fig. 4-3
Current derating is dependent on the installation altitude
Caution: The currents In, Is6 and Imax must be reduced in the same way. In altitude = xH In1000 m/100% Is6 altitude = xH Is61000 m/100% Imax altitude = xH Imax1000 m/100% Example: PM 50 A: with MSD analog control: selected inverter clock frequencies 6.3 kHz; installation altitude 2000 m
4-93
05.01
(100% 40%) (6.3 kHz 3.2 kHz) = 61.25%; XH = 83% 8kHz 3.2 kHz In6.3 kHz, 2000 m = (x Inf0/100%) xH/100% = 12 A Is6.3 kHz, 2000 m = (x Is6f0/100%) xH/100% = 16 A Imax6.3 kHz, 2000 m = (x Imaxf0/100%) xH/100% = 16 A X=100% Permissible currents of the SIMODRIVE power modules for induction motors and main spindle drive applications (various S6 load duty cycles, defined, e.g. S6 load duty cycles listed, e.g. S6-25% 2.5 min/7.5 min):
Table 4-10 Currents for an inverter clock frequency f0=3.2 kHz 8A * 3.0 A 2.1 A 3.0 A 3.0 A 3.0 A 3.0 A 3.0 A 3.0 A 3.0 A 15 A * 5.0 A 3.5 A 5.0 A 5.0 A 5.2 A 5.4 A 5.7 A 6.6 A 8.0 A 25 A * 8.0 A 5.6 A 8.0 A 10.0 A 10.8 A 11.5 A 12.3 A 14.9 A 16.0 A 50 A ** 24.0 A 16.8 A 26.0 A 32.0 A 32.0 A 32.0 A 32.0 A 32.0 A 32.0 A 80 A ** 30.0 A 21.0 A 34.0 A 40.0 A 42.1 A 44.2 A 45.7 A 48.6 A 51.0 A 108 A ** 45.0 A 31.5 A 50.0 A 60.0 A 62.7 A 65.0 A 67.7 A 72.3 A 76.0 A 160 A ** 60.0 A 42.0 A 70.0 A 80.0 A 86.5 A 89.2 A 91.9 A 97.4 A 102.0 A 200 A ** 85 A 59.5 A 100 A 110 A 113 A 116 A 119 A 123 A 127 A 300 A ** 120 A 84 A 135 A 150 A 153 A 155 A 159 A 173 A 193 A 400 A ** 200 A 140 A 225 A 250 A 252 A 253 A 254 A 255 A 257 A
PM module Irated 0.7 Irated I S6-60% I S6-40% I S6-30% I S6-25% I S6-20% I S6-10% Imax
The 0.7Irated current has been kept constant. * Currents are only valid for induction motor applications, analog internal and external cooling. ** Currents are valid for main spindle drive/induction motor applications, analog and for main spindle drive digital, int. and external cooling.
4-94
05.01
Table 4-11 PM module Irated 0.7 Irated I S6-60% I S6-40% I S6-30% I S6-25% I S6-20% I S6-10% Imax
Currents for an inverter clock frequency f0=4.0 kHz (derating) 8A * 2.8 A 2.0 A 2.8 A 2.8 A 2.8 A 2.8 A 2.8 A 2.8 A 2.8 A 15 A * 4.6 A 3.2 A 4.6 A 4.6 A 4.7 A 4.9 A 5.2 A 6.0 A 7.3 A 25 A * 7.4 A 5.2 A 7.4 A 9.3 A 10.0 A 10.6 A 11.4 A 13.8 A 14.8 A 50 A * 22.0 A 15.4 A 23.8 A 29.0 A 29.0 A 29.0 A 29.0 A 29.0 A 29.0 A 80 A * 28.0 A 19.6 A 31.7 A 37.0 A 38.8 A 40.7 A 42.1 A 44.8 A 47.0 A 108 A * 42.0 A 29.4 A 46.7 A 56.0 A 57.8 A 59.9 A 62.4 A 66.6 A 70.0 A 160 A * 55.0 A 38.5 A 64.2 A 73.0 A 79.7 A 82.2 A 84.7 A 89.8 A 94.0 A 200 A * 79.0 A 55.3 A 92.9 A 102 A 104 A 107 A 110 A 113 A 117 A 300 A * 110 A 77 A 124 A 138 A 140 A 142 A 146 A 159 A 177 A 400 A * 183 A 128 A 206 A 229 A 231 A 232 A 233 A 234 A 236 A
The 0.7Irated current has been kept constant. * Currents are exclusively applied for induction motor applications, digital, internal and external cooling. Observe deratings for additional possible clock frequencies and installation altitude.
4.2.6
Technical data of the supplementary components

Supplementary components required, refer to Section 8
4-95
4 Power Modules 4.3 Load duty cycle definitions, drive modules
05.01
4.3
Load duty cycle definitions, drive modules

I Imax In 0.25 s
Nominal load duty cycles, FD
4
Fig. 4-4 I Imax In
10 s
Peak current load duty cycle with preloading condition
2.65 s
t 10 s Fig. 4-5 Peak current load duty cycle without preloading condition
Nominal load duty cycles, MSD/IM

Imax
Is6 In 0.7 In
4 min
10 min Fig. 4-6 S6 load duty cycle with preloading condition
I Imax Is6 In 0.7 In
10 s
60 s Fig. 4-7
S6 peak current load duty cycle with preloading condition
4-96
05.01
4 Power Modules 4.4 Interface overview
4.4
Table 4-12 Term. No.
Interface overview
1-axis module Desig. Function Motor connection Type
1)
Typ. voltage/ limit values 3ph. 430 V AC
Max. crosssect. refer to Section 4.1
U2 1 A V2 W2 PE P600 M600
Protective conductor Protective conductor DC link DC link
I I I/O I/O
0V 0V +300 V 300 V
2 screws Busbar Busbar
2-axis power modules Desig. Function Motor connection for axis 1 Type
1)
Max. crosssect. refer to Section 4.1
U2 1 A V2 W2 U2 2 A V2 W2 PE P600 M600
Motor connection for axis 2
3ph. 430 V AC
refer to Section 4.1
Protective conductor Protective conductor DC link DC link
I I I/O I/O
0V 0V +300 V 300 V
3 screws Busbar Busbar
_________ 1) O = Output; I = Input
4-97
4 Power Modules 4.4 Interface overview
05.01
4-98
Control Modules
5
5
Axes 1 Motor encoder Resolver Motors1) 1FT6, 1FK6,1FE1 1FN 1PH, 1LA Thirdparty: if suitable SRM: 1FT6,1FK6,1FE1 ARM: 1PH,1LA SLM: 1FM SRM: 1FT6,1FK6,1FE1 ARM: 1PH,1LA SLM: 1FM Thirdparty: if suitable SRM: 1FT6,1FK6,1FE1 ARM: 1PH,1LA SLM: 1FM SRM: 1FT6,1FK6,1FE1 ARM: 1PH,1LA SLM: 1FM Thirdparty: if suitable SRM: 1FT6,1FK6,1FE1 ARM: 1PH,1LA SLM: 1FM Thirdparty: if suitable SRM: 1FT6,1FK6,1FE1 ARM: 1PH,1LA SLM: 1FM Thirdparty: if suitable SRM: 1FT5 Optional interfaces PROFIBUS DP; Terminals; RS 232/ 485 PROFIBUS DP; Terminals; RS 232/ 485 PROFIBUS DP; Terminals; RS 232/ 485 PROFIBUS DP; Terminals; RS 232/ 485 PROFIBUS DP; Terminals; RS 232/ 485 PROFIBUS DP; Terminals; RS 232/ 485 PROFIBUS DP; Terminals; RS 232
Overview of the control modules

Table 5-1
The control modules, listed in the following table can be used in the SIMODRIVE power modules.
Overview of control modules Version 1axis nset
Control board SIMODRIVE 611 universal
SIMODRIVE 611 universal
1axis pos.
Resolver
2axis nset
Resolver
2axis pos
Resolver
2axis nset
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp absolute value encoder Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp absolute value encoder Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp absolute value encoder
2axis pos
SIMODRIVE 611 universal E
SIMODRIVE 611 with analog setpoint interface for feed drives SIMODRIVE 611 with analog setpoint interface for feed drives SIMODRIVE 611 with analog setpoint interface for feed drives
Standard interface Userfriendly interface Userfriendly interface
SRM: 1FT5
SRM: 1FT5
5-99
5 Control Modules
05.01
Table 5-1
Overview of control modules Version Axes 1 Motor encoder Resolver Motors1) SRM: 1FK6, 1FT6 Optional interfaces
Control board SIMODRIVE 611 with analog setpoint interface for feed drives SIMODRIVE 611 with analog setpoint interface for feed drives SIMODRIVE 611 with analog setpoint interface for main spindle drives
Resolver
SRM: 1FK6, 1FT6
Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp SIZAG 2
ARM: 1PH
SIMODRIVE 611 with analog setpoint interface for induction motors SIMODRIVE 611 with digital setpoint interface for FD and MSD SIMODRIVE 611 with digital setpoint interface for FD SIMODRIVE 611 with digital setpoint interface for FD and MSD SIMODRIVE 611 with digital setpoint interface for hydraulic/analog linear drives HLA/ANA Performance control 1 Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat, SSI (from SW 5.1.9) Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat, SSI (from SW 5.1.9) Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat Incremental encoder sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat, SSI (from SW 1.2.4)
ARM
RS 232 C
SRM: 1FT6,1FK6,1FE1 ARM: 1PH SLM: 1FN1, 1FN3 Thirdparty: if suitable SRM: 1FT6,1FK6,1FE1 ARM: 1PH SLM: 1FN1, 1FN3 Thirdparty: if suitable SRM: 1FT6,1FK6,1FE1 ARM: 1PH2/4/6/7 SLM: 1FN1, 1FN3 Thirdparty: if suitable Hydraulic linear axes
Performance control
Standard 2 control
1) SRM: ARM: SLM: Thirdparty:
Rotating synchronous motor Rotating induction motor Synchronous linear motor Thirdparty motor
5-100
5 Control Modules 05.01 5.1 Feed control with userfriendly and analog setpoint interface 6SN11180AA110AA1
5.1 Feed control with userfriendly and analog setpoint interface 6SN11180AA110AA1
A control module with userfriendly interface is available when using1FT5... motors. It is only available as 1axis version. An additional parameter board is required, which can be used to set all of the axisspecific settings. It can be inserted from the front. This control board can be optionally expanded with the main spindle function option board to be able to handle the requirements of main spindle operation.
Feed control with userfriendly interface

0.8 Nm
56 14 AS1 AS2 663 9 65 9 22 23 20 24 96 44 6 258 16 289 288 290 291 293 294 296 297 299 672 673 674
M3 / 0.8 Nm
X312 102 61 75 162 110 108 115 114 216 214 127 126 Drift kp TN noff
Version label
M3 / 0.8 Nm
Fig. 5-1
Feed control with userfriendly interface
Note When using nonPELV circuits at terminals AS1, AS2, connector coding must be used so that the connectors cannot be interchanged (refer to EN602041, Section 6.4). Order No. of the coding, refer to Catalog NC 60.
5-101
5.1.1
Function overview and settings using the parameter board 6SN11140AA010AA1

Function overview and settings using the 6SN11140AA010AA1 parameter module Parameter Value range TN = 7...43 ms Kp = 2...150 Setting elements Front panel potentiometer TN, additionally C2 Front panel potentiometer Kp, additionally R50 R34 and front panel potentiom. ADAP R38 R40 Front potentiometer, drift S2.1 Switch S1; additionally R6, R7, R8 Front panel potentiometer tachometer; additionally R3 and R10 R5
Table 5-2
Speed controller Integral action time Proportional gain Adaptation: S Integral action time
S S
TNadap/TN = 0.04...1 Kpadap/Kp = 4...35 nx2 nx1 = 0 0...(65 330) mV 30...+30 mV (referred to nset) Clockwise/counterclockwise rotation for pos. nset Vtach. = 40...15 V/nrated nactN = 2.2...0.7 nact (nact = 10 V/nrated) 100 % 11...5 V = nactN or nactN (only term.56/14) 10 V = 1...100 Speed controller without I component I component fully effective ... ineffective
Proportional gain Adaptation range
Drift compensation (offset) Direction of rotation reversal Tachometer adaptation Tachometer adjustment Speed setpoint adaptation (speed reduction) Inhibit I component Limit I component, speed controller Current controller Adaptation motor/power module Current actual value normalization Current controller gain Current setpoint adaptation Inhibit I component in current controlled operation Select currentcontrolled operation Master/slave operation Response threshold, I2t limiting, reduction Monitoring time, speed controller at its endstop Monitoring, speed controller at its endstop External current setpoint limiting (e. g. travel to endstop) Current limiting after the monitoring time, speed controller at its endstop Current limiting after the I2t timer has expired Torque limiting for settingup operation via terminal 112 (NE module) Electrical weight equalization
Terminal 6 R52
Imax = 23...100 % Ilimit Kp(I) = 0.5...11.5; Imax = 10...0 V Current controller without I component offline online via terminal 22 Up to 5 slave modules 6...55 % Ilimit 26...1200 ms ON OFF 1...100 % Imax speed controller monitoring OFF 1...100 % Imax Refer to I2t limiting in the Startup Guide 1...100 % Imax speed controller monitoring OFF Iset, suppl. = 0...50 % Imax
S2.2....S2.5 S2.6...S2.9; additionally R15, if Kp (I) > 11.5 R42 R1 S2.10 R14 Terminals 258, S2.10, R42, R44 R9 R54 R32 Terminal 96 (variable); R12 (fixed) R2, R32 R2/R32 R12 R46/R48
5-102
Table 5-2
(Fortsetzung)Function overview and settings using the 6SN11140AA010AA1 parameter module Parameter Value range Delayed after the speed controller monitoring time has expired instantaneous 10 V...+10 V 10 V...+10 V R13 Setting elements
Instantaneous controller/pulse inhibit via terminal 65 Selection: int. supplementary setpoint 1 through terminal 22 Selection: int. supplementary setpoint 2 through terminal 23 Ready/fault signal at terminals 672/673/674 Smoothing: Speed setpoint Speed actual value Speed controller Current setpoint
R16, R17, R18=setpoint R19, R21, R22=setpoint
R33
T = C4 10 k T = C5 5 k T = C3 68 k T = C6 1 k
C4 C5 C3 C6
5.1.2
Table 5-3 Term. No.
Interface overview, feed control, userfriendly interface

Interface overview, feed control, userfriendly interface Desig. Function Speed setpoint 1 Differential input2) Checkback signal contact Relay, start inhibit Pulse enable3) Enable voltage3)6) Controller enable3) Enable voltage3)6) Select int. fixed setpoint 13)/ currentcontrolled operation Select int. fixed setpoint 23) Speed setpoint2)/ current setpoint (differential input) Current setpoint limiting Electronics voltage Integrator inhibit, speed controller Current setpoint (master/slave) Norm. current actual value Type
1)
Typ. voltage/limit values 0 V... 10 V max. 250 VAC/1 A, 30 VDC/2 A +21...30 V +24 V +13...30 V +24 V +13...30 V +13...30 V 0 V...10 V (340 s smoothing) 0...30 V 15 V/10 mA +13...30 V 0 V...10 V 0 V...10 V
Max. crosssect. 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
56 X321 14 X321 AS1 X331 AS2 X331 663 9 65 9 22 23 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331
I I NC I O I O I I I I I O I I/O O
20 X331 24 X331 965) 445) 65) 2585) 165) X331 X331 X331 X331 X331
_________ 1) I=input; O=output; NC=NC contact; NO=NO contact (for signal NO=high/NC=low) 2) Differential input reference point The common mode range of the differential input is24 V with respect to PE potential and may not be exceeded. 3) Reference ground, terminal 19 NE/monitoring module (this may not be connected with the general reference ground, terminal 15) 4) Voltages referred to PE potential 5) Terminal 15 on the NE module is the reference ground 6) Refer to Section 6.3
5-103
Table 5-3 Term. No. 289 288 290 291 293 294 296 297 299
Interface overview, feed control, userfriendly interface Desig. X341 X341 X341 X341 X341 X341 X341 X341 X341 Function Relay signals, center contact Speed controller at its endstop I2t monitoring Motor overtemperature Tachometer/rotor position encoder fault Ready/fault signal Motor encoder Equipment bus Type
1)
Typ. voltage/limit values

4)
Max. crosssect. 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
I NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO I NC
Max. 30 V/1 A Max. 30 V/1 A Max. 30 V/1 A Max. 30 V/1 A Max. 30 V/1 A Max. 30 V/1 A Max. 30 V/1 A Max. 30 V/1 A 30 V/1 A4) 30 V/1 A 30 V/1 A
672 X341 673 X341 674 X341 X311 X151
_________ 1) I=input; O=output; NC=NC contact; NO=NO contact (for signal NO=high/NC=low) 2) Differential input reference point The common mode range of the differential input is24 V with respect to PE potential and may not be exceeded. 3) Reference ground, terminal 19 NE/monitoring module (this may not be connected with the general reference ground, terminal 15) 4) Voltages referred to PE potential 5) Terminal 15 on the NE module is the reference ground 6) Refer to Section 6.3
Note The drive shuts down and the pulses inhibited after approx. 4 s when the heatsink overtemperature switch responds.
Evaluation of the motor PTC thermistor for temperature monitoring
The SIMODRIVE 611 feed modules with closedloop control for the 1FT5 servomotors have an evaluation circuit, for the PTC thermistor integrated in the motor winding. The motors should be protected from inadmissibly high winding temperatures using the monitoring combination (release temperature 150C). When the response temperature is reached, it is only signaled at the SIMODRIVE 611 via an individual fault signal, terminals 289/294/296 and centrally via terminals 5.1, 5.2 and 5.3 of the feed module as the drive should not intervene directly in the machining process and disturb operation. There is no internal system shutdown function to protect the motor. The user must ensure that the motor can thermally recover immediately after the temperature signal is output, by appropriately designing the adaptation control. It may be necessary to shut down the motor immediately. A delay time is not permissible. If the motor is not thermally monitored, then the complete drive could be destroyed if an overload condition occurs, or if the drive converter was overdimensioned.
5-104
5.1.3
Option module, main spindle functions 6SN11140AA020AA0

Main spindle functions can also be realized using an option board (main spindle drive option). In this case, the option board should be mounted on the control board (this is only possible in conjunction with the userfriendly interface).
Installing the MSD option
X305
Mount on studs using M3x6 screws. Tightening torque, 0.8 Nm. Insert the front connector into the front panel, insert the PC board in the locating lugs. Establish the connection using X305.
Fig. 5-2 Option board
Function overview and settings on the MSD option
Table 5-4
Function overview and settings on the MSD option Parameter Value range The relay outputs of the limit value stages can be defined as NC or NO contacts 4.5 %...100 % 0.3 %...1.7 % of nmax 3 %...100 % of nmax nset difference< 20 mV 0.3 %...1.7 % of nmax 10 ms...1.1 s 0.1 s...11 s (changeover 1:10) Active/inactive 30 mV...+30 mV (referred to nset) Reduce Kp to 0 %...95 % Extend TN to 100 %...1500 % Setting elements 0 resistors Pot. R211 Pot. R10 Pot. R43 Resistor R179 Pot. R1 Potentiometer R20 terminal 102 R270 Pot. R96 Pot. R45 + parameter board R25 Pot. R44 + parameter board R35
Limit value stages NC/NO |Iact| > IX term. 110/108 | nact| < nmin term. 115/114 | nact| < nX term.216/214 nset= nset* term. 127/126 n < noff Rampfunction generator via terminals 56/14 Tracking Drift (main spindle drive operation) Proportional gain Integral action time
5-105
Table 5-4
Function overview and settings on the MSD option Parameter Value range Start of constant power 23 %...70 % nmax Deviation 20 %...+20 % nmax Constant limiting 10 %...100 % Imax Speeddependent limiting 1 %...85 % Imax 0 %...100 % nmax 10 V setpoint at term. 24/20 8 1/10 nmax from MSD operation Normalized nrated corresponds to +10 V Normalized IactN = 10 V Factor 1...3 Terminal 75 Terminal 162 if R160 = 1 k, R207 = open Resistor R903 Terminal 162 if R160 = open, R207 = 1 k Setting elements Pot. R214 Pot. R213 Resistor R76 Pot. R225 Resistor R77, R78
Torque limiting
Changeover speed MSD Caxis operation Select C axis operation, terminal 61 Speed actual value image Current actual value image
Power image
5.1.4
Interface overview, MSD option
Main spindle drive option (only for userfriendly interface)

Table 5-5 Term. No. 102 61 75 162 110 108 115 114 216 214 127 126 Interface overview, MSD option Desig. X312 X312 X312 X312 X322 X322 X322 X322 X322 X322 X322 X322 Function TH = 1:10 Caxis operation nact Pact/Iact2) |Iact| > IX n< nmin n < nX nset = nset* Type 1) I I O O NO/ NC I NO/ NC I NO/ NC I NO/ NC I Typ. voltage/limit values +13 V...30 V/RE=1.5 k +13 V...30 V/RE=1.5 k 0 V...10 V 0 V...10 V 30 V/1.0 A max. 30 V/1.0 A max. 30 V/1.0 A max. 30 V/1.0 A max. 30 V/1.0 A max. 30 V/1.0 A max. 30 V/1.0 A max. 30 V/1.0 A max. Max. crosssect. 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
_________ 1) I=input; O=output; NC=NC contact; NO=NO contact (for signal NO=high/NC=low) 2) Depending on the equipping version, power image (series) or current actual value image
5-106
5 Control Modules 05.01 5.2 Feed control with standard interface and analog setpoint interface 6SN11180A_110AA1
5.2 Feed control with standard interface and analog setpoint interface 6SN11180A_110AA1
Feed control with standard interface
1axis version
For operating motors 1FT5... a control module with standard interface is also available. It is available as 1 and 2axis version. All of the axisspecific settings are made on the plugin control module.
2axis version
M3 / 0.8 Nm
M3 / 0.8 Nm
X321
0.8 Nm
AS1 AS2 663 9 56 14 65 9 22 9 Drift T KP TN Adapt
0.8 Nm
AS1 AS2 663 9 56 14 65 9 22 9
X331 X332 56 14 65 9 22 9 Drift T kp TN Adapt Drift T KP TN Adapt

W M T M X A T M 1 M X A 2 W
W M
T M X A
Version label
Fig. 5-3
Feed control with standard interface
Note When using nonPELV circuits at terminals AS1, AS2, connector coding must be used so that the connectors cannot be interchanged (refer to EN602041, Section 6.4). Order No. of the coding connector, refer to Catalog NC 60.
5-107
5.2.1
Table 5-6
Function overview and settings on the control module

Function overview and settings on the control module Value range TN = 7 ... 43 ms Kp = 2 ... 150 TNadap / TN = 0.04 ... 1 30 ... +30 mV (referred to nset) Clockwise/counterclockwise rotation Vtach. = 40 ... 15 V/nrated nactN = 2.2 ... 0.7nact (nact = 10 V/nrated) Imax = 23 ... 100 %Ilimit LT Kp(I) = 0.5 ... 11.5; Current controller without I component Offline online via terminal 22 Setting elements Front potentiometer TN Front potentiometer Kp S3.5 (axis 2:S6.5), Front potentiometer ADAP Front potentiometer, drift S2.1 (axis 2:S5.1) Switch S1 (axis 2:S4) Front potentiometer, tachometer
Parameter Speed controller Integral action time Proportional gain Adaptation, integral action time Drift compensation (offset)
Direction of rotation reversal Tachometer adaptation Tachometer adjustment Current controller Current actual value normalization Current controller gain Inhibit I component in currentcontrolled operation Select currentcontrolled operation Supplementary functions Master/slave mode (only 2axis version) Central ready/ fault signal at terminals 72/73/74 NE/monitoring module Smoothing:
S2.2 ... S2.5 (axis 2:S5.2 ... 5.5) S2.6 ... S2.9 (axis 2:S5.6 ... 5.9) S3.8 (axis 2:S6.8)
S2.10 (axis 2:S5.10)
Master and slave in one module Relay signal for ready/ no fault
S3.7 and S6.7 S3.6 (axis 2:S6.6)
Can be permanently switchedin
Can be permanently switchedin S3.1 (axis 2:S6.1) S3.2 (axis 2:S6.2) S3.3 (axis 2:S6.3) S3.4 (axis 2:S6.4) C239 R539, R540, R541 R543 R545 R547 R548/R549 R553 BKZ axis 1 C232 C233 C231 C234 C240
Variable BKZ axis 2 C236 C237 C235 C238
Speed setpoint Speed actual value Speed controller Current setpoint Valid from Order No.: 6SN11180AV110AA1
T = 2.2 ms T = 280 s T = 370 s T = 110 s Timer stage speed controller at endstop Tachometer adaptation Adaptation range Speed setpoint adaptation Limiting, I component, speed controller Electronic weight equalization, pos./neg. Response threshold I2t monitoring
R536, R537, R538 R544 R546 R550 R551/R552 R554
5-108
5.2.2
Table 5-7 Term. No. AS1 AS2 663 9 56.1 14.1 65.1 9 22.1 9 56.2 14.2 65.2 9 22.2 9
Interface overview, feed control, standard interface

Interface overview, feed control, standard interface Desig. X321 X321 X321 X321 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X331 X332 X332 X332 X332 X332 X332 X311 X313 X151/351 Function Checkback signal contact Relay, start inhibit Pulse enable2) Enable voltage2)4) Speed setpoint Differential input 3) Controller enable 2) Enable voltage 2)4) Currentcontrolled operation 2) Enable voltage 2)4) Speed setpoint Differential input 3) Controller enable 2) Enable voltage 2)4) Currentcontrolled operation 2) Enable voltage 2)4) Motor encoder, axis 1 Motor encoder, axis 2 Equipment bus Type
1)
Typ. voltage/limit values max. 250VAC/1A, 30VDC/2A +21 ... 3o V +24 V 0 V ... 10 V +13 ... 30 V +24 V +13 ... 30 V +24 V 0 V ... 10 V +13 ... 30 V +24 V +13 ... 30 V +24 V
Max. crosssect. 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
NC
I O I I I O I O I I I O I O
_________ 1) I=input; O=output; NC=NC contact; NO=NO contact (for signal: Closed=high, open=low) 2) Reference ground, term. 19 NE/monitoring module (this may not be connected to the general reference ground, term. 15) 3) Reference point of the differential input. The common mode range of the differential input is 24 V with respect to PE potential and may not be exceeded. 4) Refer to Section 6.4
Motor PTC thermistor evaluation for temperature monitoring
The SIMODRIVE 611 feed modules with the control for 1FT5 servomotors are equipped with an evaluation circuit for the PTC thermistor integrated in the motor windings. The motors should be protected from inadmissibly high winding temperatures using the monitoring combination (trigger temperature, 150C). As the drive shouldnt unpredictably intervene in the cutting process, when the response temperature is reached, this is only signaled to the SIMODRIVE 611, centrally via terminals 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3 of the rectifier module. There is no internal system shutdown function to protect the motor.The user must ensure that the motor can thermally recover immediately after the signal output, by appropriately designing the adaptation control. It may be necessary to shutdown the motor immediately. A delay time is not permissible. If the motor is not thermally monitored, then the complete drive could be destroyed if an overload condition occurs, or if the drive converter was overdimensioned.
5-109
5 Control Modules 5.3 Resolver control with standard and analog interface 6SN11180B_110AA0
05.01
5.3 Resolver control with standard and analog interface 6SN11180B_110AA0

Resolver control with standard interface
For 1FK6 and 1FT6 motors with resolvers, a control module is available which includes incremental shaft encoder interface with TTL signal output for external processing. This is available as 1axis and 2axis versions. All of the axis specific settings are made on the control board.
2axis version
1axis version
M3 / 0.8 Nm
M3 / 0.8 Nm
5
X391 X391 X392 Drift T kp TN Drift T KP TN 56 14 24 20 75 15 16 96 9 22 9 65.1 9 65.2 X312
X311
Drift T KP TN
2 X321 56 14 24 20 75 15 16 96 9 22 9 663 AS1 AS2 X331 56 14 24 20 75 15 16 96 9 22 9 663 AS1 AS2 X331
X321X322
0.8 Nm
0.8 Nm
9 65.1 15 258 X332
X311
X332
Version label
M3 / 0.8 Nm
Fig. 5-4 Resolver control with standard interface and analog interface
M3 / 0.8 Nm
5-110
05.01
5.3.1
Table 5-8
Function overview and settings

Function overview and settings Parameter Value range p = 1, 2, 3, 4 p = 1, 2, 3, 4 A before B, B before A for the same direction of rotation 512 pulses/revolution or 1024 pulses/revolution Shifted through 180_ mechanical Shifted through 90_ mechanical Shifted through 45_ mechanical Shifted through 22.5_ mechanical Shifted through 11.25_ mechanical Shifted through 5.625_ mechanical 70 % or 100 % of Ilimit LT Setting according to Table in the Startup Guide, depending on the motor/power module combination Can be adjusted in steps 100 %, 75 %, 55 %, 45 %, 25 %, 20 %, 5 % 2000 RPM, 3000 RPM, 6000 RPM Setting acc. to the Table in the Installation Guide Value ranges, refer to SIMODRIVE 611, Installation Guide 45 mV ... +45 mV 2.5 ... 95 3 ms ... 40 ms Enable/inhibit Enable/inhibit Changeover, ready/fault signal 2nd axis as slave 300 ms, 1 s Setting elements DIL switch S1/S2 1) DIL switch S1/S2 1) DIL switch S1/S2 1) DIL switch S1/S2 1) DIL switch S11 DIL switch S11 DIL switch S11 DIL switch S11 DIL switch S11 DIL switch S1/S2 1)
Position processing Pole pair number, motor Pole pair number, resolver Phase sequence of tracks A, B of the WSG interface Pulse number of the WSG interface Zero mark offset
Current controller Iact normalization Current controller gain Current setpoint limiting Proportion of the limit. current Speed normalization Speed actual value normalization Speed actual value calibration Speed controller Drift adjustment Proportional gain Integral action time Other functions Integrator inhibit, speed controller Integrator inhibit, current controller2) in closedloop currentcontrolled operation Fault signal Master/slave operation timer, terminal 65 LED Adaptation using components
DIL switch S3/S6 1) DIL switch S3/S6 1) DIL switch S12
DIL switch S4 Pot. R105/R106 1)
Pot. R129/R130 1) Pot. R64/R65 1) Pot. R107/R108 1) DIL switch S5 DIL switch S5 DIL switch S5 DIL switch S5 DIL switch S5
Display, ready or fault For difficult operating conditions, adaptation is realized by soldering components on the board (SMD components).
DIL switch S5 Position of the components, refer to SIMODRIVE 611, Installation Guide C135/C148 1) C143/C149 1) C134/C147 1) R448/R454 1) R349/R348, R356/R3551)
Smoothing: speed setpoint speed actual value Value range/characteristics, refer to speed controller SIMODRIVE 611, Installation Guide TN limit. in the speed controller Weight equalization, pos.,neg. _________ 1) 1st axis / 2nd axis 2) Only effective for closedloop current controlled operation; the integrator of the current controller is always disabled in closedloop speed controlled operation.
5-111
05.01
5.3.2
Table 5-9 Term. No. 56 14 24 20 75 15 16 96 9 22 9 663 AS1 AS2 9 65.1 9 65.2
Interface overview, resolver control

Interface overview, resolver control Desig.2) X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X321/322 X331 X331 X331 X331 X332 X332 X332 X332 X391 X392 X311 X312 X151/351 Function Speed setpoint Differential input Speed/current setpoint Differential input Speed actual value Reference potential Active current actual value Current setpoint limiting on Enable potential4) Changeover, closedloop speed/current control Enable potential Pulse enable Relay, start inhibit Relay, start inhibit Enable potential4) Controller enable, axis 1 Enable potential3)4) Controller enable, axis 23) WSG interface, axis 1 WSG interface, axis 2 Motor encoder, axis 1 Motor encoder, axis 2 Equipment bus Type
1)
Typ. voltage/limit values 0 V ... 10 V 0 V ... 10 V 0 V ... 10 V 0V 0 V ... 10 V +13 V ... 30 V +24 V +13 V ... 30 V +24 V +21 V ... 33 V max. 250VAC/1A max. 30VDC/2A +24 V +13 V ... 30 V +24 V +13 V ... 30 V
Max. crosssect. 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
I I I I O O O I O I
O I NC O I O I
For the 1axis version, X332 is assigned as follows:

9 65.1 15 258 X332 X332 X332 X332 Enable potential Controller enable Reference potential Current setpoint O I O O +24 V +13 V ... 30 V 0V 0 V ... 10 V 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
_________ 1) I=input; O=output; NC=NC contact; NO=NO contact (for signal: Closed=high, open=low) 2) X321=1. axis, X322=2nd axis 3) Only for the 2axis version 4) Refer to Section 6.4
5-112
05.01
Evaluation, motor PTC thermistor for temperature monitoring The SIMODRIVE 611 feed modules with control for 1FT6 and 1FK6 servomotors with resolver, have an evaluation circuit for the PTC resistor integrated in the motor winding. The motors should be protected from inadmissibly high winding temperatures using the monitoring combination (trigger temperature 150C). As the drive shouldnt unpredictably intervene in the cutting process, when the response temperature is reached, this is only signaled to the SIMODRIVE 611, centrally via terminals 5.1, 5.2, and 5.3 of the rectifier module. There is no internal system shutdown function to protect the motor. The user must ensure that the motor can thermally recover immediately after the temperature signal is output, by appropriately designing the adaptation control. It may be necessary to shut down the motor immediately. A delay time is not permissible. If the motor is not thermally monitored, then the complete drive could be destroyed if an overload condition occurs, or if the drive converter was overdimensioned.
5-113
5 Control Modules 5.4 Main spindle control with analog setpoint interface 6SN11210BA1_0AA_
05.01
5.4 Main spindle control with analog setpoint interface 6SN11210BA1_0AA_

The control components are available for 1PH induction motors with optical rotary encoders or inductive toothedwheel encoders (Order No.: 6SN11210BA110AA1). The following interface X432 can be used either as spindle encoder input for positioning, or as WSG interface (rotary position output to the NC).
1)
M3 / 0.8 Nm
0.8 Nm
X1 IR 56 14 24 8 663 65 81 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 9
X2 M 91 A M 92 A M 289 11 A 21 A 31 A 41 A 51 A 61 A 672 673 674 AS1 AS2
Only for Order No.: 6SN11210BA110AA1
Version label
Software
M3 / 0.8 Nm
Fig. 5-5
Note When using nonPELV circuits at terminals AS1, AS2, connector coding must be used so that the connectors cannot be interchanged (refer to EN602041, Section 6.4). Order No. of the coding, refer to Catalog NC 60. Only PELV circuits may be connected at connector X432 pin 15 or X433 pin 3 (FR).
_________ 1) Interface X432 can either be used as spindle encoder input for positioning or as WSG interface (rotor position output to the NC).
5-114
05.01
5.4.1
Select terminal functions

The select input terminals E1 to E9 (max. 9) are freelyprogrammable. A control parameter is assigned to each select terminal, in which the code number of the selected function is entered.
Table 5-10
Select terminal functions Function When selected, if a speed, which can be parameterized, is exceeded, the 2nd torque limit is activated when a speed, which is parameterized, is exceeded. 2 internal speed setpoints, where the frequency and speed can be adjusted, are generated. Acknowledges a fault/error message after the cause has been removed. Note: Terminal 65 (controller enable) must be open. The analog setpoint is interpreted as torque setpoint in this mode. (This function is required for masterslave drives) Openloop torque controlled operation with slip monitoring When the signal changes, the motor data sets are also changed and a changeover made from the star to the delta winding configuration using control commands. Note: This function can only be used for motors with star/delta windings. NC auxiliary function for oriented spindle stop. When selected, and if a speed, which can be parameterized, is fallen below, a finer speed setpoint normalization is selected. If the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, the rampfunction generator is bypassed. The integral component of the PI speed controller is inhibited using this terminal. A total of 8 parameter sets for setpoint normalization, speed monitoring, controller setting, torque limiting and torque monitoring can be entered using these terminals. Terminal opencircuit: Digital zero setpoint Terminal selected: The setpoint is enabled (analog setpoint or oscillation setpoint) When selected, the internal closedloop position control is selected and the spindle is moved into the required position. Using these terminals, a total of 4 parameterizable position reference values can be entered. When selected, the spindle moves from the actual positioncontrolled position through a specified position difference. The spindle is rereferenced: This is necessary after every mechanical gearbox stage changeover. Changeover to a finer Caxis setpoint normalization. Note: Only setpoint input 2 (terminal 248) is evaluated. Changeover to High Precision C axis mode; i.e. finer setpoint normalization and higher speed control loop dynamic performance with a lower functional scope (only E1 to E6 are evaluated). Note: Only setpoint input 2 (terminal 248) is evaluated. The speed setpoint smoothing is activated with a time constant, which can be parameterized. Fault message 11 is suppressed (speed controller at its limit) for the function travel to endstop. It is possible to select different inverter clock frequencies using the select terminals.
Select terminal 2nd torque limit value Oscillation Reset fault memory (reset) 1) Openloop torque controlled operation 1) Openloop torque controlled operation with slip monitoring Stardelta operation
M19 operation
Ramptime = 0 Integrator inhibit, speed controller 1) Gearbox stage (max. 3 terminals)
Setpoint enable Positioning on Position reference value 14 (max. 2 terminals) Incremental positioning Spindle resynchronization C axis HPC axis 1)
Speed setpoint smoothing 1) Suppress fault 11 1) Inverter clock frequency changeover 1)
_________ 1) Only these terminal functions are available in the HPC axis mode.
5-115
05.01
5.4.2
Select relay functions/signals

The select relay terminals A11 to A61 (max. 6) can be freely programmed. A control parameter is assigned to every select relay, in which the code number of the selected function is entered.
Table 5-11
Select relay functions/signals Function The relay pullsin, if the rampup sequence has been completed after a setpoint step. The signal is not withdrawn as a result of speed fluctuations due to load surges. The relay pullsin, if the actual value lies within a tolerance bandwidth of the setpoint. Speed fluctuations due to load surges can cause the signal to be withdrawn. The relay pullsin, if the actual torque of the threshold, which can be parameterized, is fallen below (this is suppressed during acceleration after a time which can be parameterized). 1) The relay pullsin, if the speed actual value falls below the threshold which can be parameterized. The relay pullsin, if the speed actual value falls below the threshold which can be parameterized. The relay drops out for an overtemperature condition. If the temperature continues to increase, an additional fault signal is output and the pulses cancelled after a parameterizable time. The relay drops out, if the main heatsink temperature switch of the power module responds. After 20 s the drive shuts down and a fault signal is output. Any of the control program variables can be monitored using this function. The relay pullsin, if the spindle is within tolerance bandwidth 1 after positioning has been completed. The relay pullsin, if the spindle is within tolerance bandwidth 2 after positioning has been completed. An external auxiliary contactor can be controlled via this relay to changeover the winding into the star configuration. An external auxiliary contactor can be controlled via this relay to changeover the winding into the delta configuration.
Select relay nact=nset (rampup completed) nact=nset (actual) |Md| < Mdx
|nact| < nmin |nact| < nx
Motor overtemperature prealarm 1) Heatsink overtemperature alarm 1) Variable relay function (max. 2 terminals) 1) In position 1 In position 2 Relay, star operation Relay, delta operation
_________ 1) The signals/messages are only available in the HPCaxis mode.
5-116
05.01
5.4.3
Table 5-12 Term. No. 56 14 24 8 A91 M A92 M
Interface overview, main spindle control

Interface overview, main spindle control Desig. X421 X421 X421 X421 X451 X451 X451 X451 Function Speed setpoint 1 5) Differential input 5) Speed setpoint 2 5) Differential input 5) (C axis or supplementary setpoint) Analog input DA1 (nact) Reference voltage for DA1 Analog input DA2 (utilization) Reference voltage for DA2 Enable potential 6) Pulse enable Controller enable: To powerup the drives, in addition to terminal 65, terminals 663 and 81 must also be energized. If terminal 65 is opened, the motor brakes with the selected deceleration time (rampdown time). The pulses are canceled when nmin is fallen below. Rampfunction generator fast stop: The motor brakes along the torque limit after terminal 81 has been opened. When nmin is fallen below, either the pulses are canceled, or the motor remains magnetized. Freelyprogrammable select terminals Relay, start inhibit (checkback signal, terminal 663) Relay, start inhibit (checkback signal, terminal 663) Freelyprogrammable relay signals Relay contact supply Axisspecific signal Ready or no fault Serial interface for computersupported startup (startup program) Spindle encoder input, BERO or motor encoder output2)3) BERO connection2)3)4) Motor encoder Equipment bus Type
1)
Typ. voltage/ limit values 0 V ... 10 V max. 0.5 A 0 V ... 10 V max. 0.5 A 10 V ... +10 V max. 3 mA 10 V ... +10 V max. 3 mA +24 V +21 V ... 30 V +13 V ... 30 V
Max. crosssect. 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
I I I I I I I I O I I
9 X431 663 X431 65 X431
81 X431
+13 V ... 30 V
1.5 mm2
E1 to E9 X431 AS1 X441 AS2 X441 A11 to X441 A61 289 X441 672 X441 673 X441 674 X441 RS 232C X411 X432 X433 X412 X151
I NC NO I NO I NC
+13 V ... 30 V max.250VAC/1A 30 VDC/2 A 30 VDC/1 A 30 VDC/6 A 30 VDC/1 A 30 VDC/1 A 30 VDC/1 A
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 DSub 9pin DSub 15pin DSub, 9 pin. DSub, 15 pin
_________
1) 2) 3) 4) I=input; O=output; NC=NC contact; NO=NO contact (for signal: Closed=high, open=low) The BERO can either be connected to X433 or to X432. X433 is only available for Order No.: 6SN11210BA110AA1. BERO type: 3conductor PNP NO contact, e.g. BERO M30 Order No.: 3RG40140AG01 or BERO M12 Order No.: 3RG40123AG01 The BERO cable must be shielded. The cable shields of setpoint cables must be connected at both ends. The terminal may only be used to enable the associated drive group.
5) 6)
5-117
5 Control Modules 5.5 Induction motor control with analog setpoint interface 6SN11220BA1_0AA_
05.01
5.5 Induction motor control with analog setpoint interface 6SN11220BA1_0AA_

The following appropriate control components are available for standard induction motors without rotary encoder (Order No. 6SN11220BA110AA1).
Induction motor control
M3 / 0.8 Nm
5
0.8 Nm
X1 IR 56 14 24 8 663 65 81 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 9
X2 M 91 A M 92 A M 289 11 A 21 A 31 A 41 A 51 A 61 A 672 673 674 AS1 AS2
Version label
Software
M3 / 0.8 Nm
Fig. 5-6
Induction motor control
Notice Only PELV circuits may be connected at connector X432 pin15 (FR).
5-118
05.01
5.5.1
Select terminal functions

The select input terminals E1 to E9 (max. 9) are freelyprogrammable. A control parameter is assigned to each select terminal, in which the code number of the selected function is entered.
Table 5-13
Select terminal functions Function When selected, if a speed, which can be parameterized, is exceeded, the 2nd torque limit is activated. Generates an internal frequency setpoint with adjustable frequency and speed. Acknowledges a fault/error message after the cause has been removed. Note: Terminal 65 (controller enable) must be open. When selected, a changeover is made from rampup/rampdown time 1 to rampup/rampdown time 2. The rampup/rampdown times 1 and 2 can be separately entered for each of the maximum of four motor data sets. Specifies the motor direction of rotation Terminal open: Clockwise phase sequence Terminal energized: Counterclockwise rotating field Note: Positive analog setpoint, 0 ... 10 V Motorized potentiometer function. Starting from an initial value which can be parameterized, the speed setpoint can be continuously adjusted using these two select terminals. If the enable voltage is connected to this terminal, the rampfunction generator is bypassed. Via this terminal, the integral component of the PI speed controller can be inhibited (I component=0ms). A total of four different motor data sets can be selected using these terminals. Each data set is assigned the following parameters: Motor data, setpoint normalization, rampfunction generator, controller parameters, current and power limiting and frequency bandstop filter. A total of 8 parameter sets for speed monitoring, torque limiting and torque monitoring can be entered using these terminals. Terminal opencircuit: Digital zero setpoint Terminal selected: Setpoint enabled (analog setpoint or speed setpoint) A maximum of 16 speed setpoints can be selected. Setpoint 1 corresponds to the standard setpoint (analog setpoint and the internal setpoint); setpoints 2 to 16 are fixed setpoints which can be parameterized.
Select terminal 2nd torque limit value Oscillation Reset fault memory (reset) Rampfunction generator 1/2
Clockwise/counterclockwise
Increase setpoint Decrease setpoint Ramptime = 0 Integrator inhibit, speed controller Motor selection (max. 2 terminals)
Gearbox stage (max. 3 terminals) Setpoint enable Fixed setpoint selection (max. 4 terminals)
5-119
05.01
5.5.2
Select relay functions/signals

The select relay terminals A11 to A61 (max. 6) can be freely programmed. A control parameter is assigned to every select relay, in which the code number of the selected function is entered.
Table 5-14
Select relay functions/signals Function The relay pullsin, if the rampup sequence has been completed after a setpoint step. The signal is not withdrawn as a result of speed fluctuations due to load surges. The relay pullsin, if the actual value lies within a tolerance bandwidth of the setpoint. Speed fluctuations due to load surges can cause the signal to withdrawn. The relay pullsin, if the actual torque fallsbelow the threshold which has been parameterized (this becomes active for rampup completed after a time which can be parameterized). The relay pullsin, if the speed actual value falls below the threshold which can be parameterized. The relay pullsin, if the speed actual value falls below the threshold which can be parameterized. The relay drops out when the parameterized I2t limit of the motor is exceeded. The relay drops out for an overtemperature condition. If the temperature continues to increase, an additional fault message is output and the drive pulses are canceled after a parameterizable time. The relay drops out, if the main heatsink temperature switch of the power module responds. After 20 s the drive shuts down and a fault signal is output. Any control program variable can be monitored using this function. The relay pullsin, if motor 1/2/3/4 is active.
Select relay nact=nset (rampup completed) nact=nset (actual)
|Md| < Mdx
|nact| < nmin |nact| < nx I2t alarm Motor overtemperature alarm
Heatsink overtemperature, alarm Variable relay function (max. 2 terminals) Motor 1/2/3/4 active
5-120
05.01
5.5.3
Table 5-15 Term. No. 56 14 24 8 A91 M A92 M
Interface overview, induction motor control

Interface overview, induction motor control Desig. X421 X421 X421 X421 X451 X451 X451 X451 Function Speed setpoint 1 Differential input Speed setpoint 2 Differential input (supplementary setpoint)2 Analog output DA1 Reference voltage for DA1 Analog output DA2 Reference voltage for DA2 Note: The analog output is only available with the appropriate control version. Enable potential 5) Pulse enable: The relay start inhibit is energized using terminal 663, and when it opens, the firing pulses are inhibited and the motor is switched to a torquefree condition. Controller enable: To powerup the drives, in addition to terminal 65, terminals 663 and 81 must also be energized. If terminal 65 is opened, the motor brakes with the selected deceleration time (rampdown time). The pulses are canceled when nmin is reached. Rampfunction generator fast stop: The motor brakes along the torque limit after terminal 81 has been opened. The pulses are canceled, or the motor remains magnetized, when nmin is reached. Freelyprogrammable select terminals Connecting a BERO to monitor the maximum speed3)4) Relay, start inhibit (checkback signal, term. 663) Relay, start inhibit (checkback signal, term. 663) Freelyprogrammable relay signals Relay contact supply Axisspecific signal Ready or fault Serial interface for computersupported startup (startup program) Possibility of connecting a motor temperature sensor KTY84 acc. to IEC 1343) or PTC Equipment bus NC NO I NO I NC max. 250VAC/1A 30 VDC/2 A 30 V/1 A 30 V/6 A 30 V/1 A 30 V/1 A 30 V/1 A Type
1)
Typ. voltage/limit values 0 V ... 10 V 0 V ... 10 V
Max. crosssect. 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
I I I I O I O I
10 V ... +10 V max. 3 mA 10 V ... +10 V max. 3 mA
9 X431 663 X431
O I
+24 V +21 V ... 30 V
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
65 X431
+13 V ... 30 V
1.5 mm2
81 X431
+13 V ... 30 V
1.5 mm2
E1 to E9 X431 X432 AS1 X441 AS2 X441 A11 to X441 A61 289 X441 672 X441 673 X441 674 X441 RS 232C X411 X412 X151/351
+13 V ... 30 V
1.5 mm2 DSub 15pin 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 DSub 9pin DSub 15pin
_________
1) 2) 3) 4)
I=input; O=output; NC=NC contact; NO=NO contact (for signal, NO=high, closed / NC=low, open) Only available for the appropriate control version; the shields of the setpoint cable should be connected at both ends X412, X432 is only available for Order No. 6SN11220BA110AA1. BERO type: 3conductor PNP NO contact, e.g. BERO M30 Order No.: 3RG40140AG01 or BERO M12 Order No.: 3RG40123AG01 The BERO cable/motor temperature sensing cable must be shielded. 5) The terminal may only be used to enable the associated drive group
5-121
05.01
S The voltage rateofrise (gradient) of the drive converter manifests typical

values of between 5 7 kV / s. For thirdparty motors, where the insulation has not been designed to handle these voltage gradients, a series reactor must be used, independent of the selected pulse frequency.
S For the IM operating type, motors with a maximum rated torque of

Pn
Mn =
2
nN 60 s/min
650 Nm
may be used. If the motor data are known, a series reactor or the drive converter pulse frequency can be defined using the following formula, whereby it must be observed, that when increasing the inverter clock frequency, the module current must be reduced; or, a module with a higher current rating must be selected: Ls1 + Ls2 + Lvor Ls1 Ls2 Lvor UZK 10 2 fT
nmax nFS I0
Stator leakage inductance of the motor in H Rotor leakage inductance of the motor in H Inductance of the series reactor in H (=0, if a series reactor is not used) VDC link DC link voltage (=600 V or 625 V for a controlled infeed, = rectified line supply voltage for an uncontrolled infeed e.g. 570 V at 400 VRMS line supply voltage) fT Inverter clock frequency of the drive converter in Hz, refer to Section 4.2.2 nmax Max. motor speed nFS Speed at the start of field weakening
An approximate value can be calculated with nFS [ VDC link nN 1.6 VNmot
I0 VNmot nN
Noload motor current in Arms Rated motor voltage in Vrms Rated motor speed
If the motor data is not known, the converter current should be dimensioned for 4950 Hz pulse frequency for higher current motors, (rated current > 85 A). This results in a converter current reduction factor of approx. 83 %. Please note that this formula is less accurate than the one specified above. If possible, please use the more accurate formula. This could possibly mean that the series reactor costs could be reduced.
S for motors, which have a higher motor frequency than 500 Hz, the converter
pulse frequency must be increased. The following formula is valid: fT w 6 fmax mot Inverter clock frequency of the drive converter in Hz, refer to Section 4.2.2 fmax mot Max. motor stator frequency fT
5-122
05.01
It should be observed, that for an inverter clock frequency above 3200 Hz, the module current rating must be reduced, or if required a higherrating module should be used.
S The max. field weakening range for induction motor operation is limited. The
following relationships are valid:
nmax nFS v 2 for highspeed motors (max. output frequency > 300 Hz), standard motors 5 for widerange motors
nmax nFS
Max. motor speed Speed at the start of field weakening (motor)

VDC link nN 1.6 VNmot
Approximate value can be calculated with nFS [
(refer above)
One auxiliary and one main contactor are required if a motor changeover is made. The motor contactors must be mutually interlocked. Changeover is only realized when the pulses are inhibited. At the changeover command, the new motor data set is loaded and the auxiliary contactors are controlled via the select relays. Parallel operation of several induction motors connected to an induction module, refer to Section 9.11.1.
S The voltage drive across a series reactor depends on the motor current
and the motor frequency. If an uncontrolled infeed is used, the maximum rated motor voltage is a a function of the line supply voltage. The following approximate values are recommended when dimensioning the motor so that there is an adequately high motor voltage available: fmax, motor I/R module VN, motor VN1 motor VDC link=625V 400 VRMS 380 VRMS 320 VRMS 360 VRMS 340 VRMS 320 VRMS 400 Hz 600 Hz 800 Hz 1000 Hz 1200 Hz
VE module Vsupply=400V supply waveform: Sinusoidal 300 VRMS
If these approximate values are not observed, then power reductions can be expected in the upper speed range.
5-123
5 Control Modules 5.6 Drive control with digital setpoint interface
05.01
5.6
Drive control with digital setpoint interface
General information
To operate motors 1FT6/1FK6/1FN1/1FE1 and 1PH (2axis, not for 1PH), digital 1axis and 2axis control modules are available. The drive software is downloaded, in the initialization phase (power supply on or reset) from the SINUMERIK 840C or 840D via the drive bus into the control module.
1axis drive control
Order No.: 6SN11180DG2_0AA1 The digital 1axis performance control can be loaded with the drive software for feed drive or main spindle drive control. The operator interface is the same as for MSD and FD. The board is available in three different versions:
S Basic version with sinusoidal voltage signals and the possibility of connecting absolute value encoders with EnDat interface
S Additionally with evaluation for a direct position measuring system with

sinusoidal current signals
S Additionally with evaluation for a direct position measuring signal with

sinusoidal voltage signals and the possibility of connecting absolute value encoders with EnDat interface and SSI interface (from SW 5.1.9)
2axis drive control
FD control software can be downloaded into the digital 2 axis closedloop control. The MSD software can only be downloaded when configured as signalaxis control module. The board is available in two basic versions, which differ both in the controller performance and in the evaluation of the direct position measuring systems: Performance 6SN11180DH2_0AA1
S Additionally with evaluation for 2 direct measuring systems with sinusoidal

current signals

voltage signals and the possibility of connecting absolute value encoders with EnDat interface and SSI interface (from SW 5.1.9) Standard 2 6SN11180DM__0AA0

voltage signals and the possibility of connecting absolute value encoders with EnDat interface
Note We recommend that measuring systems with current signals are not used for new applications. Voltage signals offer a higher noise immunity, and will replace current signals.
5-124
05.01
Note A 2axis drive control can be used for singleaxis applications, also in a singleaxis power module. The configuring is realized as a singleaxis module. For motor encoders, the electrical rotor position can be determined using a configurable, automatic identification run without having to adjust the EMF of the synchronous motor (1FE1). In this case, traversing motion, typically <$5 degrees mech. is not exceeded. The identification run must be executed each time the equipment is poweredup.
Additional planning/configuring instructions, refer to Catalog NC 60.
Drive control
1axis version
2axis version
M3 / 0.8 Nm
M3 / 0.8 Nm
X431 X432 AS1 AS2 663 9 X35 X34
X431 X432 B1 19 9 AS1 AS2 663 9 B1 19 B2 9
0.8 Nm
0.8 Nm
X35 X34
Version label
M3 / 0.8 Nm
Fig. 5-7 Digital control with direct measuring system
5-125
05.01
Notice When using nonPELV circuits connected to terminals AS1, AS2, the connector must be prevented from being incorrectly inserted using plug coding (refer to EN602041, Section 6.4). Order No. of the coding, refer to Catalog NC 60.
Warning Only PELV circuits may be connected to terminal 19.
5
5.6.1
Interface overview, drive control

Interface overview, drive control Desig. Function Enable potential 2) Pulse enable: The start inhibit relay is switched using terminal 663; when it opens, the gating pulses are inhibited and the motor is switched into a no torque condition. Relay, start inhibit (feedback signal. term. 663) Relay, start inhibit (feedback signal, term. 663) Input, external zero mark (BERO) axis 1 negative enable potential Input, external zero mark (BERO) axis 2 positive enable potential 2) Motor encoder, axis 1 Motor encoder, axis 2 Direct position encoder axis 1 Direct position encoder axis 2 Equipment bus (not labeled on the front panel) Drive bus Type 1) O I Typ. voltage/ limit values +24 V +21 V ... 30 V Max. cross sect. 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
9 X431 663 X431
AS1 X431 AS2 X431 B1 19 B2 9 X432 X432 X432 X432 X411 X412 X421 X422 X151 X141/341
NC I O I O
max. 250VAC/1A 30 VDC/2 A +13 ... 30 V 0V +13 ... 30 V +24 V
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
_________ 1) I=Input; O=Output; NC=NC contact; NO=NO contact (for signal NO=High/NC=Low) 2) The terminal may only be used to enable the associated drive group.
5-126
05.01
5 Control Modules 5.7 Control module SIMODRIVE 611 universal
5.7
Control module SIMODRIVE 611 universal

The control module SIMODRIVE 611 universal is used in the SIMODRIVE 611 system and includes two independent drive controls. However, the board can also be operated in the oneaxis mode or in oneaxis power modules. All of the drivespecific settings on the control board can be made as follows:
Description
S using the SimoCom U parameterizing and startup tool S using the display and operator unit on the front of the module S via PROFIBUSDP (parameter area, PKW area)
Note The control module is described in detail in: Reference: /FBU/, Description of Functions SIMODRIVE 611 universal
5-127
05.01
Features
The control module has the following features:
S Control module versions

1axis, resolver, n/Mset 1axis, resolver, n/Mset, positioning 2axis, resolver, n/Mset 2axis, resolver, n/Mset, positioning 2axis, sin/cos 1 Vpp / absolute value encoder, n/Mset 2axis, sin/cos 1 Vpp / absolute value encoder, n/Mset, positioning
S Software and data
The software and the user data are saved on an interchangeable memory module.
S Terminals and operator control elements

2 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs per drive 4 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs per drive 2 test sockets POWERON RESET button with integrated LED Display and operator control unit
S Safe start inhibit (refer to Section 9.5) S Serial interface (RS232, RS485) S Optional modules
Optional terminal module, 8 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs Option module, PROFIBUSDP1 Option module, PROFIBUSDP2 (from SW 3.1) Option module, PROFIBUSDP3 (from SW 3.1)
5-128
05.01
5.7.1
Control module for 1 or 2 axes
Control modules for 2 axes
The following 2 axis control modules are available:
2axis for encoders with sin/cos 1Vpp
2axis for resolvers

X302 Module for encoder evaluation

Slot for
5
X302
S S
optional TERMINAL modules or
optional PROFIBUSDP module
S S S

Interfaces Terminals, Switch

Memory module
S S
Firmware User data

Display and operator unit

Pulse interface
Equipment bus
The following is valid for screws: Tighten (for the shield contact) Max. torque = 0.8 Nm
The following applies for plug connections: In order that the plug connections with the same number of pins cannot be incorrectly inserted, they must be appropriately coded.
Fig. 5-8
Control modules for 2 axes
5-129
05.01
Control module for 1 axis
The following 1 axis control module is available:
1axis for resolvers These interfaces have no function for the 1axis version

Slot for
optional TERMINAL module or optional PROFIBUSDP module
X302
S S S S

Interfaces Terminals, Terminals

Memory module
S S
Firmware User data

Display and operator control unit

Pulse interface

Equipment bus
The following is valid for screws: Tighten (for the shield contact) Max. torque = 0.8 Nm The following applies for plug connections: In order that the plug connections with the same number of pins cannot be incorrectly inserted, they must be appropriately coded.
Fig. 5-9
Control module for 1 axis
5-130
05.01
Optional terminal module
Using this option module, an additional 8 digital inputs and outputs can be implemented for drive A. The functionality of these inputs/outputs can be freely parameterized
I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 O4 O5 O6 O7 O8 O9 O10 O11
X422 8 inputs
Order No.: 6SN11140NA000AA0
5
The following is valid for screws: X432 8 outputs Tighten (for shield contact) Max. torque = 0.8 Nm
Fig. 5-10 Optional TERMINAL module
Optional PROFIBUSDP module

X423
The SIMODRIVE 611 universal control module can be connected and operated as DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus using this option module.
The following is valid for screws: Two color LED for diagnostics Tighten (for shield contact) Max. torque = 0.8 Nm
Fig. 5-11 Optional PROFIBUSDP module Which PROFIBUSDP option modules are there?
S PROFIBUSDP1 S PROFIBUSDP2 S PROFIBUSDP3
6SN1 1140NB000AA0 6SN1 1140NB000AA1 6SN1 1140NB010AA0
5-131
05.01
5.7.2
Description of the terminals and interfaces

The modulespecific terminals and interfaces are available together for drive A and drive B.
Module specific terminals and interfaces

Table 5-17 Terminal No. Desig.
Overview of the modulespecific terminals and interfaces Function Type

1)
Technical data
Signal terminal, start inhibit (X421) AS1 AS2 X421 Signal contact, start inhibit Checkback signal from terminal 663 NC Connector type: Max. conductor crosssection: Contact: Contact load capability: 2pin plug connector 2.5 mm2 Floating NC contact at 250 VAC max. 1 A at 30 VDC max. 2 A
AS1 AS2 T.663 No pulse enable (terminal 663) The gating pulses of the power transistors are inhibited. Terminals fr supply and pulse enable (X431) X431 P24 X431.1 External supply for digital outputs (+24 V) Reference for external supply V
AS1 AS2
Relay, safe start inhibit
T.663 Pulse enable (terminal 663) available The gating pulses of the power transistors are enabled.
Connector type: Max. conductor crosssection: Voltage tolerance (including ripple): V
5pin plug connector 1.5 mm2
10 V to 30 V
M24
X431.2
The external supply is required for the following digital outputs:
S S S S
8 outputs of the drivespecific terminals (X461, O0.A O3.A / X462, O0.B O3.B )
8 outputs of the optional TERMINAL module (X432, O4 O11) When dimensioning the external supply, the total current of all of the digital outputs must be taken into account. Max. total current: for control modules (all 8 outputs): 2.4 A
for the optional TERMINAL module (all 8 outputs): 480 mA Example: Board/module Outputs Dimensioning the external supply Control board 8 max. 1.5 A > 24 V / 1.5 A Control module + Optional TERMINAL mod. 8 + 8 max. (1.5 A + 280 mA) > 24 V / 1.8 A 9 X431.3 Enable voltage (+24 V) V Reference: T.19 Max. current (for the complete group): 500 mA Note: The enable voltage (terminal 9) can be used to supply the enable signals (e.g. pulse enable) as 24 V auxiliary voltage.
5-132
05.01
Table 5-17 Terminal No. 663
Overview of the modulespecific terminals and interfaces, continued Function Type

1)
Technical data
Desig. X431.4 Pulse enable (+24 V) I Voltage tolerance (including ripple): 21 V to 30 V Current drain, typical: 25 mA at 24 V Note: The pulses are enabled for both drive A and B simultaneously. The drives coast down, unbraked when the pulse enable is withdrawn. Note: If the enable signals are to be controlled from an external voltage source, then the reference potential (ground) of the external source must be connected to this terminal.
19
X431.5
Reference (reference for all digital inputs)
Serial interface (X471) X471 Serial interface for SimoCom U IO Connector type: DSub socket, 9pin Cable plan and pin assignment for RS232 or RS485, refer to: Reference: /FB611U/, Description of Functions SIMODRIVE 611 universal
Equipment bus (X34) X351 Equipment bus IO Ribbon cable: Voltages: Signals: 34core Various Various
Test socket (X34) DAU1 DAU2 M X34 Test socket 12) Test socket Reference 22) M M M Test socket: Resolution: Voltage range: Max. current: 2 mm 8 bits 0 V to 5 V 3 mA
1) I: Input; IO: Input/output; M: Measuring signal; NC: NC contact; V: supply 2) Can be freely parameterized
5-133
05.01
Drive specific terminals

Table 5-18
The drivespecific terminals are available for drive A and for drive B.
Overview of the drivespecific terminals Terminal Function Drive B No. Desig. Type
1)
Technical data
Drive A No. Desig.
Encoder connection (X411, X412) X411 Motor encoder connection Drive A Motor encoder connection Drive B I Refer to Section 3 Note: Encoder limiting frequencies:
X412
S S
Encoders with sin/cos 1 Vpp: Resolver:
350 kHz 375 Hz
Analog outputs (X441) 75.A 16.A 15 X441.1 X441.2 X441.5 75.B 16.B 15 X441.3 X441.4 X441.5 Analog output 12) Analog output 22) Analog output 12) Analog output 22) Reference AO AO AO AO Connector type: 5pin plug connector Connection: Cable with braided shield, connect at both ends Max. conductor crosssection for finely stranded or solid conductors: 0.5 mm2 Voltage range: 10 V to +10 V Max. current: 3 mA Resolution: 8 bits Updated: in the speed controller clock cycle Shortcircuit proof
Drivespecific terminals (X451, X452) X451 X452 Connector type: 10pin, plug connector strip Max. conductor crosssection for finelystranded or solid conductors: 0.5 mm2 Analog input 1 Reference Analog input 2 Reference Controller enable Drivespecific I AI Differential input Voltage range: 12.5 V to +12.5 V Input resistance: 100 k Resolution: 14 bits (sign + bits) Connection: Connect a cable with braided shield at both ends Current drain, typical: 6 mA at 24 V Signal level (including ripple) High signal level: 15 V to 30 V Low signal level: 3 V to 5 V Electrical isolation: Reference is terminal 19 / terminal M24 Reference: T.19 Maximum current (for the total group): 500 mA Note: The enable voltage (terminal 9) can be used to supply the enable signals (e.g. controller enable).
56.A 14.A 24.A 20.A 65.A
X451.1 X451.2 X451.3 X451.4 X451.5
56.B 14.B 24.B 20.B 65.B
X452.1 X452.2 X452.3 X452.4 X452.5
X451.6
X452.6
Enable voltage (+24 V)
5-134
05.01
Table 5-18
Overview of the drivespecific terminals, continued Terminal Function Drive B No. I0.B Desig. X452.7 Digital input 02) Fast input3) e.g. for equivalent zero mark, external block change Digital input 12) Fast input Digital input 22) Digital input 32) DI Voltage: 24V Current drain, typical: 6 mA at 24 V Signal level (including ripple) High signal level: 15 V to 30 V Low signal level: 3 V to 5 V Sampling time, fast input: 62.5 s Electrical isolation: Reference is terminal 19/terminal M24 Note: An open input is interpreted just like a 0 signal. Type
1)
Technical data
Drive A No. I0.A Desig. X451.7
I1.A I2.A I3.A
X451.8 X451.9 X451.10
I1.B I2.B I3.B
X452.8 X452.9 X452.10
DI DI DI
Drivespecific terminals (X461, X462) X461 X462 Connector type: 10pin, plug connector strip Max. conductor crosssection for finelystranded or solid conductors: 0.5 mm2 Signal A+ Signal A Signal B+ Signal B Signal R+ Signal R IO IO IO IO IO IO Incremental shaft encoder interface (WSGSS) Connection:
A+.A A.A B+.A B.A R+.A R.A
X461.1 X461.2 X461.3 X461.4 X461.5 X461.6
A+.B A.B B+.B B.B R+.B R.B
X462.1 X462.2 X462.3 X462.4 X462.5 X462.6
S S
Cable with braided shield, connected at both ends. The reference ground of the connected node must be connected to terminal X441.5.
Note: Nodes can be connected which are in compliance with standard RS485/RS422. The incremental shaft encoder interface can either be parameterized as input or output.
S S
O0.A
Input Output O0.B
To enter incremental position reference values To output incremental position actual values X462.7 Digital output 04) DO Rated current per output: 500 mA Maximum current per output: 600 mA Maximum total current: 2.4 A (valid for these 8 outputs) Typical voltage drop: 250 mV for 500 mA Shortcircuit proof Example: The following is valid if all outputs are simultaneously energized: current = 240 mA > O.K. current = 2.8 A > not O.K., as the total current is greater than 2.4 A.
X461.7
O1.A
X461.8
O1.B
X462.8
Digital output 14)
DO
O2.A
X461.9
O2.B
X462.9
Digital output 24)
DO
O3.A
X461.10
O3.B
X462.10
Digital output 34)
DO
Note:
S S
The power switched via these outputs is supplied via terminals P24 / M24 (X431). When dimensioning the external supply, this must be taken into account. The digital outputs only function if the external supply (+24 V / 0 V is available at terminals P24/M24).
1) I: Input; DO: Digital output, DI: Digital input, AO: Analog output; AI: Analog input, V: supply 2) Can be freely parameterized. All of the digital inputs are debounced per software. A delay time of between 1 and 2 interpolation clock cycles (P1010) is obtained due to the signal detection process. 3) I0.x is hardwired internally for position sensing and therefore acts almost instantaneously. 4) Freely parameterizable. The digital outputs are updated in the interpolation clock cycle (P1010). A hardwarerelated delay time of approx. 200 s is involved.
5-135
5 Control Modules 5.8 Control module SIMODRIVE 611 universal E
05.01
5.8
Control module SIMODRIVE 611 universal E
Description
For SINUMERIK 802D, the SIMODRIVE 611 universal E control module is used with the function Motion Control with PROFIBUSDP. Using this function, a clock cyclesynchronous drive coupling can be implemented between a DP master (e.g. SINUMERIK 802D) and the SIMODRIVE 611 universal E DP slave.
Note
5
Features
The control module is described in detail in: Reference: /FBU/, Description of Functions SIMODRIVE 611 universal
The control module has the following features:
S Control module (refer to Section 5.8.1)

Order No. (MLFB): 6SN11180NH100AAx 2axis for encoders with sin/cos 1 Vpp With memory module for nset
S Optional PROFIBUSDP3 (refer to Section 5.8.1)

Order No. (MLFB): 6SN11140NB010AA0
S The parameters can be set as follows:

using the SimoCom U parameterizing and startup tool using the display and operator control unit on the front panel using the PROFIBUSDP (parameter area, PKW area)
S Software and data

The software and the user data are saved on an interchangeable memory module.
S Terminals and operator control elements

2 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs per drive 2 digital inputs and 2 digital outputs per drive 2 test sockets POWERON RESET button with integrated LED Display and operator control unit
S Safe start inhibit (refer to Section 9.5) S Serial interface (RS232) S TTL encoder can be connected as an additional measuring system
5-136
05.01
5.8.1
Control module with option module
Control module with optional PROFIBUSDP module

SIMODRIVE 611 universal E control module 2axis for encoders with sin/cos 1Vpp

Option module PROFIBUSDP3 with PROFIBUSASIC DPC31 with PLL Module for encoder evaluation

X302

Slot for option module PROFIBUSDP3
S S S

Interfaces Terminals Test sockets

Serial interface (RS232)

Encoder interface for TTL encoders

Memory module

S S
The following applies for plug connections: In order that the plug connections with the same number of pins cannot be incorrectly inserted, they must be appropriately coded (refer under the index entry Coding the mini connectors). The following is valid for screws: Tighten (for shield contact) Max. torque = 0.8 Nm
Firmware User data
Display and operator control unit

Pulse interface

Equipment bus
Fig. 5-12 SIMODRIVE 611 universal E control module with optional PROFIBUSDP3 module
5-137
05.01
5.8.2
Description of the terminals and interfaces
Module-specific terminals and interfaces
The modulespecific terminals and interfaces are available for both drive A and drive B together.
Table 5-19 Terminal No.
Overview of the modulespecific terminals and interfaces Function Type

1)
Technical data
Desig.
Signal terminal, start inhibit (X421) AS1 X421 AS2 Checkback signal of terminal 663 AS1 AS2 T.663 Signal contact start inhibit NC Connector type: Max. conductor crosssection: Contact: Contact load capability: 2pin plug connector 2.5 mm2 Floating NC contact at 250 VAC max. 1 A at 30 VDC max. 2 A
AS1 AS2 T.663
No pulse enable (terminal 663) The gating pulses of the power transistors are inhibited. Terminals for supply and pulse enable (X431) X431 P24 X431.1 External supply for digital outputs (+24 V) Reference for external supply Enable voltage (+24 V) V
Pulse enable (terminal 663) available The gating pulses of the power transistors are enabled.
Connector type: Max. conductor crosssection:
5pin plug connector 1.5 mm2
Voltage tolerance (including ripple): 10 V to 30 V Max. total current: 2.4 A Note:
S
M24 X431.2 V
The external supply is required for the 4 digital outputs (O0.A, O1.A and O0.B, O1.B). When dimensioning the external supply, the actual total current of all digital outputs must be taken into account.
X431.3
Reference: T.19 Max. current (for the complete group): 500 mA Note: The enable voltage (terminal 9) can be used to supply the enable signals (e.g. pulse enable) as 24 V auxiliary voltage. Voltage tolerance (including ripple): 21 V to 30 V Current drain, typical: 25 mA at 24 V Note: The pulses are simultaneously enabled for drives A and B. When the pulse enable is withdrawn, the drives coast down unbraked. Note: If the enable signals are to be controlled from an external voltage source and not from terminal 9, then the reference potential (ground) of the external source must be connected to this terminal.
663
X431.4
Pulse enable (+24 V)
19
X431.5
Reference (Reference for all digital inputs)
5-138
05.01
Table 5-19 Terminal No.
Overview of the modulespecific terminals and interfaces, continued Function Type

1)
Technical data
Desig.
Serial interface (X471) X471 Serial interface for SimoCom U IO Connector type: DSub socket, 9pin Note:
S S
The interface can only be used as RS232 interface For the cable assignment and pin assignment of the interface, refer to: Reference: /FB611U/, Description of Functions SIMODRIVE 611 universal
PROFIBUSDP interface (X423) for the optional PROFIBUSDP3 module X423 Communications interface for PROFIBUS IO Connector type: DSub socket, 9pin Note:
Pin assignment, connection diagram and wiring of the interface: Reference: /FB611U/, Drive SIMODRIVE 611 universal
Equipment bus (X351) X351 Equipment bus IO Ribbon cable: Voltages: Signals: 34core Various Various
Test sockets (X34) DAU1 DAU2 M X34 Test socket 12) Test socket Reference 22) MA MA MA Test socket: Resolution: Voltage range: Max. current: 2 mm 8 bits 0 V to 5 V 3 mA
1) I: Input; V: Supply; IO: Input/output; TA: Measuring signal, analog; NC: NC contact; V: supply 2) can be freely parameterized
5-139
05.01
Drive specific terminals

Table 5-20
The drivespecific terminals are available both for drive A and for drive B.
Overview of the drivespecific terminals Terminal Function Drive B No. Desig. Type
1)
Technical data
Drive A No. Desig.
Encoder connection (X411, X412) X411 X412 Motor encoder connection, drive A Motor encoder connection, drive B I I Refer to Section 3 Note: Encoder limiting frequency: Encoder with sin/cos 1Vpp: 350 kHz
Analog outputs (X441) 75.A 16.A 15 X441.1 X441.2 X441.5 75.B 16.B 15 X441.3 X441.4 X441.5 Analog output 12) Analog output 22) Analog output 12) Analog output 22) Reference AO AO AO AO Connector type: 5pin plug connector Connection: refer to3) Max. conductor crosssection for finelystranded or solid conductors: 0.5 mm2 Voltage range: 10 V to +10 V Max. current: 3 mA Resolution: 8 bits Updated: in the speed controller clock cycle Shortcircuit proof
Terminals for analog inputs and digital inputs/outputs (X453, X454) X453 X454 Connector type: 10pin, plug connector strip Max. conductor crosssection for finelystranded or solid conductors: 0.5 mm2 none none none none Controller enable Drivespecific I Current drain, typical: 6 mA at 24 V Signal level (including ripple) High signal level: 15 V to 30 V Low signal level: 3 V to 5 V Electrical isolation: Reference is terminal 19/ terminal M24 Reference: T.19 Maximum current (for the total group): 500 mA Note: The enable voltage (terminal 9) can be used to supply the enable signals (e.g. controller enable). Voltage: 24V Current drain, typical: 6 mA at 24 V Signal level (including ripple) High signal level: 15 V to 30 V Low signal level: 3 V to 5 V Electrical isolation: Reference is terminal 19/ terminal M24 Note: An opencircuit input is interpreted just the same as a 0 signal.
56.A 14.A 24.A 20.A 65.A
X453.1 X453.2 X453.3 X453.4 X453.5
56.B 14.B 24.B 20.B 65.B
X454.1 X454.2 X454.3 X454.4 X454.5
X453.6
X454.6
Enable voltage (+24 V)
I0.A
X453.7
I0.B
X454.7
Digital input 04) Faster Input5)
DI
I1.A
X453.8
I1.B
X454.8
Digital input 14)
DI
5-140
05.01
Table 5-20
Overview of the drivespecific terminals, continued Terminal Function Drive B No. O0.B O1.B Desig. X454.9 X454.10 Digital output 06) Digital output 16) DO DO Rated current per output: 500 mA Maximum current per output: 600 mA Typical voltage drop: 250 mV for 500 mA Shortcircuit proof Type
1)
Technical data
Drive A No. O0.A O1.A Desig. X453.9 X453.10 Note:
S S
The power, switched via these outputs, is supplied via terminals P24 / M24 (X431). When dimensioning the external supply, this must be taken into account. The digital outputs only function if the external supply (+24 V, terminals P24/M24) is available.
1) AO: Analog output; I: Input; DI: Digital input; DO: Digital output; V: supply 2) Can be freely parameterized 3) The analog outputs (X441) should be connected via a terminal strip. A shielded cable should be used for all of the analog outputs between X441 and the terminal strip. For this piece of cable, the shield should be connected at both ends of the cable. 4 analog cables can then be fed from the terminal strip. The cable shields should be connected and the M cables should be fed from a common M terminal. 4) Can be freely parameterized All of the digital inputs are debounded per software. A delay time of between 1 and 2 interpolation clock cycles is obtained due to the signal detection process (P1010). 5) I0.x is internally hardwired for position sensing where it acts almost instantaneously. 6) Can be freely parameterized The digital outputs are updated in the interpolation clock cycle (P1010). A hardwarerelated delay time of approx. 200 s must be added.
5-141
05.01
Encoder interface for TTL encoders (X472)

Table 5-21 Pin No. X472 1 2 P_Encoder M_Encoder A *A Reserved B *B Reserved P_Encoder R M_Encoder *R Possibility of connecting to a power supply for an additional measuring system (TTL encoder, encoder 3). The data is transferred to a higherlevel control system via PROFIBUS. Desig. Connector type: DSub socket, 15pin V V I I I I V I V I Reserved Order No. (MLFB): 6FX20022CA111VV0 V = Space retainer for cable type (length, ...) Reference: /NCZ/ Catalog, Accessories and Equipment Encoder interface for TTL encoders (X472) Function Type
1)
Technical data
Recommendation for TTL encoders: Order No. (MLFB): 6FX20012VB02 Encoder pulse number = 1024 V = Spare retainer for connection types A, C, E or G Cabling Max. cable length: 15 m
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Recommendation for encoder cables:
Encoder power supply Voltage: Shortcircuit proof Max. current: Max. shortcircuit current: 300 mA A3.5 5.1 V $2 %
Encoder limiting frequency TTL encoder: 1 MHz
1) I: Input; V: supply
5-142
05.01
5 Control Modules 5.9 Control module HLA module
5.9
Control module HLA module
Description
The hydraulic module (HLAmodule) allows SINUMERIK 840D to directly control hydraulic axes via the digital drive bus. The HLA module is a control module belonging to the modular SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system which is inserted in a 50 mm carrier module (universal housing). The control and closedloop control electronics to operate hydraulic drives is integrated on the HLA module. The control module can also be used as ANA control module for analog axes. Mixed operation (HLA/ANA) is permissible for this doubleaxis module. Hydraulic drives are available, the same as electric drives, and can also be combined within an interpolating group.
Note The HLA module is described in detail in: Reference: /FBHLA/, SINUMERIK 840D SIMODRIVE 611 digital HLA Module, Description of Functions
5-143
05.01
Features
The HLA module has the following features:
S Software and data

The communications interface, for supported utilities (services), is compatible to SIMODRIVE 611 SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD). The code and data management is implemented essentially the same as SIMODRIVE 611 SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD). The software for the hydraulics is saved in the control as dedicated program code.
S Hardware
The integration into the SIMODRIVE 611 system has been implemented so that it is compatible to SIMODRIVE 611 digital SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD). This essentially includes the interfaces:
Drive bus Equipment bus Power supply concept
S HLA control module (2 axes)

Velocity precontrol, controller Closedloop force control Control voltage output 2 pressure sensors can be connected per axis A hydraulic control valve can be controlled
S Terminals and diagnostics

A hydraulic shutoff valvecan be controlled BERO input per axis Modulespecific enable Test sockets (DAU)
5-144
05.01
5.9.1
System overview
A complete 840D control with HLA module comprises various individual components. These are now listed.
MMCCPU
e.g. SIMATIC S7300
Operator panel
Machine control panel MSTT
CNC full keyboard Line supply connection Distribution box NCCPU Cable distributor Cable distributor
PCMCIA Equipment bus NCU box HLA module

NE NCU HLA module
Hydraulic valve
Position sensing
Pressure sensor A Slot, battery and fan Digital I/O (fast NC I/O) Measuring (2x) Pressure sensor B
Control valve
Handwheel (2x) (1x from M) SITOP power (external PS) 26.5 V external supply
Enable BERO inputs
Shutoff valve
Note: Diagram, hydraulics for one axis
Fig. 5-13
System components
HHU
5-145
05.01
Control valve
Control valve
A B
Pressure sensor A Pressure sensor B Position sensing
Pressure sensor A Pressure sensor B Position sensing
A B
Shutoff valve Hydraulic drive, axis 1 Axis 1 HLA
Shutoff valve Hydraulic drive, axis 2 Axis 2
X101
Position measuring system B A Pressure sensing
X102
Position measuring system B A Pressure sensing
X121
Control valve
X122
X112
X111
Control valve
X431
X432
DAUs
M PV1 MV1 C1 P24 M24 663 9 Electronics ground Shutoff value, axis 1 Reserved, do not assign 26.5 V external supply Power enable terminal 663 Enable voltage +24 V internal
X35 X34
+ +
M PV2 MV2 C2 B1 19 B2 9
Electronics ground Shutoff valve, axis 2 Reserved, do not assign BERO input, axis 1 Enable voltage, 0 V internal BERO input, axis 2 Enable voltage, +24 V internal
X1141
Drive bus Equipment bus interface (X151)
X1341
Drive bus/terminating connector, drive bus at the last module
Fig. 5-14
Connection configuration, HLA module
5-146
05.01
5.9.2
Wiring
SINUMERIK 840D and HLA modules are supplied from the SIMODRIVE line supply infeed or the SIMODRIVE monitoring module via the equipment bus. If an HLA module is used, at least one NE module must be used in the equipment group. It is not possible to input a voltage in any other way and this could damage the equipment.
Supply connection
Note It is not permissible to use an HLA module alone connected to the SIMODRIVE monitoring module!
The power supply for the following electric axes is realized via the DC link busbars (40 mm2) of the carrier module.
5-147
05.01
Measuring systems
One position encoder can be evaluated for each axis on the HLA module.
S X101: S X102:
Axis 1 Axis 2
The measuring system must always be inserted at the connector of the associated axis.
Table 5-22 Pin 1 2 X101 PENC0 M AP0 AN0 BMIDAT0 BP0 BN0 XBMIDAT0 PSENSE0 RP0 MSENSE0 RN0 M BMICLK0 XBMICLK0 Connectors X101, X102; X102 PENC2 M AP2 AN2 BMIDAT2 BP2 BN2 XBMIDAT2 PSENSE2 RP2 MSENSE2 RN2 M BMICLK2 XBMICLK2 15pin Dsub plug connectors (double tier) Function Encoder power supply Ground, encoder power supply Incremental signal A Inverse incremental signal A Data signal Incremental signal B Inverse incremental signal B Inverse data signal Remote sense, encoder power supply (P) Incremental signal R Remote sense, encoder power supply (M) Inverse incremental signal R Ground (or inner shields) Clock signal Inverse clock signal X X X X X X X X X X X X X X I1) X X X X E1) X X X X X X X X X X X S1)
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1) I = Incremental, E = EnDat, S = SSI Note: The SSI encoder requires an external 24 V power supply
5-148
05.01
Pressure sensor system
2 pressure sensors can be connected per axis
S X111: S X112:
Table 5-23 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X111 P24DS P24DS
Axis 1 (sensor 1A, 1B) Axis 2 (sensor 2A, 2B)

Connectors X111, X112; 15pin DSub socket connectors X112 P24DS P24DS M24EXT M24EXT M24EXT PIST2BN PIST2BP M24EXT PIST2AN PIST2AP Type
1)
Function Supply, pressure sensor with external +24 V Supply, pressure sensor with external +24 V not assigned not assigned Supply, pressure sensor with external 0 V not assigned not assigned not assigned Supply, pressure sensor with external 0 V Supplementary pin for jumper, pins 1011 for 3conductor connection Analog actual value signal, reference ground Analog actual value signal, max. range 0...10 V Supplementary pin for jumper, pins 1314 for threeconductor connection Analog actual value signal, reference ground Analog actual value signal, max. range 0...10 V
O O O O O I I O I I
M24EXT M24EXT M24EXT PIST1BN PIST1BP M24EXT PIST1AN PIST1AP
I = Input, O = Output
The inputs are differential inputs with 40 k input resistance. The input voltage range is 0...+10 V. The power supply output is provided with electronic shortcircuit protection. The power supply output is designed for a total current (4 sensors) of 200 mA. Supply, pressure sensors with 26.5 V "2 % according to the external supply at X431.
Notice The external 26.5 V power supply voltage cannot be replaced by a 24 V voltage.
5-149
05.01
Control valve
S X121: S X122:
Table 5-24 Pin 1 2 3 4 X121 P24RV1 P24RV1 P24RV1 P24RV1 M
Axis 1 Axis 2
ConnectorsX121, X122;15pin DSub socket connector X122 P24RV2 P24RV2 P24RV2 P24RV2 M VSET2N VSET2P M M24EXT M24EXT M24EXT M VACT2N VACT2P I I O O O O O Type
1)
Function +24 V switched +24 V switched +24 V switched +24 V switched Electronics ground Analog setpoint output, reference ground Analog setpoint output +/10 V Electronics ground Ground, 24 V external Ground, 24 V external Ground, 24 V external Not assigned Electronics ground Analog valve actual value input, reference ground Analog valve actual value input, +/10 V
O O O O
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1)
VSET1N VSET1P M M24EXT M24EXT M24EXT M VACT1N VACT1P
The analog valve actual value inputs are differential inputs with 100 k input resistance. The load capability of the 24 V outputs, control value are
S for an ambient temperature 40 C S for an ambient temperature 55 C
A2.0 1.5 A
for the average current value for a load duty cycle 10 s duration It is permissible to linearly interpolate between the temperature transition points. The shorttime load capability of the control valve outputs is 3.0 A (200 ms). When overloaded, the fuse F1900 or F1901 on the HLA control module is destroyed.
Fuse
The outputs 24 V switched for axes 1 and 2 are protected using a fine fuse F1900 (axis 1) and F1901 (axis 2). Value: Company: 2.5 AF/250 V; 5x20 mm UL WickmannWerke GmbH Annenstrae 113 58453 Witten or Postfach 2520 58415 Witten 19194
Order No.:
5-150
05.01
Terminals
Shutoff valve (axial) supply, 26.5 V external, enable, BERO inputs
S X431: S X432:
Table 5-25 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1) X431 M PV1 MV1 C1 P24 M24 663 9
Axis 1 Axis 2
Connector X431; 8pin Phoenix Combicon connector Type
1)
Function Electronics ground +24V shutoff valve, axis 1 Ground, shutoff valve, axis 1 Reserved, do not connect Input +26.5 V external Input 0 V external Modulespecific enable Enable voltage internal +24 V term. 9
Typ. voltage/ limit values
I O O I I I O
max. 2.0 A
26.5 V "2 %
21 V...30 V
Table 5-26 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1) X432 M PV2 MV2 C2 B1 19 B2 9
Connectors X432; 8pin Phoenix Combicon connector Type

1)
Function Electronics ground +24V shutoff valve, axis 2 Ground, shutoff valve, axis 2 Reserved, do not connect BERO input, axis 1 Enable voltage internal, ground terminal 19 BERO input axis 2 Enable voltage internal +24 V terminal 9
I O O I O I O
max. 2.0 A
13 V...30 V
13 V...30 V
Max. terminal crosssection 2.5 mm2.
Caution The +24 V outputs, shutoff valve axes 1 and 2 are shortcircuit proof. The energy, absorbed when switchingoff inductive loads must be limited by the user to 1.7 J. When interchanged (incorrect polarity), the outputs are not protected against overload.
Warning If the 26.5 V supply is connected with the incorrect polarity then the shutoff valves open immediately, even if the NC or closedloop control is not operational!
5-151
05.01
Notice There is a currentcompensated radio interference suppression reactor at the input of the external supply, terminal P24, terminal M24 (Pins 5, 6 of X431). This is the reason that it is neither permissible to interchange nor shortcircuit terminal M24 and terminal MV1/MV2. The internal enable voltage (FRP/9) is provided to supply the BEROs and terminal 663, and may not be used to supply the hydraulic components. The hydraulic components should be supplied via the supply, P24. The voltages may not be switched in parallel.
Enable inputs
The modulespecific enable is realized via terminal 663. There is no relay as there is no power module; the input is evaluated via optocoupler and additionally acts on the shutoff valve. Terminal 663 is referred to the internal enable voltage (ground, terminal 19).
5.9.3
Test sockets (diagnostics)

Internal signals can be assigned to test sockets of the 611D drive (in conjunction with SINUMERIK 840D) using the startup tool or the MMC102/103. These signals are then available at the test sockets as analog values.
Test sockets
DAU1
DAU2
DAU3
Ground
Functionality
8bit D/A converters (DAU) channels are available at the 611D hydraulic module. An analog image of various drive signals can be switched to a test socket via these channels. Using the 8 bits (=1 byte) of the DAU, only a specific window of the 24 bit drive signals can be displayed. For this reason, the quantization of the selected signal must be defined using a shift factor. The normalization factor is determined when parameterizing the system and is displayed to the user.
5-152
05.01
5 Control Modules 5.10 Control module ANA module
5.10
Control module ANA module
Description
Up to two analog axes can be handled using the ANA control module. An ANA module is obtained when it is inserted in the 50 mm wide universal empty housing. The control module can also be used as HLA control module for hydraulic axes. It is permissible to mix axes (ANA/HLA) using this doubleaxis module. An analog axis can be essentially used just like a digital axis. It can be programmed just like a digital interpolating path axis or spindle. Naturally, pure functions of the digital SIMODRIVE 611 drive control are not possible for the external drive units when coupled via an analog speed setpoint interface. (In this case, it involves a functional scope, which accesses the internal axis feedback and communications via the drive bus, e.g. Safety Integrated). If required, separate EMC measures should be provided for the external drive equipment.
Note The ANA module is described in detail in: Reference: /FBANA/, SINUMERIK 840D SIMODRIVE 611 digital ANA module, description of functions
Features
The ANA module has the following features:
S Software and data

The communications interface for supported utilities (services) is compatible to SIMODRIVE 611 SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD). The code and data administration is analog to SIMODRIVE 611 SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD).
S Hardware
The ANA module is integrated into the SIMODRIVE 611 system, compatible to SIMODRIVE 611 digital SRM(FD)/ARM(MSD). This essentially involves the following interfaces: Drive bus Equipment bus Power supply concept
S ANA control module (2 axes)

nset output $10 V 2 sensors can be connected per axis An analog drive amplifier can be controlled
S Terminals and diagnostics

BERO input per axis Modulespecific enable Test sockets (DAU)
5-153
05.01
5.10.1
System overview
A complete 840D control with ANA module comprises various individual components. These will now be listed.
MMCCPU
e.g. SIMATIC S7300
Operator panel
5
MSTT
Machine control panel
Full CNC keyboard Supply connection NCCPU Cable distributor
Distribution box Cable distributor
PCMCIA Equipment bus NCU box
Analog axis
Position sensing
NE NCU ANA module
ANA module Analog sensors
Battery and fan slot Digital I/O (fast NC I/O) Measuring (2x)
0...10 V Analog drive amplifier
Handwheel(2x) (1x from M)
SITOP power (external power supply) 26.5 V external supply (only required when using terminals PV1/MV1 and PV2/MV2)
Enable BERO inputs Analog axis
Note: Shown for an analog axis
Fig. 5-15
System components
5-154
HPU
05.01
ANA control module
Axis 1
Axis 2
Measuring system (encoder connection) X101
Measuring system (encoder connection) X102
Sensor detection X111
Sensor detection X112
External drive amplifier X121 9 8 nset, $10 V nset, reference ground 15 X431
M PV1 MV1 C1 P24 M24 663 9 + + Electronics ground 24 V switched, axis 1 Reserved, do not assign 26.5 V external supply Power enable, term. 663 Internal +24 V enable voltage
External drive amplifier X122 9 8 nset, $10 V nset, reference ground 15

M PV2 MV2 C2 B1 19 B2 9
1
Electronics ground 24 V switched, axis 2 Reserved, do not assign BERO input, axis 1 Internal 0 V enable voltage BERO input, axis 2 Internal +24 V enable voltage
X432
+
DAUs Drive bus X141 Drive bus X341
Equipment bus X151
Fig. 5-16
ANA control module (2 axes)
5-155
05.01
5.10.2
Wiring
SINUMERIK 840D and the ANA module are supplied from the SIMODRIVE line supply infeed or from the SIMODRIVE monitoring module via the equipment bus. There must be at least one NE module in the equipment group if an ANA module is used. It is not possible to connect a voltage in any other way and this could damage the equipment.
Supply connection
Notice It is not permissible to operate an ANA module alone on the SIMODRIVE monitoring module!
5
Measuring systems
The power supply for subsequently connected electrical axes is realized via the DC link busbars (40 mm2) of the support module.
One position encoder can be evaluated per axis on the ANA module.
S X101: S X102:
Axis 1 Axis 2
The measuring system must always be inserted at the connector of the associated axis.
Table 5-27 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X101 PENC0 M AP0 AN0 BMIDAT0 BP0 BN0 XBMIDAT0 PSENSE0 RP0 MSENSE0 RN0 M BMICLK0 XBMICLK0 Connectors X101, X102; X102 PENC2 M AP2 AN2 BMIDAT2 BP2 BN2 XBMIDAT2 PSENSE2 RP2 MSENSE2 RN2 M BMICLK2 XBMICLK2 Encoder power supply Ground, encoder power supply Incremental signal A Inverse incremental signal A Data signal EnDat interface Incremental signal B Inverse incremental signal B Inverse data signal EnDat interface Remote sense, encoder power supply (P) Incremental signal R Remote sense, encoder power supply (M) Inverse incremental signal R Ground (for inner shields) Clock signal, EnDat interface Inverse clock signal EnDat interface 15pin DSub plug connectors (double tier) Function
5-156
05.01
Analog sensors
2 sensors can be connected per axis
S X111: S X112:
Table 5-28 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X111 P24DS P24DS
Axis 1 (sensors 1A, 1B) Axis 2 (sensors 2A, 2B)

Connectors X111, X112; respective 15pin DSub socket connector X112 P24DS P24DS M24EXT M24EXT M24EXT PIST2BN PIST2BP M24EXT PIST2AN PIST2AP O O I I O I I O Type
1)
Function Sensor supply with external +24 V Sensor supply with external +24 V not assigned not assigned Sensor supply with external 0 V not assigned not assigned not assigned Sensor supply with external 0 V Supplementary pin for jumper, pins 1011 for 3conductor connection Analog actual value signal, reference ground Analog actual value signal, max. range 0...10 V Supplementary pin for jumper pins 1314 for 3conductor connection Analog actual value signal, reference ground Analog actual value signal, max. range 0...10 V
O O
M24EXT M24EXT M24EXT PIST1BN PIST1BP M24EXT PIST1AN PIST1AP
1) I: Input, O: Output
The inputs are differential inputs with 40 k input resistance. The input voltage range of the actual value inputs is 0...+10 V. The power supply output has electronic shortcircuit protection. The supply output is dimensioned for a total current (4 sensors) of 200 mA.
5-157
05.01
Analog setpoints and actual values
S X121: S X122:
Table 5-29 Pin 1 2 3 4 X121 P24RV1 P24RV1 P24RV1 P24RV1 M
Axis 1 Axis 2
Connectors X121, X122; 15pin DSub socket connectors X122 P24RV2 P24RV2 P24RV2 P24RV2 M VSET2N VSET2P M M24EXT M24EXT M24EXT M VACT2N VACT2P I I O O O O O Type
1)
Function P24EXT switched, from X431.5 P24EXT switched, from X431.5 P24EXT switched, from X431.5 P24EXT switched, from X431.5 Electronics ground Analog setpoint output, reference ground Analog setpoint output +/10 V Electronics ground M24EXT from X431.6 , M24EXT from X431.6 , M24EXT from X431.6 , Not assigned Electronics ground Analog actual value input, reference ground Analog actual value input, +/10 V
O O O O
5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
VSET1N VSET1P M M24EXT M24EXT M24EXT M VACT1N VACT1P
1) I: Input, O: Output
The analog actual value inputs are differential inputs with 100 k input resistance. The load capability of the 24 V outputs (P24RV1/2) is
S for an ambient temperature of 40 C S for an ambient temperature of 55 C
2.0 A 1.5 A
For the average current value and a load duty cycle with 10 s duration. It is permissible to linearly interpolate between the temperature transition points. The shorttime load capability of the 24 V output is 3.0 A (200 ms). When overloaded, fuse F1900 or F1901 on the ANA control module is destroyed.
Fuse
The 24 V switched outputs for axes 1 and 2 are protected with a fine fuse F1900 (axis 1) or F1901 (axis 2). Value: Company: 2.5 AF/250 V; 5x20 mm UL WickmannWerke GmbH Annenstrae 113 58453 Witten or Postfach 2520 58415 Witten 19194
Order No.:
5-158
05.01
Terminals
26.5 V external supply, enable, BERO inputs
S X431: S X432:
Table 5-30 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1) X431 M PV1 MV1 C1 P24 M24 663 9
Axis 1 Axis 2
1)
Function Electronics ground P24EXT switched, axis 1 M24EXT switched, axis 1 Reserved, do not connect Input +24 V external Input 0 V external Modulespecific enable Internal +24 V enable voltage
I O O I I I O
max. 2.0 A
26.5 V "2 %
21 V...30 V
Table 5-31 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1) X432 M PV2 MV2 C2 B1 19 B2 9

1)
Function Electronics ground P24EXT switched, axis 2 M24EXT switched, axis 2 Reserved, do not connect BERO input, axis 1 Internal enable voltage, ground term. 19 BERO input, axis 2 Internal enable voltage, +24 V
I O O I O I O
max. 2.0 A
13 V...30 V
13 V...30 V
Notice It is not permissible to establish a connection (jumper) between X431.6 and X432.3!
Max. terminal crosssection 2.5 mm2. It is only necessary to supply terminal X431, pins 5 and 6, with 24 V, if the 24 V outputs of connector X111/112, X121/122 or X431/432 are to be used.
5-159
05.01
Caution The +24 V outputs of shutoff valves, axes 1 and 2 are shortcircuit proof. The energy absorbed when switchingoff inductive loads must be limited by the user to 1.7 J. When incorrectly connected (polarity interchanged), the outputs are not protected against overload.
Enable inputs
The modulespecific enable is realized via terminal 663. The input is evaluated via the optocoupler in the ANA module. The enable voltage can be taken from terminal 9. Terminal 663 is referred to the internal enable voltage (ground, terminal 19).
5
5.10.3
Drive bus
Bus interfaces
(refer to SIMODRIVE 611A/D)
S X141: S X341:
Equipment bus
Input Output
A bus terminating connector must be inserted at the last module. (refer to SIMODRIVE 611A/D)
S X151:
Equipment bus J
5-160
Infeed Modules
6
6
Description
The drive group is connected to the power supply through the infeed modules. The infeed/regenerative feedback module (I/R module) and the module for uncontrolled infeed (UI module) is used to feed the power to the DC voltage link. Furthermore, the I/R, UI, and the monitoring module also provides the electronics power supply for the connected modules.
UI module
For the UI module, the energy of the drives fed into the DC link when braking is converted into heat in the integrated brake resistors or brake resistors which should be mounted externally and then dissipated to the ambient air. When required, in addition, one or several pulsed resistor modules can be used within the configuring limits. This module is used for:
S Machines with only a few and short braking cycles with low energy when
braking
S Operation on line supplies from SK line supply/PnUI y 30 S Drive groups with low dynamic requirements, especially for main spindle
drives
I/R module
For the I/R module, the energy of the drives, fed into the DC link when braking, is fed back into the line supply. This module is used for:
S Machines with high dynamic requirements placed on the drives S Frequent braking cycles and high levels of braking energy S Cabinet concepts optimized for low operating costs
Monitoring module
The monitoring module includes a complete electronics power supply for the equipment bus and the central monitoring functions for a separate drive group. The power supply can be derived from both the 3ph. 400V to 480V AC line supply as well as from the DC link. The monitoring module is required if a larger number of drive modules in a group exceeds the electronics power supply of the infeed module (I/R or UI module). Using the monitoring module, groups of drive modules can be formed in several cabinet panels or mounting tiers.
Arrangement
The I/R, UI and monitoring module are located as the first module to the left in the drive group. The line supply infeed and drive modules as well as the commutating reactors and line filters must be mounted on mounting panels with a good conductive surface (e.g. galvanized mounting panel).
6-161
6 Infeed Modules
05.01
Line filter and line filter modules and shielded cables are available to fulfill CE conformance for the radio interference suppression voltage limit values. Shield connecting plates should be used for wiring in compliance with EMC guidelines using shielded power cables. The overvoltage limiting module is required for line supply infeed modules in conformance with UL.
Charge limit, infeed module [F] Number of precharging operations within 8 min. DC link capacitance of the drive group [F]
6
Fig. 6-1 Precharging frequency of the DC link
6-162
05.01
6 Infeed Modules
Relay contact, ready signal
NC contact NC contact
74 73.1 73.2 72 5.3 5.2 5.1 63 9 9 64 19 7 45 44 10 15 15 R 9 112 48 111 213 113 NS 1 NS 2 AS1 AS2
X111
Relay contact, group signal I2t and motor overtemperature Pulse enable Enable voltage Enable voltage Drive enable Enable voltage, reference potential P24 P15 N15 N24 M M RESET (R+Kl15) Enable voltage Settingup operation Contactor control, Start Signal contact from the line contactor Enable signal for internal line contactor Signal contact, start inhibit (NC contact)
X121
X141
1)
X161
1)
X171 X172 LED displays X351
DC link power supply for power failure buffering External supply for the electronics power supply External supply for the electronics power supply External supply for the electronics power supply
M500 P500 2U1 1U1 2V1 1V1 2W1 1W1
X181
1)
Equipment bus
P600
DC link connection
LED displays Electronics power supply faulted Red Equipment not ready, enable Green signal missing (term. 63, Red 64 or 48) Line supply fault 5V voltage Red faulted Equipment ready Yellow (DC link precharged) Red Overvoltage DC link M600
1) jumpers inserted when the equipment is shipped U1 V1 W1 X131 PE Fig. 6-2 Infeed/regenerative feedback module
Supply connection
6-163
Fig. 6-3
6 Infeed Modules
6-164
Drive enable Signal, ready/ fault I2t prealarm and motor overtemperature
FR+ 72 73.1 73.2 74 5.3 5.1 5.2 64 9
Pulse enable
Reset Term. 112 setting up 3)
Term. 48 start DC link controller Checkback signal, start inhibit

AS1 AS2 NS 1 NS 1
Block diagram, line supply infeed module (I/R)
DIL switch S1
3)
P24 P15 9 63 7 45
N15 N24 44 10
M 15 15 R 9 112 48
FR 19
NS 2 NS 2
1 1)
2 1)
3 1)
4 1)
5 1)
6 2)
Equipment bus Power supply and signals
X151
Setting, refer to Section 6
Monit oring
Electronics power supply

NS 1 X131 Safety relay, start inhibit Equipment enable A B Vact
DC link sensing
P600
Voltage controller
Current setpoint limiting
Current controller
Pulse generation
Gating
100 k 4)
Tmax. power module Vmot = 600V/625V Iact
M600
Control unit
DC link pre charging circuit

Precharging contactor NS 2 Line contactor
Line supply rectification and synchronization
X131
L1 L2 PE1 U1 V1 1W 113 111 213 1W1 2W1 1V1 2V1 1U1 2U1 P500 M500
1) 2) 3)
Status when supplied, OFF Status when supplied, ON Jumpers closed when supplied Term. 1U12U1, 1V12V1, 1W12W1 Term. 911248 Term. NS1NS2
4) 5) 6)
5) Jumper Commutating F1, F2 open when supplied reactor Terminals L1, L2 only for I/R modules 80 and 120 KW L1 L2 PE Term. 113 not available for 5 and 10 KW UI modules Line supply 2ph. 400V AC (415/480V)
6)
Signal, line contactor L1 L2 L3
3)
05.01
Line supply 3ph. 400 V AC (415/480V)
05.01
6 Infeed Modules 6.1 Function overview and settings
6.1
Function overview and settings
General information
Switch S1 is provided on the upper side of the NE and monitoring module to set the following functions (for 5 kW UI at the front panel):
ON:
Vsupply= 415 V"10 % VDC link = 625 V1)
S1
1 2 3 4
OFF:
Vsupply= 400 V"10 % VDC link = 600 V1)
Fault message Regenerative feedback off Vsupply= 480 V+6 %10 %
Ready signal Regenerative feedback on Standard, refer to switch S1.1 Controlled infeed
Squarewave current operation
( on the line current side )
Controlled infeed off Sinusoidal current operation

( on the line current side )
5 6
3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 415 V AC 3ph. 480 V AC
Standard setting
ON 1 . S1.1 . S1.4 4
ON 1 . . 4
ON 1 . . 4
Fig. 6-4
DIL switch S1
Note For a configuration for 480 V (S1.4= ON), the regenerative feedback is closed loop controlled. The setting of S1.5 is of no importance.
Notice For I/R modules, Order number: 6SN114V1VV0V0VV1 Sinusoidal operation is the basic setting. For operation with filters, which are not listed in Table 6-1 the system must be changedover to squarewave current operation, in order that the filter is not thermally overloaded. Terminal 63 (pulse enable) and/or terminal 48 (start terminal, contactor control) must be deenergized before the system is poweredup or powereddown using the main switch or a line contactor!
Switch S1.1
OFF: I/R module, Vsupply = 400 V"10 %; VDC link = 600 V UI module Vsupply = 400 V"10 %; VDC link = Vsupply1.35 Monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UI, monitoring modules) PW on = 644 V; PW off = 618 V UDC link >> = 695 V ON: I/R module Vsupply = 415 V"10 %; VDC link = 625 V UI module Vsupply = 415 V"10 %; VDC link = Usupply1.35 Monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UI, monitoring modules) PW on = 670 V; PW off = 640 V VDC link>> = 710 V PR = Pulsed resistor
1)
only possible for the I/R module, monitoring thresholds are increased for all NE modules.
6-165
05.01
Switch S1.2
OFF: Ready signal (X111 ready relay) For S1.2 = OFF, the relay pullsin if the following conditions are fulfilled: Internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1 - NS2 connected, terminal 48 enabled) Terminal 63, 64=ON (energized) No fault present (also not on FD 611 A standard, 611 U, resolver and 611 D drives or HLA modules). FD with Standard interface or resolver is enabled in the ready setting (terminals 663, 65) For 840D/810D, the NCU must have runup
ON: Fault signal (X111 ready relay) For S1.2 = ON, the relay pullsin if the following conditions have been fulfilled: Internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1 - NS2 connected, terminal 48 enabled) No fault present (also not on FD 611 A standard, 611U, resolver and 611 D drives and HLA modules). FD with Standard interface or resolver is enabled in the ready setting (terminals 663, 65) For 840D and 810D, the NCU must have runup
Switch S1.3
OFF: Standard setting, regenerative feedback active I/R modules: 16 KW to 120 KW are capable of regenerative feedback. UI module: 5 KW, 10 KW, 28 KW: The pulsed resistor in the module is effective. ON: Regenerative feedback disabled I/R modules: 16 KW to 120 KW: Regenerative feedback operation is inhibited UI module: 5 KW, 10 KW: The pulsed resistor in the module is inactive Valid for all 5 KW and 10 KW UI from Order number: 6SN11461AC000AA1. Not valid for UI 28 KW. In this case, the external pulsed resistor must be disconnected.
Switch S1.4
OFF: Standard setting for all NE modules, refer to S 1.1 ON: Vsupply = 480 V +6% / 10 %; VDC link = Vsupply1.35 for infeed operation VDC link = 700 ... 750 V in regenerative feedback operation Monitoring thresholds: (I/R, UI, monitoring modules) Pulsed resistor on = 744 V; Pulsed resistor off = 718 V VDC link>> = 795 V S1.4 overwrites the setting of S1.1
Comment: Uncontrolled operation in the infeed direction.
Warning For operation with 480 V line supplies, it is extremely important that before powering up (switching in the line supply), switch S1.4 = ON is set to ON, as otherwise the infeed circuit in the NE module will be overloaded.
6-166
05.01
Note Only in conjunction with module Order No.: 6SN114_1__0_0__1. For motors with shaft heightst100: Utilized up to max. 60 k values. Please observe the Planning Guide, Motors. S1.4 ON overwrites the functions of S1.5 and S1.1.
Switch S1.5
This function is only available in conjunction with I/R modules Order number: 6SN114_1B_0_0_A1 OFF: Standard setting, controlled infeed active ON: Uncontrolled operation in the infeed direction VDC link = Vsupply1.35
Notice: When the I/R units are operated uncontrolled, they must be derated by approx. 75 %.
Switch S1.6
OFF: Squarewave current operation (the line supply is loaded with a squarewave current) ON: This function is only available in conjunction with I/R modules Order number: 6SN114_1B_0_0_A1 Sinusoidal current operation (the line supply is loaded with sinusoidal current)
Note For sinusoidal supply, the total length of the power cables (motor feeder cable, DC link cable) may not exceed 350m, and for squarewave, they may not exceed 500m.
6-167
05.01
Sinusoidal current operation is only permissible, if the following components are used:
Table 6-1 Combination for sinusoidal current operation (regenerative feedback into the line supply) I/R 36 kW For internal cooling: 6SN1145 1BA020CA1 For external cooling: 6SN1146 1BB020CA1 HF reactor 36 kW 6SN1111 0AA000CA1 Line filter for sinusoidal current 1) 36 kW 6SN1111 0AA012CA0 I/R 55 kW For internal cooling: 6SN1145 1BA010DA1 For external cooling: 6SN1146 1BB000DA1 HF reactor 55 kW 6SN1111 0AA000DA1 Line filter for sinusoidal filter1) 55 kW 6SN1111 0AA012DA0 I/R 80 kW For internal cooling: 6SN1145 1BB000EA1 For external cooling: 6SN1146 1BB000EA1 HF reactor 80 kW 6SN1111 0AA001EA0 Line filter for sinusoidal current1) 80 kW 6SN1111 0AA012EA0 I/R 120 kW For internal cooling: 6SN1145 1BB000FA1 For external cooling: 6SN1146 1BB000FA1 HF reactor 120 kW 6SN1111 0AA001FA0 Line filter for sinusoidal current1) 120 kW 6SN1111 0AA012FA0
I/R 16 kW For internal cooling: 6SN1145 1BA010BA1 For external cooling: 6SN1146 1BB010BA1
HF reactor 16 kW 6SN1111 0AA000BA1 Line filter for sinusoidal current 1) 16 kW 6SN1111 0AA012BA0
Line supply filter packages are available for the I/R modules. These line filter packages comprise a line supply filter and an HF commutating reactor. If noncertified/authorized components are used, then it is possible that the certificate, issued for this equipment, no longer applies and that these components represent a potential hazard. Adapter sets are available to adapt the line supply filter packages to the mounting surface and to the retaining points of the previous filter modules (Order No., refer to Catalog NC 60)
Caution It is only permissible to set squarewave current operation for all of the combinations which are not listed here (discontinued filter module 6SN11 110AA010_A_). For all other operating modes, there is a danger of thermal overload.
Table 6-2 I/R I/R
Power factor
Lineside sinusoidal current operation Lineside squarewave current operation
cos 0.98 cos 0.98
cos = 0.97 cos = 0.89
UI
cos 0.87
cos = 0.67
cos : The power factor only includes the basic fundamental cos : Power factor includes the basic fundamental and harmonic components
1)
The HF commutating reactor must be externally mounted. (refer to Section 7.1.3). The line filter is required in order to achieve the CE Conformance for the radio interference voltage.
6-168
05.01
6 Infeed Modules 6.2 Power modules operated from an uncontrolled infeed
6.2
Power modules operated from an uncontrolled infeed

The drive modules can always be operated from the uncontrolled and controlled infeed modules of the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system. The configuring/ engineering and power data of this Planning Guide refers to operation with the controlled infeed/regenerative feedback modules. This data, if required, should be corrected when operated from uncontrolled infeed modules. Operation of drive modules with PH and 1FE1 motors and induction motors on the uncontrolled infeed When operating main spindle and induction drive modules from uncontrolled infeeds (UI modules), a lower maximum motor output is available in the upper speed range than when using the infeed/regenerative feedback module. For the UI module, the following interrelationship is obtained for the available continuous output as a result of the lower DC link voltage of 490 V (for line supply infeed with 3ph. 400 V AC 10%): If
VDC link < 1 1.5 x VN motor
then, the max. continuous output is given by:
VDC link Pcont. = PN x 1.5 x VN motor
VDC link = 490 for UI modules VDC link = 600 for I/R modules
6-169
6 Infeed Modules 6.2 Power modules operated from an uncontrolled infeed
05.01
Furthermore, for UI modules, it must be observed that the braking energy does not exceed the pulsed resistor rating:
S 5 kW infeed module
200 W continuous output 10 kW shorttime output for 120 ms once per 10 s switching cycle without preload condition
S Infeed module 10 kW
300 W continuous output 25 kW shorttime output for 120 ms once per 10 s switching cycle without preload condition
S Infeed module 28 kW
max. 2 x 300 W continuous output max. 2 x 25 kW shorttime output for 120 ms once per 10 s switching cycle without preload condition or max. 2 x 1.5 kW continuous output max. 2 x 25 kW shorttime output for 120 ms once per 10 s switching cycle without preload condition
For 28 kW UI, the pulsed resistors must be separately ordered and must be externally mounted. For higher regenerative feedback powers, a separate pulsed resistor module must be used or the regenerative feedback power must be reduced by using longer braking times.
6-170
05.01
6 Infeed Modules 6.3 Technical data
6.3
Table 6-3
Technical data
Technical data, I/R modules 6SN 1145 6SN 1146 6SN 1145 1BA0.0BA1 1BB0.0BA1 1BA0.0CA1 1BB0.0CA1 1BA0.0DA1 1BB0.0DA1 1BB0.0DA1 1BB0.0EA1 1BB0.0EA1 1BB0.0EA1 1BB0.0FA1 1BB0.0FA1 1BB0.0FA1
Internal cooling External cooling Hose cooling Infeed: Rated power (S1) Infeed power (S640%) Infeed peak power Regenerative feedback: Continuous regenerative feedback power Regenerative feedback peak power Connection data Voltage Frequency Rated current (400V/480V) Input current at 360 VAC Input current for (480V; S640%) Peak current (400V/480V) Connection cross section, max. Output voltage Output current at 600 VDC Rated current Output current (480V; S640%) Peak current Module width Cooling type Internal cooling External cooling Hose cooling
KW KW KW KW KW
16 21 35 16 35
36 47 70 36 70
55 71 91 55 91
80 104 131 80 131
120 156 175 120 175
V Hz A A A A mm2 V
3ph. 400 V AC 10 % to 3ph. 480 V AC +6 % 50 to 60 10 % 27/22.5 30 29.6 59/49.2 16 600 / 625 / 680 60.5/50.4 67.3 65.8 117.5/97.9 50 92.5/77.1 103 99.2 153/127.5 95 134/111.7 149 145.8 220/183.3 95 202/168.3 224.5 218.3 294/245 150
A A A mm
22.1 29.2 48.3 100 Internal separately driven fan Integrated separately driven fan
50 65 96.7 200 Internal separately driven fan Integrated separately driven fan 585 50/535 0.975 15.5 15.5
75.8 98.3 125.8 300
110.8 144.2 181.7 300
166.7 216.7 242.5 300 Mounted fan
Internal sepa- Mounted fan ratelydriven fan
Fan assembly and mounted fan required Kit for hosing cooling with fan 745 115/630 115/630 0.977 26 26 26 1280 190/1090 190/1090 0.977 26 26 26 1950 290/1660 290/1660 0.978 29 29 29
Cooling type Internal cooling External cooling Hose cooling Efficiency Weights Internal cooling External cooling Hose cooling
W W (int./ext.) W (int./ext.)
320 50/270 0.97
kg kg kg
10.5 10.5
6-171
05.01
Table 6-4
Technical data, UI modules 6SN 1145 6SN 1146 6SN 1145 KW KW KW KW 5 6.5 10 0.2/10 1AA0.0AA1 10 13 25 0.3/25 1AA0.0CA0 1AB0.0CA0 28 36 50 1AA0.0CA0 1AB0.0CA0
Internal cooling External cooling Hose cooling Infeed: Rated power (S1) Infeed power (S640%) Infeed peak power Continuous/peak power of the integrated pulsed resistor Connection data: Voltage Frequency Rated current Input current for 360 VAC Peak current Connection crosssection, max. Output voltage Output current for 650 VDC Rated current Output current (S640%) Peak current Module width Cooling type Internal cooling External cooling Hose cooling Cooling type Internal cooling External cooling Hose cooling Efficiency Weights Internal cooling External cooling Hose cooling
V Hz A A A mm2 V
3ph. 400 V AC 10 % up to 3ph. 480 V AC +6 % 50 to 60 10 % 9.4 12.3 18.8 6 490 to 680 +6 % 18.2 23.8 38.8 16 48.8 62.5 87.1 50
A A A mm
7.8 10 15.5 50 Nonventilated Nonventilated
15.4 20 38.8 100 Universal cooling internal/external
43.3 55.8 77.5 200 Internal separately driven fan Integrated separately driven fan 745 90/160 0.985 15.5 15.5
W W (int./ext.) W (int./ext.)
270 270/ 0.985
450 119/331 0.985 9.5 9.5
kg kg kg
6.5 6.5
6-172
05.01
6.3.1
Technical data, line supply infeed modules
Supply voltage and frequency

Table 6-5 Supply voltage and frequency S1, S4 = OFF Vn = 3ph. 400 V AC NE modules up to Pn v 55 kW I/R modules Pn = 80/120 kW Power connection: U1, V1, W1 Coil connection: L1, L2 only for 80 kW and 120 kW 3ph. 360...440 V AC 3ph. 300...360 V AC 1) 45...65 Hz S1 = ON Vn = 3ph. 415 V AC 3ph. 373...457 V AC 3ph. 312...373 V AC 1) 45...65 Hz S4 = ON Vn = 3ph. 480 V AC 3ph. 432...509 V AC 3ph. 408...432 V AC 1) 55...65 Hz
2ph. 360...457 V AC / 45...53 Hz 2ph. 400...510 V AC / 57...65 Hz
6
No ground fault
The cabinet wiring, the motor/encoder feeder cables and the DC link connections should be checked to ensure that there are no ground faults before the equipment is poweredup for the first time.
Nominal load duty cycles for NE modules

P Pmax Ps6 Pn 0.4 Pn 4 min 10 min S6 load duty cycle with preloading condition P Pmax Pn 0.2 s t 10 s Peak output duty cycle with preloading condition 10 s Peak output duty cycle without preloading condition F: F=1.6 applies for all NE modules up to Pn 80 kW F=1.4 applies for Pn=120 kW FPn Pn 4s P t 60 s Peak output duty cycle with preloading condition P Pmax Ps6 Pn 0.4 Pn t
10 s
Fig. 6-5
Nominal load duty cycles for NE modules
6-173
05.01
The following rule of thumb is valid:
The following applies for load duty cycles with a period duration T 10 s:
1 T
P(t) Pn
dt
<
1.03;
Pn < P(t) Pmax; t [0, T ]
The following applies for load duty cycles with a period duration 10 s < T 1 min:
1 T
P(t) Pn
dt
<
0.90;
Pn < P(t) Pmax; t [0, T ]
The following applies for load duty cycles with a period duration 1 min < T 10 min:
1 T
P(t) Pn
dt
<
0.89; Pn < P(t) Pmax;
[0, T ]
6
Derating dependent on the installation altitude
P(t) = the power presently drawn
All of the specified outputs are valid up to 1000 m above sea level. For an installation altitude > 1000 m, the specified outputs should be reduced according to the diagrams below. For installation altitudes > 2000 m1) an isolating transformer must be used.
XH 100 % 80 % 60 % 40 % 20 % 0% 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 Installation altitude (m)
Pn height = xHPn1000 m/100 % Pn height = xHPs61000 m/100 % Pmax height = xHPmax1000 m/100 %
Fig. 6-6
Derating depends on the installation altitude
Caution: Pn, Ps6 and Pmax must be derated in the same way. Note For the UI module, it must be observed that the braking energy applied to the braking resistor does not exceed the rating of the pulsed resistor. A defect does not occur, the resistor is switchedout when an overload condition develops. The unit goes into a fault condition with the DC link overvoltage fault.
6-174
05.01
6.3.2
Technical data of the supplementary components
Cooling components
Components Component Order No. 6SN1162 0BA02 0AAV 6SN1162 0BA030AAV Supply voltage Supply current Observe phase sequence! Direction of rotation refer to the arrow on the fan Ccw direction of rot. when viewing the rotor Degr. of protection IP 44 Weight [kg] 4
Mounted fan for internal and external cooling Hose cooling package for an individual module comprising: 2x module connecting flange, hose 2000 mm 1x cabinet connecting flange 1x radial fan with cabinet connecting flange1) (refer to Fig. 2-4) Hose cooling package for 2tier configuration of I/R 55 kW and PM 85 A comprising: 4x module connecting flange, hose 2000 mm 1x cabinet connecting flange 1x radial fan with cabinet connecting flange1) (refer to Fig. 2-4) Motor protection circuit breaker
3ph. 360 to 0.2 A to 0.3 A 510 VAC 45 to 65 Hz 3ph. 360 to 1.0 A +20% 457 VAC 47.5 to 62.5 Hz
IP 54
6
6SN1162 0BA030CAV 3ph. 360 to 1.0 A +20% 457 VAC 47.5 to 62.5 Hz Ccw direction of rot. when viewing the rotor IP 54 8
Size S00: Setting value 0.3 A Setting value 1 A Quantity S0 Setting value 0.3 A Setting value 1 A
3RV10110DA10 0.220.32 A 3RV10110KA10 0.91.25 A
3RV10210DA10 0.220.32 A 3RV10110KA10 0.91.25 A Required for UI and pulsedresistor modules when the pulsed resistor is utilized to its maximum ( > 200 W ) (refer to Section 13, dimension drawings)
Hot air deflection plate
6SN1162 0BA010AA0
1)
Replacement filter element:
Order No. 8MR 11910A0 Ordering location: Pfannenberg GmbH Postfach 80747 21007 Hamburg
Warning The fan may only be commissioned, if it is electrically connected with the module housing (the PE of the fan is connected via the module housing).
6-175
05.01
Caution Cooling is not guaranteed when the fan rotates in the incorrect direction (refer to arrow)!
Connection for threephase fan

L1 L2 L3 PE
Observe phase sequence!

To additional fans Q
6
I/R
U1 V1 1 W
Motor protection circuitbreaker Q does not belong to the scope of supply
M Fan
In 1.5 A
Fig. 6-7
Connection for threephase fan
6-176
05.01
6 Infeed Modules 6.4 Interface overview
6.4
Interface overview
Note Only PELF or SELF voltages may be connected (refer to EN 602041 Section 6.4). Order Nos. for the coding connector, refer to Catalog NC60. Only PELV circuits may be connected to terminal 19.
6.4.1
Interface overview, NE modules

The interface description is valid for all NE modules with the exception of the 5 kW UI module; this interface has its own description (refer to Section 6.4.2).
Table 6-6 Term. No. U1 V1 W1 L1 L2 PE P600 M600
Interface description for NE modules Desig. Function Supply connection Type

1)
Max. cross section

10)
Terminals available in3)
Refer to Section 4.2 16 mm2/10 mm2 4) 16 mm2/10 mm2 4) Bolt Busbar Busbar Busbar
I/R, UI
Contactor supply
I I I I/O I/O I/O
2ph. 400 V AC, directly from the supply L1, L2, L3, refer to Sect. 9.2 0V +300 V 300 V 300 V
I/R 80 kW, 120 kW I/R, UI, monitoring module, pulsed resistor I/R, UI
Protective conductor DC link DC link Grounding bar5)
P600 M600 1R, TR1, 2R, TR29) 3R X131
DC link DC link External resistance connection Electronics M
I/O I/O I/O
+300 V 300 V V300
16 mm2/10 mm2 4) 16 mm2/10 mm2 4) 6 mm2/4 mm2 4)
Monitoring module 11) Pulsed resistor; UI 28 kW I/R, UI, monitoring module
I/O
0V
16 mm2/10 mm2 4)
________ 1) I = input; O = output; NC = NC contact; NO = NO contact; (for signal, NO = high; NC = low) 2) Terminal 19 is the reference ground (connected in the module with 10 kW to a general reference ground, X131/terminal 15) Terminal 15 may neither be connected to PE nor to terminal 19, furthermore, it is not permissible that external voltage sources are connected to terminal 15. Terminal 19 may be connected to terminal X131. The terminal may only be used to enable the associated drive group. 3) I/R = Infeed/regenerative feedback module; UI = Uncontrolled infeed; MM = Monitoring module; PW = Pulse resistor module 4) The 1st number is valid for cable lugs. The 2nd number is valid for finelystranded conductors without conn. sleeves. 5) The grounding bar is used to ground the DC link M rail through 100 k (this should be preferably inserted; if the system is subject to a high voltage test, the grounding bar should be opened). 6) RESET = reset the fault memory, edgetriggered for the complete drive group (terminal R ! terminal 15 = RESET) 7) Terminal 111213 positivelydriven NC contact (for I/R 16 kW and UI 10 kW, only from Order No. [MLFB]: 6SN114V1VV010VVV) Terminals 111113 NO contact, not positively driven 8) Maximum current load of terminal 9 with respect to 19: 0.5 A. 9) Only for UI 28 kW 10) For UL certification, only use copper cables designed for an operating temperature of w 60C 11) Max. permissible connection power Pmax v 43 kW Max. permissible current load Imax v 72 A
6-177
05.01
Table 6-6 Term. No.
Interface description for NE modules Desig. X151 Function Equipment bus Type
1)
Typ. voltage/ limit values Various
Max. cross section

10)
Terminals available in3) I/R, UI, monitoring module, pulsed resistor
I/O
Ribbon cable
M500 P500 1U1 2U1 1V1 2V1 1W1 2W1 7 45 44 10 152) R6) 5.3 5.2 5.1 632) 92)8) 92)8) 642) 19 74 nc 73.2 73.1 nc 72 92)8) 1122)
X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X141 X141 X141 X141 X141 X141 X121 X121 X121 X121 X121 X121 X121
DC link power supply DC link power supply Output L1 Input L1 Output L2 Input L2 Output L3 Input L3 P24 P15 N15 N24 M RESET Relay contact Group signal I2t/motor temp. Pulse enable Enable voltage Enable voltage Drive enable Enable voltage, reference potential
I I O I O I O I O O O O O I NC NO I I O O I
DC 300 V DC +300 V 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC +20.4...28.8 V/50 mA +15 V/10 mA 15 V/10 mA 20.4...28.8 V/50 mA 0V Term.15/RE = 10 k 50 V DC/0.5 A/12 VA max 5 V DC/3 mA min +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +24 V +24 V +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k 0V
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
I/R, UI, monitoring module
X111 X111 X111 X111 X111 X111 X161 X161
NC Relay contact Ready signal I I NO Enable voltage Settingup mode/ Standard mode O I +24 V +21 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k
1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/2 Amax. 5 V DC/3 mA min
6-178
05.01
Table 6-6 Term. No. 482) 1117) 2137) 1137)
Interface description for NE modules Desig. X161 X161 X161 X161 Function Contactor control Signaling contacts Line contactor Signaling contact Start inhibit (terminal 112) Coil contact for line, precharging contactor Enable voltage, reference potential Control contact for fast discharge Type
1)
Typ. voltage/ limit values +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +30 V/1 A (111113) 1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/ 2 A max 17 V DC/3 mA min 250 V AC / 1 A / 50 V DC/ 2A max 5 V DC/10 mA min +24 V
Max. cross section

10)
Terminals available in3)
I I NC NO I NC O I O I
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
I/R, UI
AS1 X172 AS2 X172 NS1 X171 NS2 X171 19 X221 50 X221
1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
I/R
I/R, UI
0V 0V
Pulsed resistor
Warning In order to prevent damage to the infeed circuit of the NE modules, when energizing terminal 50 at X221 (DC link fast discharge), ensure that terminal 48 of the NE module is deenergized (electrically isolated from the line supply). The checkback signal contacts of the main contactor of the NE module must be evaluated (X161 terminal 111, terminal 113, terminal 213).
6-179
05.01
6.4.2
Table 6-7 Term. No.
Interface overview, 5 kW UI module

Interface overview, 5 kW UI module Desig. Function Supply connection Type
1)
Typ. voltage/limit values 3ph. 400 V AC
Max. crosssection 6) 4 mm2 finely stranded without end sleeves 6 mm2 with cable lug M5 thread M4 thread 34core ribbon cable Busbar Busbar 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
U1 X1 V1 W1 PE X131 X351
Protective conductor Electronics M Equipment bus Grounding bar 3)
I I I/O I/O I/O I I O I O I O I NC NO I NC I I NO I O O I I O
0V 0V Various 300 V +300 V 300 V 300 V +300 V 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 400 V AC 50 V DC/0.5 A/12 VA max 5 V DC/3 mA min
P600 M600
DC link X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X181 X121A X121A X121A X121A X121B X121B X121B X121B X141AX 141A X141A X141A X141A X141A DC link power supply DC link power supply Output L1 Input L1 Output L2 Input L2 Output L3 Input L3 Relay contact group signal I2t/motor temp. Relay signal Ready/fault
M500 P500 1U1 2U1 1V1 2V1 1W1 2W1 5.3 5.2 5.1 nc 74 73.2 73.1 72 632) 92)4) 92)4) 642) R5) 19
1AC 250 V/DC 50 V/2 A max 1DC 5 V/3 mA min +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +24 V +24 V +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k term.19/RE = 10 k
Pulse enable FR+ FR+ Drive enable RESET FR, reference ground enable voltage
_________
1) 2) I = input; O = output; NC = NC contact; NO = NO contact Terminal 19 is the reference terminal (connected in the module to 10 kW to general reference ground X131) Terminal 15 may neither be connected to PE nor to terminal 19, furthermore, it is not permissible that external voltage sources are connected to terminal 15. Terminal 19 may be connected to terminal X131. The terminal may only be used to enable the associated drive group. The grounding bar is used to ground the DC link M rail through 100 k (this should be preferably inserted; if the system is subject to a highvoltage test, the grounding bar should be opened). Max. current load of terminal 9 - terminal 19 1 A Notice: UI 5 kW does not have terminals 7, 45, 44 and 10. RESET = Reset the fault memory, edge triggered for the complete drive group (term. R ! term. 19 = RESET) For UL certification, only use copper cables designed for an operating temperature of w 60C
3) 4) 5) 6)
6-180
05.01
Table 6-7 Term. No.
Interface overview, 5 kW UI module Desig. Function Signaling contact Line contactor FR+ Settingup/normal operation contactor control Coil contact for line, precharging contactor M Type
1)
Typ. voltage/limit values 1ph. 250 V AC/50 V DC/2 A 17 V DC/3 mA min +24 V +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +13 V...30 V/RE = 1.5 k +24 V 0/+24 V 0V
Max. crosssection 6) 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2 1.5 mm2
111 X161 213 X161 92)4) 112 48 NS1 NS2 15 1) 2) X141B X141B X141B X141B X141B X141B
I NC O I I O I O
_________
I = input; O = output; NC = NC contact; NO = NO contact Terminal 19 is the reference terminal (connected in the module to 10 kW to general reference ground X131) Terminal 15 may neither be connected to PE nor to terminal 19, furthermore, it is not permissible that external voltage sources are connected to terminal 15. Terminal 19 may be connected to terminal X131. The terminal may only be used to enable the associated drive group. The grounding bar is used to ground the DC link M rail through 100 k (this should be preferably inserted; if the system is subject to a highvoltage test, the grounding bar should be opened). Max. current load of terminal 9 - terminal 19 1 A Notice: UI 5 kW does not have terminals 7, 45, 44 and 10. RESET = Reset the fault memory, edge triggered for the complete drive group (term. R ! term. 19 = RESET) For UL certification, only use copper cables designed for an operating temperature of w 60C
3) 4) 5) 6)
Notice: UI kW does not have terminals 7, 45, 44 and 10.
Note For UI 5 kW, the DC link is precharged via two phases. If a DC link voltage is not established (there is no ready signal) even if all of the enable signals are present, then a check must be made as to whether all of the three phases are present at terminals U1, V1, W1.
6-181
6 Infeed Modules 6.5 Monitoring module
05.01
6.5
6.5.1
Monitoring module
System integration
The monitoring module includes the electronics power supply and the central monitoring functions which are required to operate the drive modules. A monitoring module is required if the power supply rating of the NE module is not sufficient for the equipment group.
6-182
05.01
Changeover switch, parameter monitoring module
Ready signal X111
Enable signals and group signal I2t X121
Power supplies for external use
X141
Settingup operation signal LED displays
X161
X351 X181 Line supply connections Electronics power supply P500/M500 P600 Equipment bus
DC link busbar M600
DC link terminals P600 M600 X131 PE1
Fig. 6-8
Monitoring module 6SN11121AC010AA1
6-183
05.01
6.5.2
Mode of operation
Parameters critical for operation are monitored in the monitoring module, for example:
S DC link voltage S Controller power supply (15 V) S 5 V voltage level

If these parameters are in the permissible operating range, then the internal prerequisites are provided for the equipment ready signal. The group of modules is enabled at the monitoring module as soon as the external enable signals have been made available via terminals 63 (pulse enable) and 64 (drive enable). The sum signal controls the ready relay and can be taken, floating, via terminals 72/73.2 and 73.1/74. The load capability of the contacts is 250 V AC/1 A or 30 V DC/1 A.
The signal statuses of the monitoring circuits are displayed using LEDs on the front panel of the monitoring module
LED display Electronics power red supply faulted Equipment not ready, external enable signals green missing red Free Red Yellow Red 5 V voltage level faulted Equipment ready (DC link precharged) Overvoltage, DC link
Fig. 6-9
LED display of the monitoring module
6-184
Fig. 6-10 Block diagram, monitoring module

DIL switch
72
05.01
Drive enable Ready/ fault signal I2t prealarm and motor overtemperature
FR+ 73.1 73.2 74 5.3 5.1 5.2 64 9
Pulse enable
Reset
Terminal 112 settingup operation 3)
START
P24 P15 9 63 7 45 N15 44 N24 10 M 15 15 R 9 112 FR 19
Equipment bus
S1 1
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
X151 Setting, refer to Section 6

Power supply and signals
Moni toring
Electronics power supply

NS 1 X131 Equipment enable A B Vact
Switches S1.3/1.5/1.6 have no function
DC link sensing
P600
M600
Line supply rectification and synchronization
X131
PE1 P600 M600 1W1 2W1 1V1 2V1 1U1 2W1 P500 M500
1) 2) 3)
Condition when supplied, OFF Condition when supplied, ON Jumpers closed when supplied Term. 1U12U1, 1V12V1, 1W12W1 Term. 9112
3)
L1 PE
L2
L3
6-185
05.01
6.5.3
Technical data (supplements the general technical data)

Table 6-8 Power loss Alternative, rated supply voltage DC link Cooling type Weight Technical data, monitoring module 70 W 600/625/690 V DC Nonventilated 4 kg
6.5.4
Checking the permissible power supply rating

The infeed or monitoring module used offers a basic equipping of the electronics (EP values) and gating power supply (AP values). The power supply requirement of a drive group is determined using Table 6-12. The number of all of the modules used should be entered. It is the product of assessment factor, individual module and number of modules. If one of these values is exceeded, then an (additional) monitoring module must be provided. In this case, Table 6-12 must be reapplied for the module group, which is supplied from the monitoring module. The monitoring module must be located to the left in front of the modules to be monitored.
6-186
05.01
Table 6-9 SIMODRIVE 6SN11 power modules, type
Planning table for drive modules with analog setpoint interface
Assessment factors
FD closedloop control, analog
MSD closed loop control, analog

2 axis standard interface 6SN1118 0BJ11 Resolver control 0AE11 0BK11 Resolver control 6SN1121 0BA11
IM closed loop control, analog
DC link capaci tance
1 axis user-friendly interface 6SN1118 0AA11 without MSD option 0AA11 with MSD option
1 axis standard interface 6SN1118 0AD11
6SN1122 0BA11
6
75 75 110 330 495 990 990 2145 2145 4290 2145
1-axis version
6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0HA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0AA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0BA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0CA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0DA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0LA1
2)
EP 1 AP 0.5 EP 1 AP 0.5 EP 1 AP 0.5 EP 1 AP 0.5 EP 1 AP 0.5
EP 1.5 AP 0.5 EP 1.5 AP 0.5 EP 1.5 AP 0.5 EP 1.5 AP 0.5 EP 1.5 AP 0.5
EP 1.2 AP 0.5 EP 1.2 AP 0.5 EP 1.2 AP 0.5 EP 1.2 AP 0.5 EP 1.2 AP 0.5 EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1 AP 1.5
EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1.75 AP 1.5 EP 1.5 AP 1.75 EP 1.5 AP 1.75 EP 1.25 AP 1.5
6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0EA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA01 - 0FA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0JA1

1) 2)
EP 1 AP 0.5 EP 1.75 AP 0.5
EP 1.5 AP 0.5 EP 2.25 AP 0.5
EP 1 AP 0.5 EP 1.75 AP 0.5
EP 1 AP 1.5 EP 1.75 AP 1.5 EP 1.5 AP 1.75 EP 1.5 AP 1.75
6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0KA1

1) 2)
6SN11 23 - 1AA02 - 0FA1

1)
EP 1.5 AP 0.5
EP 2 AP 0.5
EP 1.5 AP 0.5 EP 1.5 AP 1 EP 1.5 AP 1 EP 1.5 AP 1 EP 1.5 AP 1 EP 2 AP 1 EP 2 AP 1 EP 2 AP 1 EP 2 AP 1
EP 1.25 AP 1.5
2-axis version
6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0HA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0AA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0BA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0CA1 Assessment factors for individual modules for the electronics area (EP) and gating area (AP) as well as permissible combinations of power modules and control modules (analog). Only combinations are permissible with entered EP and AP values. 150 150 220 660
The data regarding the assessment factors EP and AP refer to the encoder cable lengths which have been released. Enter the values into Table 6 12.
6-187
05.01
Table 6-10 SIMODRIVE 6SN11 power modules modules, type
Configuring table for drive modules with SIMODRIVE 611 universal
Assessment factors
SIMODRIVE 611 universal E
6SN1118 .NJ00 .NK00 .NH00
6SN1118 .NH10
1-axis version
1-axis version 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0HA1 1-axis version

6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0AA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0BA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0CA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0DA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0LA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0EA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA01 - 0FA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0JA1 1) 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0KA1
1)
EP 1.1 AP 1.7 EP 1.1 AP 1.7 EP 1.1 AP 1.7 EP 1.1 AP 1.7 EP 1.2 AP 1.7 EP 1.7 AP 1.8 EP 2.7 AP 1.8 EP 2.7 AP 1.9 EP 1.3 AP 1.9 EP 1.4 AP 1.9 EP 1.3 AP 1.9 EP 1.3 AP 2.1 EP 1.4 AP 2.1 EP 1.6 AP 2.1 EP 1.7 AP 2.1
75 75 110 330 495 990 990 2145 2145 4290 2145
6SN11 23 - 1AA02 - 0FA1 1)
2axis version 1axis version 6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0HA1

6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0AA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0BA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0CA1
150 150 220 660
Assessment factors for individual modules in the electronics area (EP) and gating area (AP) as well as a permissible combination of power modules and control modules (analog). Only the combinations are permissible with entered EP and AP values. The data on the assessment factors EP and AP refer to encoder cable lengths which have been released. Enter the values into Table 6 12.
SIMODRIVE 611 universal with options PROFIBUS DP When using the option, in addition, 0.6 gating points must be added. Terminal module In this case, no additional electronics/gating points have to be taken into account. SIMODRIVE 611 universal/universal E with options Absolute value encoder with EnDat When using EnDat absolute value encoders, for each encoder, and additional 0.4 EP (electronic points) must be added.
1) With mounted fan or hose cooling.
6-188
05.01
Table 6-11 SIMODRIVE 6SN11 power modules, type
Configuring table for drive modules with digital interface
Assessment factors
Control module, digital

1-axis version Performance control 6SN1118 0DG21 for FD/ MSD for motor encoder 0DG22 for FD/MSD 1 additional input for current signals 0DG23 for FD/MSD 1 additional input for voltage si gnal 2-axis version Performance control 6SN1118 0DH21 for FD for motor encoder 0DH22 for FD 2 additional inputs for current signals 0DH23 for FD 2 additional inputs for voltage signals 2-axis version Standard 2 control 6SN1118 0DM21 for FD/ MSD3) for motor en coders 0DM23 for FD/ MSD3) 2 additional inputs for voltage signals
F 75 75 110 330 495 990 990 2145 2145 4290 2145
1axis version
6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0HA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0AA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0BA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0CA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0DA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0LA1
2)
EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1.75 AP 1.85 EP 1.5 AP 2.1 EP 1.5 AP 2.1 EP 1 AP 1.85
EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2
EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1.75 AP 1.85 EP 1.5 AP 1.85 EP 1.5 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 1.85 EP 1 AP 2.8 EP 1 AP 2.8 EP 1 AP 2.8 EP 1 AP 2.8 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 2.8 EP 1 AP 2.8 EP 1 AP 2.8 EP 1 AP 2.8
EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1.75 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4 EP 1 AP 3.4
6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0EA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA01 - 0FA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0JA1 1)

2)
EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1.75 AP 2.2
EP 1 AP 2.2 EP 1.75 AP 2.2 EP 1.5 AP 2.45 EP 1.5 AP 2.45
6SN11 2 . - 1AA00 - 0KA1

1) 2)
6SN11 23 - 1AA02 - 0FA1

1)
2axis version
6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0HA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0AA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0BA1 6SN11 2 . - 1AB00 - 0CA1
EP 1 AP 2.2
EP 1 AP 2.2
150 150 220 660
Assessment factors for individual modules in the electronics area (EP) and gating area (AP) as well as a permissible combinations of power modules and control modules (digital). Only the combinations are permissible with entered EP and AP values. The data on the assessment factors EP and AP refer to encoder cable lengths which have been released. Enter the values into Table 6 12.
Absolute value encoder with EnDat interface Performance control When using absolute value encoders with EnDat interface, in con junction with Performance control modules, for each coder, an additional 0.5 EP (electronic points) must be taken into account in the electronics area. Standard 2 control When using absolute value encoders with EnDat interface in con junction with the standard 2 control modules, for each encoder, an additional 0.5 EP (electronic points) should be taken into account in the electronics area.
1) With mounted fan or hose cooling. 2) Only for drive modules with main spindle control. 3) MSD is only permissible for 1-axis operation.
6-189
05.01
Table 6-12
Designation
Configuring sheet to calculate the DC link power Pz

Electronics area (EP) Assessment factor, individual module Num ber of modu les Pro duct Gating area (AP) Assessment factor, individual module Num ber of modu les Pro duct DC link capacitance Num ber of modu les Pro duct
SIMODRIVE 611 Infeed uncontrolled infeed/regenerative feedback module
5 kW/10 kW 10 kW/25 kW 28 kW/50 kW 16 kW/21 kW 36 kW/47 kW 55 kW/71 kW 80 kW/131 kW 120 kW/175 kW
0.3 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1 0 0.2 2 1.5 2)
1 =
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.75 0.75 0
1 =
150 440 990 495 990 2145 2145 4290 1000 1)
1 =
Monitoring module
= =
Pulsed resistor module HGL module HLA module Power module with control module for FD (values from the tables 6 9 or )
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
0.1 0 1.5
75 0
= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
0 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = =
Power module with control module for MSD/IM (Values from Tables 6 9 or ) Power module with SIMODRIVE 611 universal (values from Table 2.2)
SINUMERIK 810D 3) including integrated power modules CCU box 3LT with CCU 1 or CCU 2 CCU box 2LT with CCU 1 or CCU 2 SINUMERIK 840D with NCU 561.2 NCU 571.2 NCU 572.3 NCU 573.3 NCU 573.2 4) Digitizing unit 6FC5 6FC5 6FC5 6FC5 6FC5 356 357 357 357 357 0BB11 0BB11 0BB22 0BB33 0BB31 0AE0 0AE0 0AE0 0AE2 0AE0
2 2
= =
4.5 4.5
= =
660 220 0
1 1 1 2.3 2.3 1 Sum, area electronics max. value 8
= = = = = = EP
3.8 3.8 3.8 5 (5.4) 5) 5 1.5 Sum, area, gating max. value 17 Max. value 7
= = = = = = AP 0 Sum of the DC link capacitances
Max. value 3.5 (3) The following applies for the uncontrolled 5 kW infeed: Max. 3.5 electronic points and max. 7 gating points. However, with control modules 6SN1118 0AA11 0AA0 max. 3 electronics points.
1) For regenerative feedback, only 75 F is effective. This must be taken into account when dimensioning the pulsed-resistor modules, if the monitoring module is connected to the DC link. 2) When using both axes with absolute value encoder, 2 electronic points should be taken into account.
3) An additional 0.3 gating points must be taken into account for each connected absolute value encoder with EnDat interface. 4) NCU for digitizing. 5) Value of 5.4 is valid for NCU 573.3 with link module
6-190
05.01
6 Infeed Modules 6.6 DC link options
6.6
6.6.1
DC link options
Capacitor module with 4.1 mF or 20 mF
Description
The capacitor modules are used to increase the DC capacitance. In this case, a brief power failure can be buffered and it is also possible to buffer the braking energy. The modules differ as follows:
S Module with 4.1 mF > used as dynamic energy storage device S Module with 20 mF > used to buffer power failures
The capacitor modules have a ready display which is lit above a DC link voltage of approx. 300 V. This also means that an internal fuse failure can be detected. However, this does not reliably monitor the charge condition. The 4.1 mF module does not have a precharging circuit, which means that it can directly absorb the energy during dynamic braking operations as it is directly connected to the DC link which also means that it can operate as dynamic energy storage device. For these modules, the charge limits of the line supply modules must be taken into account. For 20 mF modules, precharging is realized through an internal series resistor in order to limit the charge current and to decouple the module from the central precharging. This module cannot absorb any energy generated from dynamic switching operation, as the series resistor limits the charging current. During power failures, a diode couples this capacitor battery to the system DC link which it then supports.
Note The capacitor modules may only be used in conjunction with SIMODRIVE 611 line supply infeed modules. The modules are suitable for internal and external cooling.
6-191
05.01
LED READY Ready display is lit above VDC link > 300 V
Capacitor module
6
Equipment bus (the equipment bus cable is included in the scope of supply) P600 VDC link M600
Width = 100 mm or Width = 300 mm
PE
Fig. 6-11
Capacitor modules
6-192
05.01
Technical data
The following technical data apply:

Table 6-13 Desig. 4.1 mF Order number Voltage range Storage capacity w = 1/2 x C x U2 6SN1 1121AB000BA0 V 350 to 750 V DC VDC steadystate (examples) 600 V > 738 Ws 680 V > 948 Ws VDC steadystate (examples) 600 V > 3 215 Ws 680 V > 4 129 Ws Note: The voltage at the capacitors is only approx. 0.94 x VDC as a result of the internal precharging resistor. Technical data of the capacitor modules Module 20 mF 6SN1 1121AB000CA0
Temperature range Weight Dimensions
0 _C to +55 _C approx. 7.5 kg WxHxD 100 x 480 x 211 [mm] approx. 21.5 kg WxHxD 300 x 480 x 211 [mm]
Calculation examples
The energy storage capacity in dynamic operation and for regenerative braking is calculated as follows: Formula: w = x C x (V2DC link max V2DC link n)
Assumptions for the example: Capacitance of the capacitor battery DC link voltage, nominal value Max. DC link voltage C = 4.1 mF VDC link n = 600 V VDC link max = 695 V
> w = x 4.1 x 103 F x ((695 V)2 (600 V)2) = 252 Ws The following applies for the energy storage capacity of the capacitor batteries and power failure: Formula: w = x C x (V2DC link n V2DC link min)
Assumptions for the example: Capacitance of capacitor battery DC link voltage, nominal value DC link voltage, min. C = 20 mF VDC link n = 600 V VDC link min = 350 V
> w = x 20 x 103 F x ((567 V)2 (350 V)2) = 1990 Ws For a DC link voltage of 680 V, the energy storage capacity increases to 2904 Ws.
Notice VDC link min must y be 350 V. For voltages below 350 V, the switchedmode power supply for the electronics shutsoff.
6-193
05.01
Possible buffer time t is calculated as follows with the output DC link power PDC link: t = w / PDC link Dynamic energy The DC link capacitors can be seen as battery. The capacitor module increases the capacitance and the energy storage capability. The energy flow must be determined in order to evaluate the capacitance required for a special requirement. The energy flow depends on the following:
S All moved masses and moments of inertia S Velocity, speed (or its change, acceleration, deceleration) S Efficiencies: Mechanical system, gearboxes, motor, inverter (motoring/
braking)
S Buffer time, buffering S DC link voltage and the permissible change, output value, upper/lower
value. Often, in practice, there is no precise data regarding the mechanical system. If the mechanical system data was determined by making approximate calculations or estimated values, the adequate capacitance of the DC link capacitors can only be determined by making the appropriate tests when the system is commissioned. The energy required for dynamic operations is obtained as follows: The following applies when a drive brakes or accelerates from one speed/ velocity to another within time tV: w = x P x tV For rotating drives with MMot x (nMot max n Mot min) P = x G 9 550 For linear drives with P= FMot x (VMot max VMot min) x 103 x G with G: Braking Acceleration G= M x WR G = 1/(M x WR)
w [Ws] P [kW] tV [s] MMot [Nm] FMot [N] nMot max [RPM]
Energy Motor output Duration of the operation Max. motor torque when either accelerating or braking Max. motor force when either braking or accelerating Max. speed at the start or end of the operation
6-194
05.01
nMot min [RPM] vMot max [m/s] vMot min [m/s] G M WR
Max. speed at the start or end of the operation Max. velocity at the start or end of the operation Min. velocity at the start or end of the operation Efficiency, total Efficiency, motor Efficiency, inverter
The torque M and force F, depend on the moved masses, the load and the acceleration in the system. If there is no precise data for the mentioned factors, then generally, nominal data are used.
Configuring information
The capacitor module should be preferably located at the righthand end of the system group. It is connected via the DC link busbar.
Module with 20 mF (width: 300 mm) I/R LT LT
100 Module with 4.1 mF (width: 100 mm) Fig. 6-12 Mounting location of the capacitor module
Several capacitor modules can be connected in parallel depending on the line supply infeed used. For 4.1 mF capacitor modules, the total charging limits of the line supply infeed may not be exceeded (refer to Catalog NC 60, Section 10).
Table 6-14 Max. number of capacitor modules Infeed unit UI 5 kW Capacitor modules which can be connected None Monitoring module without UI 10 kW I/R 16 kW UI 28 kW I/R 36120 kW Module 4.1 mF Module 20 mF Module 4.1 mF Module 20 mF 1 3 4 3 1 1 1 4 1 w2 1 0 4 0
6-195
05.01
Charging times, discharging times, discharge voltage
It should be checked that the DC link is in a novoltage condition before carrying out any commissioning or service work.
Table 6-15 Capacitor module 4.1 mF 20 mF Charging/discharging times, discharge voltage Charging time for each module As for the power modules Approx. 2 min Discharging time for each module to 60 V of the DC link voltage at 750 V DC Approx. 30 min Approx. 40 min
If the system has a pulsed resistor, the DC link can be quickly discharged via terminals X221:19 and 50 (jumpers) after opening terminal 48 to reduce the discharge time.
Warning The pulsed resistor modules can only convert a specific amount of energy into heat (refer to Table 6-17). The energy available to be converted depends on the voltage.
Caution In order to prevent damage to the infeed circuit of the NE modules, when energizing terminal X221, terminal 19/50, it should be absolutely guaranteed that terminal 48 of the NE module is deenergized (electrically isolated from the line supply). The checkback signal contacts of the NE module main contactor must be evaluated to ensure that this has droppedout (X161 terminal 111, terminal 113, terminal 213).
6-196
05.01
6.6.2

The overvoltage limiting module limits overvoltages at the line supply input to acceptable values. These are caused, e.g. as a result of switching operations at inductive loads and at line supply matching transformers. For line supply infeed modules above 10 kW (100 mm wide), the overvoltage limiting module can be inserted at interface X181. The overvoltage limiting module is used if there are upstream transformers or for line supplies which are not in conformance with CE (unstable line supplies). The overvoltage limiting module is required if the line supply infeed module is to be implemented in conformance with UL. For the 5 kW UI module, an appropriate protective circuit is already integrated as standard.
Table 6-16 Technical data 100 Joule approx. 0.3 kg 76 mm x 70 mm x 32.5 mm 325 mm 6SN11110AB000AA0
Max. energy absorption Weight Dimensions (H x W x D) Module depth max., for the stretchedout status Order number
6.6.3
Pulsed resistor module

The pulsed resistor module can be used to quickly discharge the DC link. The DC link energy is converted into heat. Additional applications are, for example, increasing the pulsed resistor rating when using an uncontrolled infeed module or reducing the DC link voltage for controlled braking operations when the power supply fails. Several modules can also be connected in parallel. When using the internal pulsed resistor > 200 W to its maximum, we recommend that the hot air deflection plate is used as this keeps the heat from the modules located above. The universal housing design of the pulsed resistor module can be used in externally cooled module groups.
6-197
05.01
6.6.4
External pulsed resistors

Using the external pulsed resistors, the heat loss can be dissipated outside the cabinet. External pulsed resistors are always required for the 28 kW UI module. Shielded cables must be used to connect the pulsed resistors.
Notice The pulsed resistor is equipped with a temperature monitoring function, which protects it against overheating.
Table 6-17
UI modules with pulsed resistors Pulsed resistors, technical data External pulsed resistor 0.3/25 kW External pulsed resistor 1.5/25 kW 6SN1113 1AA000CA0 Internal pulsed resistor 0.3/25 kW UI 10 kW, pulsed resistor module Internal pulsed resistor 0.2/10 kW UI 5 kW
6
Order No. Integrated in Can be used for Can be used for
6SN1113 1AA000DA0
UI module 28 kW
UI module 28 kW Pulsed resistor module 6SN1113 1AB0V0BAV 1.5 kW 25 kW 180 kWs IP20 0.3 kW 25 kW
Pn Pmax Emax Degree of protection
0.3 kW 25 kW 7.5 kWs IP 54
0.2 kW 10 kW 13.5 kWs refer to module
7.5 kWs refer to module
Dimension drawings, refer to Section 13
6-198
05.01
Engineering information applies for UI 5 kW, 10 kW, 28 kW and pulsed resistor module
Dimensioning the load duty cycles for pulsed resistors Desig. Units Explanation E T A J M n Pn Ws s s kgm2 Nm RPM W Regenerative feedback energy when braking a motor from n2 to n1 Period of the braking load duty cycle Load duration Total moment of inertia (including J motor) Braking torque Speed Continuous rating of the pulsed resistor Peak rating of the pulsed resistor Energy of the pulsed resistor for a single braking operation
Pmax W Emax Ws
Load duty cycles for braking operations
6
P (kW) Pmax Pn 0 kW A T Fig. 6-13 A 0 kW t (s)
Load duty cycle for internal and external pulsed resistors
Table 6-18
Examples
Values
Emax Pn Pmax
Pulsed resistor 0.2/10 kW 13500 Ws 1) 200 W 10000 W 0.2 s 10 s 1.35 s 67.5 s
Pulsed resistor 0.3/25 kW 7500 Ws 300 W 25000W 0.12 s 10 s 0.3 s 25 s
Pulsed resistor 1.5/25 kW 180000 Ws 1500 W 25000W 0.6 s 10 s 7.2 s 120 s
Example
A= T= A= T=
All of the following conditions must be fulfilled: 1. Pmax M2n/60 2. Emax E; E=J[(2n2/60)2(2n1/60)2]/2 3. Pn E/T
Note For UI 5 kW and UI 10 kW, it is not possible to connect an external resistor.
1)
As a result of the mechanical dimensions, the resistor can accept a relatively high level of energy.
6-199
05.01
Mounting positions
Horizontal and vertical mounting positions are possible.
Connection for external pulsed resistor 0.3/25 kW Order number: 6SN11131AA000DA0
6
Fig. 6-14
PE Red, blue, PE (green, yellow) each 1.5 mm2 Shielded 3 m connecting cable, can be extended up to 10 m
Connection for external pulsed resistor 0.3/25 kW Connection for external pulsed resistor 1.5/25 kW Order number: 6SN11131AA000CA0
3R
1R
PE
Shield connection is realized through the PG gland Shielded connecting cable (braided screen) crosssection 2.5 4 mm2 max. length 10 m Fig. 6-15 Connection for external pulsed resistor 1.5/25 kW
Note Conductors which are not used in multiconductor cables must always be connected to PE at both ends.
6-200
05.01
Connection types, pulsed resistor module
Status as supplied: Connector with jumper between 1R and 2R Internal resistor active Order number: 6SN11131AB0V0VAV

P600 M600
2R 1R 3R
Fig. 6-16
Status of the pulsed resistor module when supplied
Note For pulsed resistor modules, only the external pulsed resistor 1.5/25 kW can be connected. The following connection combinations are possible:
Connection of an external 1.5 kW resistor: Connector without jumper Internal resistor is inactive External resistor is active 1) Shield connection as close as possible to the module Order number: 6SN11131AB0V0VAV

P600 M600
1R 2R
3R
3R
1R
PE
1)
PE rail
Fig. 6-17 Connecting an external 1.5 kW pulsed resistor
Number of pulsed resistor modules connected to the same DC link, refer to Catalog NC60 NvC / 500 F N = max. number of pulsed resistor modules (must always be roundedoff) C = DC link capacitance of the drive group in F
6-201
05.01
UI 28 kW module Possibilities of connecting external pulsed resistors to the 28 kW module
The UI 28 kW module does not include a pulsed resistor.
Ext. pulsed resistor Screen connection
Fig. 6-18 Table 6-19
Connecting an external pulsed resistor with screen connection Permissible methods of connecting an external pulsed resistor to UI 28 kW Terminal block TR1 1R 2R 3R Terminal block TR2 1R 2R 3R
Pulsed resistor 0.3/25 kW
Pulsed resistor 0.3 kW
2 x 0.3/25 kW=0.6/50 kW 1R 2R 3R 1.5/25 kW
1R 2R 3R
PW 0.3 kW
1R 2R 3R
Pulsed resistor 1.5/25 kW Pulsed resistor 1.5 kW
1R 2R 3R
2 x 1.5/25 kW=3/50 kW
1R 2R 3R
1R 2R 3R
* Jumper to code the thermal limiting characteristic J
6-202
Line Supply Connection
7.1 Line supply fuses, commutating reactors, transformers and main switches
7.1.1 Assignment of the line supply fuses to the NE modules
Fuses must be used which are designed to protect the line supply feeder cables. The following can be used: NH, D, DO with gL characteristics. Without restricting the performance data of the NE modules, we recommend the SIEMENS fuse types listed below.
Table 7-1 Assignment of line supply fuses and circuitbreakers to the NE modules UI module 5/10 kW Irated fuse Ifuse 0.2 s Ifuse 4s Ifuse10 s Ifuse240 s 16 A >70 A >50 A >42 A >30 A UI module 10/25 kW 25 A >100 A >80 A >65 A >40 A UI module 28/50 kW 80 A >360 A >260 A >200 A >135 A I/R module 16/21 kW 35 A >180 A >130 A >100 A >60 A I/R module 36/47 kW 80 A >360 A >260 A >200 A >135 A I/R module 55/71 kW 125 A >450 A >350 A >250 A >200 A I/R module 80/104 kW 160 A >650 A >505 A >360 A >280 A I/R module 120/156 KW 250 A >865 A >675 A >480 A >380 A
Recommended SIEMENS fuse types Rated voltage 415 VX Rated voltage 500 VX Rated voltage 500 VX 16 A D01 Neoz./ B.No. 5SE2116 16 A DII Diazed/ B.No. 5SB261 16 A size 00 NH/ B.No. 3NA3805 25 A D02 Neoz./ B.No. 5SE2125 25 A DII Diazed/ B.No. 5SB281 25 A size 00 NH/ B.No. 3NA3810 80 A DIV Diazed/ B.No. 5SC211 80 A size 00 NH/ B.No. 3NA3824 35 A D02 Neoz./ B.No. 5SE2135 35 A DIII Diazed/ B.No. 5SB411 35 A size 00 NH/ B.No. 3NA3814 80 A DIV Diazed/ B.No. 5SC211 80 A size 00 NH/ B.No. 3NA3824 125 A size 00 NH/ B.No. 3NA3832 160 A size 1 NH/ B.No. 3NA3136 250 A size 1 NH/B.No. 3NA3144
SIEMENS circuitbreakers Desig. 3RV1031 4BA10 3RV1031 4EA10 3RV1041 4LA10 3VF3111 3FQ41 0AA0 3RV1031 4FA10 3RV1041 4LA10 3VF3111 3FQ41 0AA0 3VF3211 3FU41 0AA0 3VF3211 3FW41 0AA0 3VF4211 3DM41 0AA0
7-203
7 Line Supply Connection 7.1 Line supply fuses, commutating reactors, transformers and main switches
05.01
7.1.2
HF commutating reactors
General information
The matching HF commutating reactor, according to the selection table, is required to connect the uncontrolled 28 kW infeed and the controlled infeed/regenerative feedback modules to the line supply (refer to Section 6).
Tasks
Commutating reactors have the following tasks:
S Limit the amount of harmonics fed back into the line supply S Store energy for step-up controller operation in conjunction with infeed and
regenerative feedback modules HF commutating reactor for line supplies 3-ph. 400 V AC -10 % to 480 V +6 %; 50/60 Hz $10 % Note
When using commutating reactors, which SIEMENS has not released for SIMODRIVE 6SN11, harmonics can occur which can damage/disturb other equipment connected to the line supply.
7-204
05.01
7.1.3
Assigning commutating reactors to the NE modules

Note When using SIMODRIVE filter modules for I/R modules in squarewave current operation (refer to Section 7.2), a separate commutating reactor is not required. For UI 5/10 kW and UI 10/25 kW, commutating reactors are not required. Operating voltage: 3ph. 300 to 520 V AC/45 to 65 Hz
Table 7-2
Assigning commutating reactors to the NE modules UI module 28/50 kW I/R module 16/21 kW 16 kW commutating HF reactor I/R module 36/47 kW 36 kW commutating HF reactor I/R module 55/71 kW 55 kW commutating HF reactor I/R module 80/104 kW 80 kW commutating HF reactor I/R module 120/156 kW 120 kW commutating HF reactor
Type
28 kW commutating HF reactor 6SN1111 1AA00 1) 0CA0 0.15 mH 65 A V3.1
Order No. 6SN1111 0AA00 Lphase In Voltage drop/ phase Pv Connection Weight (max) Mounting position Terminal assignment
0BA1 0.7 mH 30 A 8.6 V
1)
0CA1 0.4 mH 67 A 12.3 V
1)
0DA1 0.27 mH 103 A 12.3 V
1)
1EA0 0.23 mH 150 A 11.1 V
1)
1FA0 0.2 mH 225 A 15.2 V
1)
70 W max. 35 6 kg Any Input: 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Output: 1U2, 1V2, 1W2 mm2
170 W max. 16 9 kg Any mm2
450 W
590 W
Cable lug acc. to DIN 46235 40 kg Any 50 kg Any
Drilling template Dimensions in mm Top view, foorprint

100
330
11 8 5.8 68 166 18
380
150 136
10
15
156 175 1) 325 142
15 8 175
170
200
Height 190
Height for 16 kW: 145 Height for 36 kW: 230 Height for 55 kW: 280
1): 80kW: 224, Height 200 120kW: 264, Height 300
1)
Suitable for sinusoidal current and squarewave current operation.
7-205
05.01
7.1.4
Assigning autotransformers to the I/R modules2)

Note If a transformer is used for I/R modules, this does not replace the external commutating reactor. When using a transformer, from NE module 10kW onwards Order number: 6SN114V1VV0V0VV1 an overvoltage limiting module must be used. Order number: 6SN11110AB000AA0
Table 7-3
Autotransformers for 480/440V input voltage I/R module 16/21 kW I/R module 36/47 kW 46.5 kVA autotransformer I/R module 55/71 kW 70.3 kVA autotransformer I/R module 80/104 kW 104 kVA autotransformer I/R module 120/156 kW 155 kVA autotransformer
PD type 3ph. 480/ 440/400 V AC 1)
21 kVA autotransformer
Order No. 6SN11110AA00 0BBV Pv Connection Fuse, primary Weight Terminal assignment 170 W 16 mm2 35 A gL 26 kg 0CB0 376 W 50 mm2 80 A gL 60 kg 0DB0 445 W 70 mm2 125 A gL 60 kg 0EB0 550 W 0FBV 700 W
Cable lug acc. to DIN 46235 160 A gL 80 kg Flat connectors 224 A gL 125 kg
1U1 / 1U3 / 1V1 / 1V3 / 1W1 / 1W3 / 2U1 / 2V1 / 2W1 / N
1U1 to 1W1=480 V input, 1U3 to 1W3=440 V input, 2U1 to 2W1=400 V output, N=neutral point
b4
Drilling template
t4
Dimensions in mm Top view, footprint
t1 t2 t3 b3 b2 b1
t1 = 270 t2 = 235 t3 = 35 t4 = 10 b1 = 180 b2 = 140.5 b3 = 39.5 b4 = 18 Height 250
t1 = 370 t2 = 317 t3 = 53 t4 = 10 b1 = 220 b2 = 179 b3 = 41 b4 = 18 Height 330
t1 = 370 t2 = 317 t3 = 53 t4 = 10 b1 = 240 b2 = 189 b3 = 51 b4 = 18 Height 340
t1 = 420 t2 = 368 t3 = 52 t4 = 10 b1 = 260 b2 = 200.5 b3 = 59.5 b4 = 18 Height 370
t1 = 480 t2 = 418 t3 = 62 t4 = 15 b1 = 280 b2 = 217.5 b3 = 62.5 b4 = 22 Height 440
1) The transformers for 3ph. 480/440/400 V AC can be used at the 480 V tap up to 550 V for a line supply frequency of 57 63 Hz. 2) Assigning isolating transformers to I/R modules, refer to Catalog NC 60.
7-206
05.01
Table 7-4
Autotransformer for 220V input voltage2) I/R module 16/21 kW I/R module 36/47 kW 46.5 kVA autotransformer 0CC0 644 W Prim. 70 mm2 Sec. 50 mm2 160 A gL 120 kg I/R module 55/71 kW 70.3 kVA autotransformer 0DC0 790 W Prim. 95 mm2 Sec. 70 mm2 224 A gL 135 kg I/R module 80/104 kW 104 kVA autotransformer 0EC0 1100 W I/R module 120/156 kW 155 kVA autotransformer 0FC0 1340 W
PD type1) 3ph. 220/400 V AC Order No., 6SN11110AA00 Pv Connection Fuse, primary Weight Terminal assignment Max. dimensions
21 kVA autotransformer 0BC0 412 W Prim. 16 mm2 Sec. 16 mm2 63 A gL 60 kg
Cable lug acc. to DIN 46235 300 A gL 220 kg 500 A gL 300 kg
1U1 to 1W1=220 V input, 2U1 to 2W1=400 V output, N=neutral point
b4
d1 t4
Drilling template in mm
t1
t1 t2 t3 b3 b2 b1 t2 t3 b3 b2 b1
Top view, footprint
7
t1 = 590 t2 = 530 t3 = 60 b1 = 360 b2 = 279 b3 = 81 d1 = 15 Height 600
t1 = 370 t2 = 317 t3 = 53 t4 = 10 b1 = 220 b2 = 179 b3 = 41 b4 = 18 Height 330
t1 = 480 t2 = 418 t3 = 62 t4 = 15 b1 = 255 b2 = 205 b3 = 50 b4 = 22 Height 430
t1 = 480 t2 = 418 t3 = 62 t4 = 15 b1 = 300 b2 = 241 b3 = 59 b4 = 22 Height 430
t1 = 530 t2 = 470 t3 = 60 b1 = 325 b2 = 254 b3 = 71 d1 = 12.5 Height 520
7-207
05.01
7.1.5
Table 7-5
Assigning transformers to the I/R modules

Matching transformers with separate windings for 50 Hz / 60 Hz line supplies I/R module 16 kW I/R module 36 kW 47 1380 160 50 70 2100 310 70 I/R module 55 kW I/R module 80 kW 104 2800 440 I/R module 120 kW 155 3700 540
Rated power [kVA] Pv [W] Weight [kg] Secondary connection [mm2]
21 750 120 16
Cable lug acc. to DIN 46235
Input voltage 3ph. 500 V AC $ 10 %; 50 Hz 5 % to 60 Hz + 5 % Rated input current [A] Primary connection [mm2] Order No., 6SN11110AA02 25.2 10 55.9 35 84.1 50 124 70 183 Cable lug acc. to DIN 46235 0FE0 207 Cable lug, acc. to DIN 46235 0FF0 220 Cable lug, acc. to DIN 46235 0FG0 228
0BE0 28.7 10
0CE0 63.5 50
0DE0 95.5 50
0EE0 141 70
Input voltage 3ph. 440 V AC $ 10 %; 50 Hz 5 % to 60 Hz + 5 %
Rated input current [A] Primary connection [mm2] Order No., 6SN11110AA02 Rated input current [A] Primary connection [mm2] Order No., 6SN11110AA02 Rated input current [A] Primary connection [mm2] Order No., 6SN11110AA02 Rated input current [A] Primary connection [mm2] Order No., 6SN11110AA02 Rated input current [A] Primary connection [mm2] Order No., 6SN11110AA02
0BF0 30.4 10
0CF0 67.3 35
0DF0 101 50
0EF0 149 70
0BG0 31.5 16
0CG0 69.9 50
0DG0 105 70
0EG0 155
Cable lug, acc. to DIN 46235
0BH0 57.3 16
0CH0 127 50
0DH0 191
0EH0 281
0FH0 415
Input voltage 3 AC 220 V $ 10 %; 50 Hz 5 % to 60 Hz + 5 %
0BC0 63 35
0CC0 140 70
0DC0 210
0EC0 309
0FC0 456
0BJ0
0CJ0
0DJ0
0EJ0
0FJ0
7-208
05.01
Operating conditions, all transformers and reactors
The following operating conditions are permitted:
S S S S
Supply voltage 3ph. 480/440/400 V AC or 3ph. 220/400 V AC/45...60 Hz1) Temperature range 25C...40C (to 55C with derating) Degree of protection IP00 Humidity rating F according to DIN 40040 for transformers and reactors
The maximum current of transformers/reactors is dependent on the ambient temperature and the installation altitude. The permissible current/power rating of the transformers and reactors is: In (PD) reduced = c In (PD)
3ph. 240 V AC at 60 Hz 5% can be used as input voltage. Note: The secondary voltage increases and the NE modules should be set to S1.1=ON, refer to Section 6.1. 2) Assigning isolating transformers to I/R modules, refer to Catalog NC 60.
1)
c 1.1 0.9 0.7 30 40 50 a) _C b) 1000 2000 mNN
Reduction factor c as a function of:
a) Ambient temperatures above +40 _C b) Installation heights above 1000 m
Fig. 7-1
Reduction factor c
7-209
05.01
7.1.6
Table 7-6
Assigning transformers to the UI modules

Matching transformers with separate windings for 50 Hz / 60 Hz line supplies UI module 5 kW UI module 10 kW 15.7 730 100 10 42.6 1300 170 35 UI module 28 kW
Rated power [kVA] Pv [W] Weight [kg] Secondary connection [mm2]
8.2 600 60 4
Input voltage 3ph. 500 V AC $ 10 %; 50 Hz 5 % to 60 Hz + 5 % Rated input current [A] Primary connection Order No., 6SN11110AA02 [mm2] 9.95 4 1BE0 19 6 1AE0 50.7 25 1CE0
Rated input current [A] Primary connection Order No., 6SN11110AA02 [mm2]
11.3 4 1BF0
21.6 6 1AF0
57.6 35 1CF0
Input voltage 3ph. 415 V AC $ 10 %; 50 Hz 5 % to 60 Hz + 5 % Rated input current [A] Primary connection [mm2] Order No., 6SN11110AA02 Rated input current [A] Primary connection Order No., 6SN11110AA02 Rated input current [A] Primary connection [mm2] Order No., 6SN11110AA02 Rated input current [A] Primary connection [mm2] Order No., 6SN11110AA02 [mm2] 12 4 1BG0 12.4 4 1BH0 22.6 6 1BC0 24.9 10 1BJ0 22.9 6 1AG0 23.8 10 1AH0 43.3 25 1AC0 47.6 25 1AJ0 61 35 1CG0 63.3 35 1CH0 115 50 1CC0 127 70 1CJ0
7-210
05.01
7.1.7
Assigning main switches
Note Before poweringdown, terminal 48 of the NE module must be deenergized 10 ms before the contacts of the switch open.
Main switches with leading auxiliary contacts can be used to ensure that terminal 48 of the NE module is first deenergized. Recommendation: Siemens switches, types 3LC.../3KA5... (from the Catalog SIEMENS Lowvoltage switchgear)
Table 7-7 Assigning the main and auxiliary switches For UI modules 5 kW Switchtype 3LD21030TK... + 3LD92203B 10 kW 3LD25040TK... + 3LD92503B 28 kW 3LD27040TK... + 3LD92803B For I/R modules 16 kW Switch type 3LD25040TK... + 3LD92503B 36 kW 3LD27040TK... + 3LD92803B 55 kW 3LD53301EE00 + 3LD14000A 80 kW 3LD53301EE00 + 3LD14000A 120 kW 3LD57301EE00 + 3LD14000A
7-211
7 Line Supply Connection 7.2 Line filter and HF commutating reactors for I/R and UI modules
05.01
7.2 Line filter and HF commutating reactors for I/R and UI modules
General information
Line filters and HF commutating reactors are available in the SIMODRIVE 611 system in order to comply with EMC Guidelines. In addition to using a line filter and HF commutating reactors, in order to maintain the limit values, it is important that the cabinet is designed in compliance with EMC Guidelines. The installation and connection specifications according to Section 10.1 must be observed. Please refer to the EMC Guidelines for SINUMERIK, Order No.: 6FC52970AD300AP1 for additional information regarding EMC correct design. These EMC limit values can also be fulfilled using other suitable measures; an EMC investigation should be made on a caseforcase basis. If the system is to be in compliance with the EMC Guidelines, then we recommend using the line filter packages Catalog NC 60
Table 7-8
Line supply conditions Desig. Description
Line supply conditions of the NE modules UI modules I/R modules
The NE modules are designed for symmetrical 3phase line supplies with grounded neutral point which can be loaded: TN line supplies. The line supply requirements according to EN 50178 are maintained using the upstream commutating reactor (for UI 5 kW and UI 10 kW, these are integrated in the module). The line supply connection must be designed for Pn/Ps6/Pmax of the connected UI module. In order to guarantee that the system environment is not polluted, the fault rating of the line supply (SK line supply) at the connection point of the I/R module must have the values as shown in Table 6-13. If these requirements are not maintained, this can have a negative impact on the drive system, and also result in faults and disturbances in other devices which are connected at this particular point. Valid for I/R modules with Order No.: 6SN114V1VV0V0VV1 I/R module used Sinusoidal current operation (S1.6 = ON) Section 6.1, required SK line supply SK line supply 1.1 MVA (70 x PnI/R module in kW) SK line supply 2.5 MVA (70 x PnI/R module in kW) SK line supply 3.9 MVA (70 x PnI/R module in kW) SK line supply 4.8 MVA (60 x PnI/R module in kW) SK line supply 7.2 MVA (60 x PnI/R module in kW) Squarewave current operation (S1.6 = OFF) Section 6.1 required SK line supply SK line supply 1.6 MVA (100 x PnI/R module in kW) SK line supply 3.6 MVA (100 x PnI/R module in kW) SK line supply 5.5 MVA (100 x PnI/R module in kW) SK line supply 6.4 MVA (80 x PnI/R module in kW) SK line supply 9.6 MVA (80 x PnI/R module in kW)
16 KW 36 KW 55 KW 80 KW 120 KW
Note If a matching transformer is used, it is still necessary to use a line filter and HF commutating reactor.
7-212
05.01
Notice When using filters which SIEMENS have not released for SIMODRIVE 6SN11, harmonics can be fed back into the line supply which can damage/disturb devices connected to that line supply. It is not permissible to connect other loads to the line filter output.
Function description of the HF commutating reactors
The HF commutating reactors have the task of limiting harmonics fed back into the line supply and saving the energy for stepup control operation in conjunction with infeed and regenerative feedback modules. The matching HF commutating reactor, according to the selection table is required when connecting the uncontrolled 28 kW infeed and the controlled infeed/regenerative feedback modules to the line supply.
Function description of the line filters
The line filters limit the cableborne faults emitted from the drive converter units to permissible EMC values for industry. In conjunction with consequentially implementing the plant/system in accordance with the Planning Guide and the EMC Guidelines for SIMODRIVE, SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, the limit values at the installation location are maintained in accordance with EC Guidelines EMC. The line filter and line filter packages can be used both in sinusoidal as well as squarewave current operation.
7-213
05.01
7.2.1
Table 7-9
Assigning the line filters to the I/R modules

Assigning the line filters to the I/R modules I/R module 16/21 kW I/R module 36/47 kW Line filter 36 kW 6SN1111 0AA012CAV I/R module 55/71 kW Line filter 55 kW 6SN1111 0AA012DAV I/R module 80/104 kW Line filter 80 kW 6SN1111 0AA012EAV I/R module 120/156 kW Line filter 120 kW 6SN1111 0AA012FAV
Filter components Order No. Line filter Mounting position Module width Filter Filter Irated filter Pv filter Connection
Line filter 16 kW 6SN1111 0AA012BAV
Wall or floor mounting, refer to dimension drawings, Section 12. Refer to the dimension drawings, Section 12. 9 kg 30 A 70 W 16/10 PE, (M5) mm2
1)
16 kg 67 A 90 W 50 mm2 PE, (M8) LINE L1, L2, L3, PE LOAD L1, L2, L3 80 A Nonventilated Cableborne, limit value Class A
32 kg 225 A 190 W Cable lug acc. to DIN 46235 LINE L1, L2, L3, PE LOAD L1, L2, L3 250 A Nonventilated Cableborne, limit value Class A
Terminals, Line supply input Terminals, output Irated fuse2) Cooling Radio interference suppression EN 55011
LINE L1, L2, L3, PE LOAD L1, L2, L3 35 A Nonventilated Cableborne, limit value Class A
Table 7-10 Filter packages
Filter packages 16 kW package 6SN1111 0AA012BB0 36 kW package 6SN1111 0AA012CB0 55 kW package 6SN1111 0AA012DB0 80 kW package 6SN1111 0AA012EB0 120 kW package 6SN1111 0AA012FB0
Contents: HF commutating reactor 16 kW 0BAV Line filter 16 kW 2BAV HF commutating reactor 36 kW 0CAV Line filter 36 kW 2CAV HF commutating reactor 55 kW 0DAV Line filter 55 kW 2DAV HF commutating reactor 80 kW 1EAV Line filter 80 kW 2EAV HF commutating reactor 120 kW 1FAV Line filter 120 kW 2FAV
6SN11110AA00 6SN11110AA01
Mounting position of the filter modules
The filter modules can be mounted horizontally and vertically (line at the bottom, load at the top).
1) The 1st number is valid for cable lugs, the 2nd number is for finelystranded conductors without connector sleeves. 2) The fuse used must have this rated current. Refer to Table 7-1 for recommended fuses.
7-214
05.01
7.2.2
Table 7-11
Assignment of the line filters to the UI modules

Assignment of the line filter to the UI modules UI module 5/10 kW UI module 10/25 kW Line filter, 10 kW 6SN11110AA011AA0 UI module 28/50 kW Line filter, 28 kW 6SN11110AA011CA0
Filter components Order No., Mounting position Module width Filter Filter Irated filter Pv filter Connection Terminals, Line supply input Terminals, output Irated fuse1) Cooling Radio interference suppression EN 55011
Line filter, 5 kW 6SN11110AA011BA0 Any
Refer to Dimension Drawings, Section 12 3.8 kg 16 A 20 W 4 mm2 PE, M6 studs LINE L1, L2, L3, PE LOAD L1, L2, L3, PE 16 A Nonventilated Cableborne, limit value Class A 5.7 kg 25 A 20 W 10 mm2 PE, M6 studs LINE L1, L2, L3, PE LOAD L1, L2, L3, PE 25 A Nonventilated Cableborne, limit value Class A 12.5 kg 65 A 25 W 50 mm2 PE, M10 studs LINE L1, L2, L3, PE LOAD L1, L2, L3, PE 80 A Nonventilated Cableborne, limit value Class A
1) The fuse used must have this rated current. Refer to Table 7-1 for recommended fuses.
7.2.3
Adapter set and line filter package

Line filter packages are available for the I/R modules (refer to Catalog NC60). These line filter packages comprise a line filter and an HF commutating reactor (refer to Table 7-10). We recommend that these line filter packages are ordered. Adapter sets are available to adapt the line filter packages to the mounting surface and to the retaining points of the earlier filter modules. The mounting depth protrudes beyond the front of the drive group by 20 30 mm.
Note It is not permissible that the filter inputs and outputs are interchanged.
7-215
05.01
7-216
Supplementary System Components
8.1
Signal amplifier electronics

The signal amplifier electronics is used to amplify the current signals for distances > 18 m between the encoder and the digital drive module for 1FT6 motors whereby the current signals are converted into voltage signals.
Notice Current signals should no longer be used for new applications, as voltage signals offer higher noise immunity.
The signal amplification electronics can only be used in conjunction with the Performance control of SIMODRIVE 611 digital.
Table 8-1 Technical data of the signal amplifier electronics Technical data Signal waveform Input signal Output signal Signal frequency, max. Operating voltage, max. at remote sense Operating current, max. Encoder power supply Encoder power supply current, max. Dimensions (H x W x D) Order number Degree of protection of the enclosure Sinecosine 7 App to 16 App 1Vpp 300 kHz 8 V DC 200 mA 5 V DC $ 5 % 120 mA 54 mm x 121 mm x 57 mm 6SN11 150AA120AA0 IP 65
8-217
8 Supplementary System Components 8.4 Shield connecting rail
05.01
8.2
Connecting cable for 2tier arrangement

If space is restricted, the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system modules can also be arranged in two tiers one above the other or in adjacent cabinet panels (refer to Section 10.1.3) For 2tier arrangements, a connecting cable must be ordered to connect the equipment bus and if required, the drive bus. Parallel cables must be used to connect the DC link (M600/P600) in a 2tier arrangement. For adjacent 300 mm wide modules, a CU conductor cross section of 70 mm2 and for smaller modules, CU 50 mm2 should be used. The cables must be routed so that they are shortcircuit proof and groundfault proof. A potential bonding conductor having the same crosssection must be connected in parallel and connected to the housings of the modules which are connected with one another. This cable is not included with the equipment. Adapter terminals are available to connect the DC link. Ordering data, refer to Catalog NC 60.
8.3
Adapter terminals for DC link connection

The DC link voltage can be connected using the adapter terminals, e.g. to connect the DC link for twotier arrangements. The following adapter terminals are available: 1. Package with 2 double terminals 50 mm2 for module widths 50 to 200 mm Order No. (MLFB): 6SN11611AA010BA0 2. Package with 2 double terminals 95 mm2 for module width 300 mm Order No. (MLFB): 6SN11611AA010AA0
8.4
Shield connecting rail

The shield connecting rail is used to connect the electronics cable to the ground potential of the module housing so that the connection is inline with EMC guidelines. The rail can be mounted above the control modules on the power and infeed modules using threaded sockets. Ordering data, refer to Catalog NC60
8-218
Important Circuit Information

9.1 General information
Note
The following circuit examples, information and descriptions are of a general nature and do not claim to be complete and correct for a particular application. They must be adapted for every plant or system. The circuit examples are intended to support the machine manufacturer/user when integrating the controlrelated part of a SIMODRIVE 611 drive system into the complete control concept of his machine/plant. The user is responsible in configuring and engineering the complete control system, taking into account all of the guidelines/standards valid for his particular application, and the safety measures, derived from a hazard analysis/risk evaluation, to avoid injury to personnel and damage to machinery.
Warning After opening the line supply disconnection device (main switch) or the line contactor, a residual energy and hazardous touch voltages up to 60 V DC are available at the power DC link of the drive group and therefore at electrically connected components (terminals, cables, switching devices, motors etc.). This residual energy and hazardous touch voltages are present while the DC link capacitors discharge, max. 30 min., and must be taken into consideration in a hazard analysis/risk evaluation. The service personnel must be absolutely certain that the plant or system is actually in a novoltage condition before carrying out any service, maintenance or cleaning work on the machine!
Warning Before the line disconnection device (main switch) or a line contactor is used to power up or power down the drive group, terminal 48, start and/or terminal 63, pulse enable, must be deenergized at the NE module. This can be realized, for example, using a leading auxiliary contact at the main switch. The terminals do not have to be first deenergized for uncontrolled UI modules, 5, 10 and 28 kW as well as for I/R modules, if these are operated uncontrolled in the line supply infeed and regenerative operating modes and an overvoltage limiting module is used.
9-219
9 Important Circuit Information 9.1 General information
05.01
Warning If the electronics power supply of the NE or monitoring module is connected directly in front of the commutating reactor at the line supply, 6conductor connection, via terminals 2U12V12W1, then it is not permissible to connect X181: P500/M500 to the DC link P600/M600, refer to Section 9.13.
Warning To shut down in a controlled fashion using the DC link energy at power failure, e.g. terminal P500/M500 can for example, remain connected to the DC link P600/M600. When powering down using the line contactor, or in the settingup mode, this connection must be reliably and safely disconnected, e.g. using a contactor with protective separation refer to Section 9.12.
Warning For a six conductor connection of the NE module, and where the electronic supply is connected directly to the line supply, the jumpers, inserted in connector X181 at the NE module when the equipment is supplied, must be removed, refer to Section 9.13.
9
!
Warning The connections at the input and output side at the line filter may not be interchanged.
9-220
05.01
9 Important Circuit Information 9.1 General information
P600 100 k M600
DC link connection
Grounding bar
Supply connection
U1 V1 W1 X131 PE
Fig. 9-1
NEmodule,
Warning The grounding bar is used to ground the M600 DC link bus through resistor 100 k and this should be preferably inserted. When the equipment is supplied, the grounding bar is open. If the system is subject to a high voltage test, then the grounding bar must be opened
9
Note The line supply is electrically isolated from the power circuit of the drive group via the internal line contactor. The coil circuit can be disconnected to reliably deenergize the line contactor via the floating contacts, using terminals NS1, NS2 at the NE module. The DC link will not be precharged if the connection is missing when the unit is powered up. The connection NS1, NS2 may only be switched when terminal 48 and/or terminal 63 are first deenergized or simultaneously with these terminals, refer to Section 9.7.
9-221
9 Important Circuit Information 9.2 Infeed modules
05.01
9.2
9.2.1
Infeed modules
Threeconductor connection (standard circuit)
S1.6 S1.5 S1.4 S1.3 S1.2 S1.1
Only PELV circuits may be connected to terminal 19 (FR).
X111
S1 2)
NEmodule, (with the exception UI 5 kW) P600
Additional terminal 19 Pushbutton contact
63 9 9 64 19
V5 V15 24V M
X141
15 R 9 112 48 111 213 113 NS 1 NS 2 AS1 AS2
Electronics power supply A B
Power section
M600 L
X121
1) Additional terminal 48
X161 Internal line contactor
X171 X172
L+
1)
X351
To the drive modules
P600 A B P600 To the drive modules 4) M600 M600 100 k
9
1) 1) 1)
LEDs
M500 P500 2U1 1U1 2V1 1V1 2W1 1W1
X181
U1
1U2
V1
1V2
1W
1W2
L1 3) F1 F2
L2
X131
PE to the NC
Reactor, only for I/R module and UI 28 kW

U V
Notice 1) Jumpers when the equipment is supplied. Depending on the particular application, remove the jumpers (refer to the circuit examples, Section 9.7.). 2) For I/R modules with a setting for closed loop controlled operation, the following applies (refer to switch S1, Section 6) terminal 48 mustw be deenergized 10 ms before the main switch line contacts open (e.g. leading contact). 3) Terminals L1,L2 are only available for I/R modules 80 and 120 KW.
Line filter 2) Leading contact Line fuses for I/R or UI module, refer to Section 7.1.1
L1
L2
W L3
PE Main switch Supply Fig. 9-2 L1 L2 L3
4) Grounding bar open when supplied.
Threeconductor connection (standard circuit)
9-222
05.01
9.2.2
Table 9-1
Description of the interfaces and functions

Overview, infeed modules, internal cooling, commutating reactors, line filter, fuse Order number Commutating reactor Line filter 1) only 415 V ! 6SN11110AA01 1BA0 6SN11110AA01 1AA0 6SN11110AA01 1CA0 6SN11110AA01 2BAj 6SN11110AA01 2CAj 6SN11110AA01 2DAj 6SN11110AA01 2EAj 6SN11110AA01 2FAj Line filter package only 415 V ! 6SN11110AA01 2BB0 6SN11110AA01 2CB0 6SN11110AA01 2DB0 6SN11110AA01 2EB0 6SN11110AA01 2FB0 Fuse 3) [A]
Power [KW) S1/S6/Smax 5/6.5/10 UI 10/13/25 UI 28/36/50 UI 16/21/35 I/R 36/47/70 I/R 55/71/91 I/R 80/104/131 I/R 120/156/175 I/R
6SN11461AB0j 0BA1 6SN11451AA0j 0AA1 6SN11451AA0j 0CA0 6SN11451BA0j 0BA1 6SN11451BA0j 0CA1 6SN11451BA0j 0DA1 6SN11451BB0j 0EA1 6SN11451BB0j 0FA1
2) 2) 6SN11111AA00 0CA0 6SN11110AA00 0BAj 6SN11110AA00 0CAj 6SN11110AA00 0DAj 6SN11110AA00 1EAj 6SN11110AA00 1FAj
16 25 80 35 80 125 160 250
Note: 1) The line filter does not include the commutating reactor! This must be additionally mounted between the line filter and I/R ! The line filter package comprises a commutating reactor and a line filter, which are separately combined to form a package. 2) Commutating reactor included in the NE module. 3) Versions NH, D, DO, gL
Switch S1
Switch S1 is provided on the upper side of the NE and monitoring module and at the front of the UI module 5 kW. It is used to select various functions, refer to Section 6.1.
Terminal 19
FR Reference potential for the enable voltage, terminal 9, floating (connected to the general reference ground terminal 15 via 10 k). It is not permissible that terminal 19 is connected to terminal 15! (Connect to the PE rail or X131). When controlling the enable signals via Pswitching electronic outputs (PLC), terminal 19 should be connected to the 0 V reference potential (ground) of the external power supply. The circuit/source must correspond to the requirements of PELV (Protection Extra Low Voltage) function extra low voltage with protective separation in compliance with EN 602041; 6.4.
9-223
05.01
Terminal 9
FR+ +24 V enable voltage for the internal enable signals of the NE and drive modules Max. load: 500 mA
Terminal 48
Start This terminal has the highest priority. Terminal 48 is used to initiate a defined poweron and poweroff sequence of the NE module. If terminal 48 is energized, then the precharging sequence is internally initiated. After the DC link has been charged up, the precharging contactor is opened and the main contactor pulls in. The internal enable signals are then available. If terminal 48 is deenergized, then initially, after approx. 1 ms the internal pulse enable signals are inhibited and then the DC link is electrically isolated from the line supply, with a delay caused by the dropout time of the internal line contactor. if terminal 48 is deenergized during charging, then charging is first completed and terminal 48 is only inhibited after charging has been completed, if terminals NS1NS2 are jumpered.
Terminals NS1, NS2
Coil circuit of the internal line and precharging contactor When the line contactor is opened by interrupting the coil circuit using floating contacts, the DC link is safely isolated from the line supply. The terminals have a safetyrelevant function. Disconnection using terminals NS1NS2 must be realized either at the same time or delayed to terminal 48 Start (refer to Section 9.7 circuit examples = 2 and = 4). Max. cable length 50 m (2conductor cable) for 1.5 mm2 crosssection
Terminal 63
Pulse enable This terminal has the highest priority for the pulse enable and inhibit. The enable and the inhibit act, after approx. 1 ms, simultaneously on all of the modules including the NE module. When the signal is withdrawn, the drives coast down unbraked.
Terminal 64
Drive enable The drives modules are enabled using terminal 64. The enable and inhibit act simultaneously on all modules after approx. 1 ms. If terminal 64 is inhibited, nset is set to 0 for all drives and the drives are braked as follows:
S For MSD/IMM 611A, the drives are braked along the selected ramp, and the
pulses are cancelled after a selectable speed has been fallen below. If terminal 81 is simultaneously inhibited, the drives brake along the current limit.
S For FD 611A, after the ar set timers have expired (as supplied: 240 ms) all of
the controllers and pulses are inhibited. The drives brake along the current limit.
9-224
05.01
S For 611D/611U/ANA/HLA drives, the pulses are cancelled after a selectable

speed has been fallen below or after a selectable timer has expired. The drives are braked along the set limit (MD 1230, 1235, 1238). For spindles, a ramp can only be achieved using regenerative limiting (MD 1237).
Terminals L1, L2
Line supply connection 2ph. 360 ... 457 V AC / 45 ... 53 Hz; 400 ... 510 V / 57 ... 65 Hz. Coil voltage of the internal line connector is connected directly to the line supply (do not connect between the I/R module and reactor). The terminals are only provided at the 80/104 kW and 120/156 kW I/R modules. Fuse: IN 4 A, version gL Note If, for the 80/104 kW or 120/156 kW I/R module, the line supply voltage fails at terminals L1, L2, or fuses F1, F2 blow, then only the pulses in the I/R module are inhibited and the internal line contactor drops out. This is displayed via the line supply fault LED and the ready relay as well as the contactor signal contacts. In this case, after the internal line contactor has been reclosed, terminal 48 must be inhibited, and after 1 sec, reenabled or the unit powered down/powered up.
9
Terminal R
Reset The fault signal is reset using a button (pulse edge) between terminal R and 15. For the SIMODRIVE 611 universal control module, the reset is effective, if in addition, terminal 65 controller enable is inhibited For 611A MSD and AMM modules, the reset is effective if additionally terminal 63, 64, 65 or 48 are inhibited.
Terminal 112
Settingup operation Terminal 112 is jumpered, as standard with terminal 9. For a special application, settingup operation with reduced DC link voltage, the DC link controller is inhibited when terminal 112 is opened. The power infeed is supplied through a threephase isolating transformer with a reduced secondary voltage. This function is only available for 611 analog with user friendly interface for 1FT5 feed motors. Regenerative feedback is no longer possible, i.e. when braking, VDC link > 600 V DC.
Notice For induction motors or for vertical 1FT5 feed axes, high speeds can even be achieved at lower VDC link.
9-225
05.01
Terminals AS1, AS2 Terminal X131
Signaling contact, start inhibit DC link controller (not available for NE modules 5, 10, 28 kW) Reference potential When coupled to a numerical control, X131 must be connected to the NC reference potential. This cable must be routed in parallel with the speed setpoint cable. Crosssection = 10 mm@! For a digital drive group with 840D/810D/840C, keep terminal X131 open circuit.
Terminal X141
Electronics voltage
S Term. 7: P24; +20.4 28.8 V / 50 mA S Term. 45: P15; +15 V /10 mA S Term. 44: N15; 15 V / 10 mA S Term. 10: N24; 20.4 28.8 V / 50 mA S Term. 15: M; 0 V
It is not permissible that terminal 15 is connected to PE (ground loop) It is not permissible that terminal 15 is connected to terminal 19 (otherwise a shortcircuit will be established through the reactor, terminal 15 is internally connected with X131).
9
Terminals 2U1, 2V1, 2W1
Terminals to allow the internal electronics power supply to be separately connected, e.g. through fused terminals (refer to the circuit example in Section 9.3.1). In this case, jumpers 1U12U1, 1V12V1, 1W12W1 must be removed (opened).
Notice Additional information is provided under Section 9.3 Monitoring module and Section 9.13 Observe the sixconductor connection!
Terminals P500, M500
The internal power supply connection at DC link P600/M600. e.g. for power failure concepts.
Notice With this operating mode, terminals 2U1, 2V1, 2W1 of the power supply must be supplied with the line supply voltage between the I/R module and line reactor. For a six conductor connection (refer to Section 9.13) it is not permissible to establish a connection between P500/M500 and the DC link P600/M600. Otherwise, the power supply will be destroyed!
9-226
05.01
Terminals 111, 113, 213
Signaling contacts of the internal line contactor 111113 111213 NO contact NC contact
Terminal X111
Ready relay Term. 72 73.1: NO contact Term. 73.2 74: NC contact closed for ready open for ready
When switch S1.2 is in the OFF position ready, the relay pulls in if the following conditions are fulfilled:
S The internal main contactor is CLOSED (terminals NS1NS2 connected,

terminal 48 enabled)
S Terminal 63, 64 = on S It is not permissible that there is a fault condition (also not on FD 611A
Standard, or 611D/611U drives)
S FD 611A with standard interface or resolver with the ready setting must be
enabled (terminals 663, 65)
S The NCU must have run up (840D, 810D)

If switch S1.2 is in the ON position, fault signal, the relay pulls in if the following conditions are fulfilled:
S Internal main contactor CLOSED (terminals NS1NS2 connected, terminal

48 enabled)
S It is not permissible that there is a fault condition (also not on FD 611A

Standard or 611D/611U drives)
S FD 611A with standard interface or resolver with the ready setting must be
enabled (terminals 663, 65)
S The NCU must have run up (840D, 810D)

For a fault condition, the relay drops out. With the exception of the line supply monitoring, all of the internal monitoring functions act on all drive modules connected to the drive converter bus and on the ready signal. The pulses in the I/R module are inhibited when line supply faults develop.
9-227
05.01
Terminal X121
I2t prealarm and motor temperature monitoring Terminals 5.1 5.2: NO contact Terminals 5.1 5.3: NC contact The relay drops out, if:
S at the NE module
heatsink temperature monitoring responds
S at the FD 611A standard/resolver

motor temperature monitoring responds heatsink temperature monitoring responds
S at the FD 611A userfriendly

motor temperature monitoring responds heatsink temperature monitoring I@t prealarm responds
S at FD 611D
S at 611U
Input current, enable circuit: Terminals 48, 63, 64 and 65: Input current, optocoupler approx. 12 mA at +24V Terminals 663: Input current, optocoupler and start inhibit relay approx. 30 mA at +24 V When selecting the switching devices, auxiliary contacts at the main switch, the contact reliability when switching low currents should be taken into account. Switching capability of the signal contacts: The max. switching capability of the signal contacts is specified in the interface overviews of the modules in Section 5 and 6 and must be carefully observed!
Note All connected actuators, contactor coils, solenoid valves, holding brakes etc. must be provided with overvoltage limiters, diodes, varistors etc. This is also true for switching devices/inductances which can be controlled from a PLC output.
9-228
05.01
9.2.3
Connecting several NE modules to a main switch

A maximum of 6 terminal 48 can be connected in parallel, in order to power down a maximum of 6NE modules with the leading contact of the main switch. Max. cable length for 1.5 mm2 cross section: 150 m (2conductor cable)
Connection diagram: NE module, drives

19 9 48
NE module, drives
19 9 48
NE module, drives
19
*)
9 48
*)
Leading contact Additional units Main switch *) It is not permissible that terminal 9 is connected to terminal 48
Fig. 9-3
Connection diagram of several NE modules at terminal 48
When enable terminals are connected in parallel to terminal 48, e.g. terminal 63 etc., the number of NE modules must be appropriately reduced as a result of the higher current load at terminal 9.
Note When the internal power supply fails at NE module 1, all of the other connected NE modules and drives are inhibited. The drives coast down unbraked.
As an alternative to the limited current load capability of the internal power supply, the enable voltage can be taken via terminal 9 from an external 24 V PELV power supply. Terminals 19 of the NE modules must, in this case, be connected to the 0 V reference potential (ground) of the external power supply.
9-229
05.01
9.2.4
Use, mode of operation and connection of the line contactor

The infeed modules have a standard line contactor, integrated in the module itself. The line contactor is electronically controlled via terminal 48. The coil circuit of the line contactor must be interrupted using floating mechanical switching elements via terminals NS1NS2 in order to ensure that the DC link is safely and electrically disconnected from the line supply, e.g. for the emergency stopping function. Thus, the influence of the electronic control has no effect when the unit is disconnected with electrical isolation. The cable routing to the connection terminals must be safely and electrically decoupled from the electronics. When the NS1NS2 connection is interrupted, beforehand, or at the same time, the line contactor must be opened using terminal 48. The NC contact 111213 of the line contactor is positively driven with the power contacts, and must be inserted in the feedback circuit of the external safetyrelated EMERGENCY STOP switchgear combinations. This means that the line contactor function is cyclically monitored.
Notice In order that the power DC link is reliably isolated from the supply, it should be ensured that all connections in parallel to the power infeed are electrically isolated through switching contacts. Here, it is important that any userspecific external connection between the electronics power supply and power DC link is taken into consideration. In order to shutdown the drive at power failure and to use the DC link energy, there can be e.g. a connection between terminal P500/M500 and P600/M600. This connection between the electronics power supply and the power DC link must be safely and reliably disconnected and remain disconnected, as otherwise, the electronics power supply of the power DC link could be charged through the auxiliary DC link. In the settingup mode, the connection between the electronics power supply and power DC link must also be disconnected. When using a monitoring module, which is connected to the power DC link through P500/M500, and is also connected to the line supply, when the line contactor is opened, either the connection between the line supply and the monitoring module or the connection between the P500/M500 and power DC link must be reliably and safely interrupted using contacts.
9-230
05.01
9.2.5
Timing diagram for the ready signal in the I/R module
Shutdown using the main switch, external line contactor or another switching element. Supply failure Load supply available Supply voltage Supply voltage
T. 48
T. 64
T. 63
Ready T. 72...74
Fig. 9-4
Timing diagram for the ready signal in the I/R module
Switch S1.2 = OFF, standard setting at the I/R module Ready signal
The ready relay can only pull in if the precharging sequence has been completed and the internal line contactor has pulled in.
The I/R module is internally inhibited during power failures, i.e. the I/R module can no longer control (closedloop) the DC link voltage which means that braking energy can no longer be fed back into the line supply. The drives are not inhibited, but the ready relay drops out with a delay, after the line failure detection time, dependent on the line impedances.
When the load supply is disconnected using the main switch or an external line contactor, e.g. for a sixconductor connection (refer to Section 9.13) as well as other switching elements, it must be ensured, that at least 10 ms beforehand, terminal 48 at the I/R module is deenergized. This can be achieved, e.g. using a main switch with leading contact or interlocking circuits for the external line contactor or other switching elements.
9-231
05.01
9.2.6
Sequence diagram, central signals at the NE module

NE ready (term. 7274)
NE P15/N15 fault (red LED lit) NO P5 fault (red LED lit) NO Supply fault (red LED lit) NO VDC link fault (red LED lit) NO Precharging completed (yellow LED lit) Yes S1.2=OFF Yes Terminal 63=ON Yes Terminal 64=ON Yes NE ready, internal FD standard Speed controller at endstop (red LED below) NO Heatsink overtemperature (red LED below) NO Tachometer fault (red LED top) NE module OK Axis module NO Feed drive userfriendly ? Yes l*2 monitoring NO Heatsink overtemperature/alarm Yes NO Standard induction motor ? NO Motor overtemperature NO NE NO
l*t/TMP (term. 5.15.3)

I/R module? Yes Heatsink overtemperature NO
NO
9
NO
NO Rotor position encoder fault (red LED top) NO S3.6=OFF Yes Terminal 663=ON Yes Terminal 65=ON Yes Feed drive, standard ready
Axis module OK
Resolverstandard Speed controller at endstop (red LED lit) NO Heatsink overtemperature (red LED lit) NO Encoder fault (red LED lit) NO NO S5.5=ON Yes Terminal 663=ON Yes Terminal 65=ON Yes Resolverstandard ready 840D 810D
NC ready Yes NC ready
FD/MSD digital Drive ready (red LED dark) Yes FD/MSD digital ready
9-232
05.01
9 Important Circuit Information 9.3 Axis expansion using the monitoring module
9.3
9.3.1
Axis expansion using the monitoring module

Connection example, power supply (standard)
Fig. 9-5
Connection example, power supply (standard)
9-233
05.01
9.3.2
Connection example, pulse enable
Instantaneous shutdown
NE module
72 73.1 S1.2 Ready/ fault message 1) FR 19 0V To the external power supply Fig. 9-6 Instantaneous shutdown, pulse enable 2)
Monitoring module
9 FR+ 63 IF S1.2 Ready/ fault message 1) 19 FR
Delayed shutdown
NE module Monitoring module
72 73.1 S1.2 Ready/ fault message 1) FR 19 +24 V 1 A KT 3) 2 A 16 18 B1 3 A B3 15 KT 15 2) 63 IF 18 S1.2 Ready/ fault message 1) 19 FR 9 FR+
0V To the external power supply Fig. 9-7 Delayed shutdown, pulse enable
1) Settings, S1.2 ready/fault signal, refer to Section 6.1. 2) The shutdown is shown in a simplified fashion without any contacts of the driverelated control 3) Time relay with delayed dropout with auxiliary function, e.g. 3RP15051AP30, t(v) > max. braking time of the drive after the monitoring module.
9-234
05.01
9.3.3
General information
The electronics power supply, included in the NE module, supplies the drive modules, connected through the equipment bus, as well as for the digital 611 digital drive groups, also the SINUMERIK 840D and 810D controls integrated in the group. The number of modules which can be connected is limited. The power of the modules which can be connected is determined by adding assessment factors in the electronics area (EP) and gating area (AP). If the power requirement exceeds the NE module power supply rating, then the drive group must be expanded by one or several monitoring modules. This means that the complete system has two or several independent electronic systems. The charge limit of the DC link should also be observed. Reference: /NC60/ SIMODRIVE 611, Catalog NC 60
Enable signals or fault signals only act on the axes connected together on the common equipment bus. The equipment bus is interrupted between the last axis after the NE module and the monitoring module.
Examples
S Connection example, power supply (standard) > refer to Fig. 9-5.

The connection example indicates the threephase connection of the monitoring modules after the power connection of the NE module via fused terminals. Alternatively, the monitoring module power supply can also be provided through terminals P500/M500 at the power DC link P600/M600. In this case, it should be taken into account that a max. 2 monitoring modules, limited by the DC link precharging circuit in the NE module, may be connected to the associated axes. It should be observed, that after the line contactor has opened, the DC link voltage decreases which means that the power supply/ communications to the drive modules is interrupted.
S Connection example, pulse enable > refer to Section 9.3.2

The axes, connected after the monitoring module, may only be enabled if the NE module signals ready/fault signal, i.e. the power DC link is charged and the internal line contactor is closed. Any fault signals at the NE module must act, either instantaneously or delayed, interlocked with the pulse enable terminal 63 of the monitoring module and the associated axes.
S Instantaneous pulse enable withdrawal > refer to Fig. 9-6

The ready/fault signal at terminal 7273.1 of the NE module acts directly on pulse enable terminal 63 at the monitoring module. If there is a line supply fault or a fault signal, the ready signal is withdrawn at the NE module which means that the pulses of the drives after the monitoring module are cancelled after the dropout delay time of the ready relay, and the drives coast down. This interlocking cannot, e.g., be used for the line supply failure concept and also for other applications where it has a disadvantage with respect to a delayed shutdown.
9-235
05.01
S Delayed pulse enable withdrawal > refer to Fig. 9-7

Terminal 63 at the monitoring module is also only enabled via the ready/fault signal at the NE module. If the NE module signal is withdrawn, terminal 63 is only inhibited via time relay KT. This means, that the drives, e.g. for a line supply fault or a fault signal at the NE module can still only be briefly braked under specific secondary conditions: The DC link voltage must remain, when braking, within the minimum and maximum monitoring limits (refer to Section 6.1). The external +24V power supply must maintain the enable signals of terminal 65, terminal 663. For the 611 digital drive modules, the internal enable signals must be maintained via the digital drive bus of SINUMERIK 840D, 810D or 840C, or for SIMODRIVE 611 universal, communications via the PROFIBUS DP must be maintained.
Addresses
Contact addresses for fused terminals in the connection examples in Sections9.3.1 and 9.13. PHOENIX KONTACT GmbH & Co. Flachsmarktstrae 8 32825 Blomberg Tel. 05235/30 0 Fax. 05235/341200
SIBA SicherungenBau GmbH Borker Strae 22 44532 Lnen Tel. 02306/70010 Fax. 02306/700110
9-236
05.01
9 Important Circuit Information 9.4 Drive modules
9.4
9.4.1
Drive modules
Block diagram, 611 analog feed module with standard interface
X321 9 663 Pulse enable, start inhibit Relay, start inhibit AS1 AS2 Checkback signal, start inhibit Fault H1 H2 24 V, 15 V, 5 V X331 Equipment enable X351 X151 Equipment bus Controller inhibit Pulse inhibit
Optocoupler, fast pulse inhibit
RF 65
Monitoring
24V 1)
Speed controller Current controller
Temperature prealarm Ready/fault signal 2) Closedloop control
56 Setpoint 14
T > Tmax 22 Current
controlled operation
Power section Pulse distribution
9
P600
S3.6 OFF: Ready signal ON: Fault message Drift Tachometer Kp 1) TN Adaptation M nact Iact Iset X34 X35 2 1 2 1
M600
Motor temperature monitoring
Current rectification Tachometer rectification X311 PE2 PE1 U2 V2 2 W W PE
Position actual value To the NC / positioning control Position encoder (option) Indirect or direct measuring system Fig. 9-8 RLG + Tach.
Temperature sensor
V M 3 syn
1) Can be set at the front 2) Can be set at the module
Motor encoder, rotor position/ tachometer
Servomotor 1FT5
Block diagram, FD module with standard interface
9-237
05.01
9.4.2

A simplified 1axis 611A feed module is shown in block diagram 9-8. This comprises power module, control module with standard interface and analog setpoint interface for 1FT5 servomotors. Additional control modules with analog, digital and PROFIBUSDP interface > refer to Section 5.
Terminal 9
FR+ + 24V enable voltage for the internal enable signals
Terminal 663
Pulse enable / start inhibit When terminal 663 is energized, this has a double function:
S The pulse enable and inhibit act on a specific axis after 1 ms or on a module
for twoaxis modules via an optocoupler input.
The start inhibit, terminal 663 opencircuit, acts with an approx. 40 ms delay after terminal 663 is inhibited, as a result of the dropout delay of the start inhibit relay.
The start inhibit supports all of the safetyrelevant functions, refer to Section 9.5.
For pulse inhibit/start inhibit, the drives coast down unbraked. The 1axis and 2axis 611D modules with digital and 611U with PROFIBUS interface have, beyond this, also an axisspecific pulse enable. It is controlled through NC/PLC interface signals via the digital drive bus or via the PROFIBUSDP interface. The signals act with delay, corresponding to the particular cycle time.
Notice The pulse inhibit using terminal 663 for control modules with Order Nos. 6SN11180AA110AA0, 6SN11180AD110AA0 and 6SN11180AE110AA0 (old FD types) only become active approx. 40 ms after actuation after the relay drops out. For type 6SN11180....0..1, 6SN11180DM2.0AA0, 6SN1121.......1 and 6SN1122.......1, (new types), the pulse inhibit becomes effective approx. 1 ms. The different times must be observed. The older modules, with the delayed pulse inhibit after approx. 40 ms may not be used for the circuit examples, Section 9.7 , external speed monitoring = 7 ; armature shortcircuit braking = 9 and power contactors in the motor circuit =10.
9-238
05.01
Terminal 65
Controller enable The axis is enabled with terminal 65. The controller and inhibit become effective after 1 ms at the specific axes. If terminal 65 is inhibited, nset=0 is set for the drive and it is braked as follows:
S For MSD/IMM 611A, the pulses are canceled after an adjustable speed has
been fallen below. The drive is braked along the selected ramp, or if terminal 81 is simultaneously inhibited, the drive is braked along the current limit.
S For FD 611A, all of the controllers and pulses are inhibited after the set timers have expired (setting when supplied:240 ms). The drives brake along the current limit.
S For 611D/611U drives, the pulses are cancelled after a speed, which can be
set, is fallen below or after a selected timer has expired. The drive is braked along the selected limits (MD 1230, 1235, 1238). For spindles, a ramp can only be achieved using regenerative limiting (MD1237). The 611D modules do not have a hardwired terminal 65. The controller enable is controlled using the NC/PLC interface signals via the digital drive bus.
Terminals AS1, AS2
Signal contact, start inhibit The NC contact closes, max. 40 ms after terminal 663 has been inhibited
Terminal 56
Speed setpoint Analog speed setpoint input: 0 to +/10V
Terminal 14
Differential input Reference potential from terminal 56
Terminal 22
Closedloop current controlled operation
Switch S3.6
Switch setting = OFF Ready signal, switch position = ON fault signal The ready signal from the 611A standard and resolver control acts centrally at terminal 7274, ready at the NE module, if: S3.6= OFF ready signal, a) There is no fault present in the drive module and b) Terminal 65 and terminal 663 are enabled, or for S3.6 = ON fault signal there is no fault present in the drive module. Switch S6.6 for 2axis versions has the same function as for S3.6.
9-239
9 Important Circuit Information 9.5 Start inhibit in the drive modules
05.01
9.5
Start inhibit in the drive modules

Notice The start inhibit function is not a safety function in the sense of the Machinery Guidelines 89/392/EC. It only supports the measures which the user has to make.
9.5.1
Reason for using the start inhibit (IEC 204 No. 44/184/CDV)
The start inhibit function is included in the SIMODRIVE 611 drive modules. The power feed from the converter to the motor is interrupted with the start inhibit (motor rotation). This is based on Standard IEC 204 No. 44/184/CDV. The start inhibit prevents feed, main spindle or induction motor drives unexpectedly starting from standstill. This circuit macro can be used in the Safe standstill machine function. However, beforehand, the must have been brought to a complete standstill and ensured using the external machine control. This is especially valid for vertical axes without any selflocking mechanical system or without weight equalization! The remaining risk is in this case, if two errors/faults occur simultaneously in the power section; the motor briefly rotates (jolts) through a small angle (1FT motors: 4pole 90, 6pole 60, 8pole 45; induction motors: in the vicinity of the remanence, max. 1 slot pitch, which corresponds to approximately 5 and 15).1FN linear motors can, under fault conditions, continue to move through 180 electrical (approx. 56 or 72 mm incl. overshoot). The start inhibit function does not provide electrical isolation. It does not provide protection against electric shock. The complete machine or system must always be electrically isolated from the line supply through the main disconnection device (main switch) before any work is carried out on the machine or system, e.g. maintenance, service or cleaning work (refer to EN 602041; 5.3). When correctly used, the start inhibit function must be looped in in the line contactor circuit or EMERGENCY STOP circuit with the positivelydriven signal contact AS1/AS2. The associated drive must be electrically isolated from the supply if the start inhibit relay function is not plausible, referred to the machine operating mode; e.g. via the line contactor in the infeed module. The start inhibit and the associated operating mode may only be used again after the fault has been removed. As a result of a hazard analysis/risk analysis which must be carried out according to the Machinery Directive 89/392/EC and EN 292; EN 954; and EN 1050, the machinery manufacturer must configure the safety circuit for the complete machine taking into account all of the integrated components for his machine types and versions of them. This also includes the electric drives.
9-240
05.01
9.5.2
Mode of operation of the start inhibit

The inverter power module controls the current through the individual motor windings. 1FT5 motors are fed with squarewave current. A pulse generating logic clocks the 6 power transistors in a threephase oriented pulse pattern An optocoupler is provided in every transistor arm between the gating logic and the power section gating amplifier. These optocouplers provide the electrical isolation. The start inhibit acts on each module. A positivelydriven relay (permitted according to ZH1/457, TV) acts on the inverter gating on the particular drive module at the input circuits of the optocouplers. A relay contact interrupts the power supply for the optocoupler inputs. Thus, no signals can be transferred through the optocoupler. The pulse generating logic is inhibited through an additional electrically isolated arm. These two active circuits are controlled in parallel from the machine control via terminal 663 (motor start inhibit) for the drive modules or via terminal 112 (DC link controller start inhibit) for the line supply infeed modules.The status of the relay contact, located in the pulse power supply circuit, is signaled to the external adaptation circuit via a positivelydriven NC contact. The signaling contact is accessible at module terminals AS1 and AS2, and the user can interlock it with the safety control. When the start inhibit fails, these startinhibit signaling contacts must isolate the supply infeed from the supply via the power contactor (line contactor in the supply module). If the start inhibit circuit is activated, it is no longer possible to control the power transistors in a rotating field. When two power transistors are destroyed (double fault) in the most unfavorable constellation, then this results in the residual risk as described in Section 9.5.1.
Warning When the start inhibit is activated, the motor can no longer generate a torque. Drives which are not automatically clamped when powered down (e.g. vertical/ inclined axes), must be clamped using a mechanical brake.
9.5.3
Connecting the start inhibit

The start inhibit function is controlled in the drive modules using terminal 663 or in the infeed modules using terminal 112. The start inhibit relay is controlled using the internal/external +24 V enable voltage (FR+ terminal 9; FR terminal 19). When the relay is deenergized, terminal 663 is opencircuit, the start inhibit is activated. The AS1/AS2 signal contact closed indicates the condition start inhibit is effective. The circuit must be protected against overload and shortcircuit using a fuse of max. 2 A! Terminal 663 (drive) and terminal 112 (NEmodule) must be externally controlled using a failsafe signal.
9-241
05.01
Notice The start inhibit relay has maximum pullin and dropout delay times of 40 ms. Any external wiring connected at terminals AS1/AS2 must be shortcircuit proof.
9.5.4
Sequence and procedure when using the start inhibit

The drives must be shut down before terminal 663 is inhibited and the drive inhibit is activated. The drives can be shutdown, e.g. by decelerating them in a controlled fashion using the NC program, by inhibiting the drive enable terminal 64 or the axis specific controller enable terminal 65. If a fault occurs when actuating the start inhibit, then this fault must be removed before the mechanically isolating protective devices to the working zone of the machine or plant are opened. After the fault has been removed, this procedure must be repeated for the start inhibit. Under fault conditions, all of the drives, machine and plant must be shut down. If one of the following faults should occur with terminal 663 deenergized and the protective devices withdrawn, then the EMERGENCY STOP must be immediately initiated:
S The acknowledgement contact AS1/AS2 remains open, the start inhibit is
not activated.
S There is a fault in the external control circuit itself. S There is a fault in the signal lines of the acknowledge contact.
All of the drives associated with the machine/plant must be disconnected and isolated from the line supply through the line contactor. If the start inhibit control has been correctly integrated into the external safety related drive control and has been checked to ensure correct functioning, then the drives in the separate working zone of the machine are protected against undesirable starting, and personnel can enter or intervene in the hazardous zone which has been defined.
Notice The relevant regulations for settingoperation must be taken into account.
9-242
05.01
9.5.5
Checking the start inhibit

The following checks must always be made at the first startup and when possible must be repeated at certain intervals during the operating lifetime. A check should also be made after longer production standstills. Each individual drive as well as the NE module must be checked. The check must be made by qualified personnel taking into account the necessary safety measures:
S The drive pulses must be inhibited by withdrawing the voltage at terminal

663. Furthermore, the acknowledge contact AS1/AS2 of the start inhibit must close. The drive then coasts down.
S Disabling the protective devices, e.g. opening the protective doors while the
drive is running. The drive must be braked as quickly as possible and then powered down. This must not result in a hazardous condition.
S All possible fault situations, which could occur, must be individually

simulated in the signal lines between the acknowledge contacts and the external control as well as the signal evaluation functions of this control e.g. by disconnecting the start inhibit monitoring circuit at terminals AS1AS2.
S The monitoring circuit AS1 AS2 must be disconnected.

For all of the simulated fault situations, the line contactor must disconnected all of the machine or plant drives from the line supply. If there is a connection between the power supply NE or monitoring module, terminal 500/M500 to the power DC link P600/M500, this must be safely and reliably disconnected at the same time with the line contactor, e.g. using contactors.
9-243
9 Important Circuit Information 9.6 Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611
05.01
9.6
9.6.1
=1/1 =1/2
Application examples with SIMODRIVE 611

Block diagram, application example
Supply, PLC, NC
PLC

Filter Reactor
+ NC 24 V DC
=4/1
PS
Pre charging Line supply
=4/2 Drives on/off/shutdown in an emergency (line contactor)
Control off/on On drive Off drives EMERGENCY STOP n > nx MSD End position
5/15/24 V
NE module
Equipment bus
G P600 M G M G M600
n > nx
=4/3
=4/1 MSD module FD module (2-axis module)

PLC
MSD start/stop (start inhibit) t(v) > 1s FD start/stop (start inhibit) t(v) < 1s
Start drive Start enable Stop drive t(v) changeover when setting up
E E A
G M
FD module
=5/1Operating modes Automatic/setup Enable
Automatic Settingup Enable Setpoint changeover when setting up Position switch Request enable n = 0 MSD Spindle encoder
Interlocking with drive control (systemspecific)
=6/1
M M
Userside machine control =7/1
Protective door monitoring
& t(v) NC program Start PLC O PLC Logic PLC I Stop
MSD External speed monitoring n=0/n>nx (+)
MSD
Automatic/settingup Enable () End position Move away from the end position (+) () End position Move away from the end position Off/on drive Off/on drive
=8/1 End position monitoring
=9/1 Armature shortcircuit braking n-setpoint NC/FM (analog) Machining program Position encoder 1 to n indirect or direct measuring system Fig. 9-9 Monitor/ machine control panel =10/1 Power contactors in the motor circuit
Block diagram, application example
9-244
05.01
9.6.2
Function description, application example
Application
An overview of an application example for a complete, driverelated control of a machine with SIMODRIVE 611A drive components with analog setpoint interface is shown in the block diagram, Section 9.6.1. Refer to Section 9.8 for versions with SIMODRIVE 611 digital and 611 universal. In the following Section 9.7 the individual applications and functions of the drive control will be described in detail using circuit examples =1 to =10. Circuit examples =1 to =3 are intended for simple machine applications. The circuit examples =1 and =4 to =10 describe all of the essential functions which are used for a machine tool. The circuit concept is designed so that the individual control groups of the basic function in circuit example =4 can be used for basic up to more complex applications graduated to the task in hand.
S Power up/powering down/shutting down drives in an emergency; start/stop/

safe standstill using the additional functions
S Operating modes select automatic/settingup operation with enable =5 S Protective door monitoring with tumbler mechanism =6 S External speed monitoring =7 S Limit switch end position monitoring =8 S Armature shortcircuit braking =9 and S Power contactors in the motor circuit =10
When the control is expanded, stepbystep, up to its fully expanded stage, the bridged terminal connections in the circuit examples must be removed, and the necessary interlocking and monitoring circuits inserted. In the application example, Fig. 9-9, the 611A drive group comprises a 1PH7 main spindle drive and three 1FT5 feed drives using as an example, a machine tool. The driverelated control essentially comprises the safetyrelated, twochannel hardware control and the associated PLC functions. The PLC control handles the coordinated drive control using logical interlocking functions, but does not have a safetyrelated function. The NC/FM (positioning control) with the setpoint and actual value interface as well as the userside machine control is not discussed in the following. This is the reason that they are only shown in principle.
S Control category according to EN 9541

The twochannel system structure of controls =4 to =6 complies with control category 3 according to EN 9541 when the individual components are correctly used. This means that if a single fault/error occurs in the system, the safety function must be maintained.
9-245
05.01
The control categories of the other circuits =7 to =10 must be evaluated by the user. This depends on how the thirdparty components/monitoring devices, which he selected, are used integrated in the basic controls in a safetyrelated fashion.
Note For machines, which are to be classified in a lower Category, e.g. 1 or 2 acc. to EN 9541, after a hazard analysis/risk assessment or type C standard, the control can essentially be derived from these circuit examples and implemented in a somewhat simpler, singlechannel system structure!
This also applies to subareas/subfunctions of a machine, which can be implemented, e.g. according to type C standards also with a lower or also higher control category, deviating from the basic machine. For instance, after hazard analysis/risk assessment, it may also be necessary that a hydraulic/pneumatic clamping device in the working zone must be controlled using a twohand control device in compliance with Category 4.
Functions
S Circuit examples =4 to =10

The two channel system structure in the application example is achieved: First shutdown path: The energy to the drive motors is disconnected via the start inhibit functions in the drive modules. Shutdown is realized via terminal 663. The positivelydriven checkback signal contact of the start inhibit relay via terminals AS1AS2 intervenes in the EMERGENCY STOP circuit of the safety device. This is cyclically monitored. Refer to Section 9.5 for a detailed description of the start inhibit. Second shutdown path: The line contactor in the NE module electrically disconnects the DC link of the drive modules from the supply. Shutdown is realized via terminal 48 and at the same time, the contactor coil is opened, in a safetyrelated fashion using terminals NS1 NS2. The drive is shutdown, e.g. when stopping in an emergency, as a result of fault messages/signals from the drive system or the start inhibit monitoring when a fault condition develops. The positivelydriven NC contacts 111 213 of the line contactor is monitored after each switchoff cycle in the feedback circuit of the EMERGENCY STOP safety device. Refer to Section 9.2.4 for a detailed description of the line contactor. For an EMERGENCY STOP, the drives are stopped in Stop Category 1 according to EN 602041; 9.2.2: Controlled stopping, the energy feed is only interrupted when the drive has come to a standstill. The circuit examples =2 and =3, included in Section 9.7 can be used for basic and medium complexity applications.
9-246
05.01
S Circuit example =2:

When the drives are powered up and powered down, the complete drive group, including line contactor and start inhibits are switched through two channels in a safetyrelated fashion. The frequency with which the NE module can be powered up per unit time is limited as a result of the precharging circuit to ramp up the DC line voltage at the capacitors This circuit is not suitable, e.g. for machines where the protective door is frequently opened or for the settingup mode where the enable function is frequently used.
S Circuit example = 3:
Using this circuit, one or several drives can be selectively stopped in the drive group, e.g. using a keyactuated switch, limit switch, light barriers etc., in a safetyrelated fashion and brought into the safe standstill operating condition. Beforehand, the drives must be safely stopped via the NC control. This circuit can also be used in conjunction with the basic control = 4. The circuit examples =2 and =3 are used to essentially understand the more complex control functions from circuit =4 onwards.
Note All of the following circuit examples do not include any safetyrelated or other machine specific functions which may be required, with the machine control on the user side.
9-247
05.01
9.6.3
Safety technology and standards
Objectives
The objective of safety technology is to keep the potential hazards for man and the environment as low as possible by applying the relevant technology. However, this should be achieved without imposing unnecessary restrictions on industrial prooduction, the use of machines and the production of chemical products. By applying internationally harmonized regulations, man and the environment should be protected to the same degree in every country. At the same time, differences in competitive environments, due to different safety requirements, should be eliminated.
Basic principles of European legislation
Legislation states that we must focus our efforts ...at preserving and protecting the quality of the environment, and protecting human health through preventive actions (Council Directive 96/82/EG on the control of major accident hazards involving dangerous substances Seveso II). Legislation demands that this and similar goals are achieved for various areas (areas which are legislated) in the EC Directives. In order to achieve these goals, legislation places demands on the operators and users of plants, and the manufacturers of equipment and machines. It also assigns the responsibility for possible injury or damage.
EC Directives
The EC Directives provide a new global concept (new approach, global approach):
S EC Directives only contain general safety goals, and define fundamental

safety requirements.
S EC Directives specify that Member Stages recognize each others national

regulations and laws. The EC Directives have the same degree of importance, i.e. if several Directives apply for a specific piece of equipment or device, then the requirements of all of the relevant Directives have to be met. For a machine with electrical equipment, the following apply.
S Machinery Directive 98/392 EC S LowVoltage Directive73/23/ECG S EMC Directive 89/336 EC

Machinery Directive
The European Machinery Directive applies for all machinery. The minimum requirements are defined in the Appendix I of the Directive. More detailed information is provided through the European, harmonized standards, types A, B and C.
9-248
05.01
However, Standards have not been drawn up for all types of machinery. There are several Draft Standards and ratified Standards, e.g. type C Standards, for machine tools in metal processing/finishing, robots and automated production systems. In many cases, these standards specify Category 3 in compliance with EN 9541 for the safetyrelated controls. The basic requirement of this category is as follows: Tolerance to singlefaults with partial fault detection. Generally, the requirement can be fulfilled using a twochannel system structure (redundant system). Subareas of a machine control can also be classified in other Categories B, 1, 2, or 4 in compliance with EN 9541.
Hazard analysis and risk assessment
According to the Machinery Directive 89/392/EC, the manufacturer or the party marketing a machine or a safety component is responsible in carrying out a hazard analysis in order to determine all of the hazards associated with his/her particular machine or safety component. He or she must design and build the machine or safety component, taking into consideration this analysis. A risk evaluation must indicate remaining risks, which must then be documented. Among others, the following Standards EN 292 General Design Principles for Safety of Machinery; EN 1050 Safety of machinery, design guidelines to assess risk and EN 954 Safetyrelated parts of controls should be considered when applying techniques and methods to evaluate these risks.
CE conformance
The machinery manufacturer or the party marketing the machinery, domiciled in the EC or its nominated party must declare CE conformance for the complete machine.
Note This list of Directives and legislation are just a selection to determine essential goals and principles. This list does not claim to be complete.
9-249
9 Important Circuit Information 9.7 Circuit examples =1 to =10 with SIMODRIVE 611 analog
05.01
9.7
Circuit examples =1 to =10 with SIMODRIVE 611 analog

Fig. 9-10 =1 Cabinet supply, PLC,NC; Sheet 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-11 =1 Cabinet supply, PLC,NC; Sheet 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-12 =2 Powering up/powering down/stopping drives in an emergency; Sheet 1/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-13 =2 Powering up/powering down/stopping drives in an emergency; Sheet 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-14 =3 Starting/stopping/safe standstill for drives; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-15 =4 Powering up/powering down/stopping in an emergency. Start/stop/safe standstill; Sheet 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-16 =4 Powering up/powering down/stopping in an emergency. Start/stop/safe standstill; Sheet 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-17 =4 Powering up/powering down/stopping in an emergency. Start/stop/safe standstill; Sheet 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-18 =5 Automatic/setting up modes with enable circuit; Sheet 1/1 Fig. 9-19 =6 Drives, automatic operation with protective door monitoring; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-20 =7 Drives, external speed monitoring MSD; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-21 =8 Drives, limit switch end position monitoring; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-22 =9 Drives, armature shortcircuit braking FD; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . . . Fig. 9-23 =10 Drives, power contactors in the motor circuit; Sheet 1/1 . . . . . . . 9-251 9-252 9-253 9-254 9-255 9-256 9-257 9-258 9-259 9-260 9-261 9-262 9-263 9-264
9-250
05.01
Fig. 9-10
=1 Cabinet supply, PLC,NC; Sheet 1/2
9-251
05.01
Fig. 9-11
=1 Cabinet supply, PLC,NC; Sheet 2/2
9-252
05.01
Fig. 9-12
=2 Powering up/powering down/stopping in an emergency; Sheet 1/2
9-253
05.01
Fig. 9-13
=2 Powering up/powering down/stopping in an emergency; Sheet 2/2
9-254
05.01
Fig. 9-14
=3 Start/stop/safe standstill; Sheet 1/1
9-255
05.01
Fig. 9-15
=4 Powering up/powering down/stopping in an emergency; start/stop/safe standstill; Sheet 1/3
9-256
05.01
Fig. 9-16
9-257
05.01
Fig. 9-17
9-258
05.01
Fig. 9-18
=5 Automatic/setting up mode with enable; Sheet 1/1
9-259
05.01
Fig. 9-19
=6 Automatic mode with protective door monitoring; Sheet 1/1
9-260
05.01
Fig. 9-20
=7 External speed monitoring, MSD; Sheet 1/1
9-261
05.01
Fig. 9-21
=8 Limit switch end position monitoring; Sheet 1/1
9-262
05.01
Fig. 9-22
=9 Armature shortcircuit braking FD; Sheet 1/1
9-263
05.01
Fig. 9-23
=10 Power contactors in the motor circuit; Sheet 1/1
9-264
05.01
9.7.1
Function description, circuit examples =1 to =10
Higherlevel information and functions

Connection information, technical data, equipment selection When configuring/engineering the drive components, safety devices, contactors etc., listed in the circuit examples, it is mandatory to observe associated connection information and instructions, technical data associated with the current Operating and Planning Guides as well as Catalogs and Applications Manuals. Selecting switching devices
S SIGUARD 3TK28 / 3TK29 safety combinations;circuit examples and the

Autostart and Monitored start functions are described in the Application Manual Safety Integrated, Order No. E20001A110M103.
S SIRIUS 3 RT1 and 3 RH11 power and auxiliary contactors must be selected
with positivelydriven auxiliary contacts in compliance with ZH1/457, IEC 6094751.
S Contact reliability
The auxiliary contacts, switching contacts of the switching devices and the equipment to isolate from the line supply must be capable of reliably switching low switching currents v17 V, 5 mA.
S Overvoltage limiting
All of the switching devices, coils, inductances, brakes etc. must be provided with RC elements, varistors, diodes or diode combinations, if these are not already integrated in the devices. These are used to dampen overvoltages when switchingoff for EMC reasons and the ensure the functional safety. This also applies to switching devices which are controlled from PLC outputs.
Note The selected overvoltage limiting influences the switchoff delay of the devices. This influence must be taken into consideration when engineering the drive system. Refer to Catalog NK LowVoltage Switchgear when selecting devices and for technical data
9-265
05.01
Functions/safety aspects Definition of the terminology used Powering down in an emergency EMERGENCY STOP and stopping in an emergency EMERGENCY STOP
S Actions made in an emergency situation according to EN 602041 (VDE

0113, Part 1): 199811, Section 9.2.5.4 should be interpreted as follows:
S Powering down in an emergency: In Stop Category 0 acc. to EN

602041;9.2.2, the drive is stopped by immediately disconnecting the energy to the machine drive elements (i.e. uncontrolled stopping). This type of shutdown is generally interpreted as EMERGENCY OFF.
S Shutting down in an emergency: In Stop Category 1 in accordance with

EN602041; 9.2.2 the drive is shutdown in a controlled fashion, whereby energy is still fe to the machine drive elements is kept in order to stop the motion. The energy is only disconnected when standstill has been reached. This type of shutdown is generally defined as EMERGENCY STOP
S In the circuit examples, the EMERGENCY STOP function is used for shutdown in an emergency. The EMERGENCY STOP pushbuttons act through two channels to shutdown in control Category 3 according to EN 9541 using the 3TK28060BB4/3TK28070BB4 safety switching devices. When required, the 3TK28060BB4 switching device allows an EMERGENCY STOP button to be connected in a crosscircuit proof version, Category 4 acc. to EN9541.
S Braking using the drive inhibit, terminal 64, along the current limit.
By inhibiting terminal 64, drive enable at the NE module or monitoring module, the drives are stopped as quickly as possible along the selected current limit (torque limit)/ramp of the drive module.
Notice For applications, where a spindle drive may not be braked along the current limit for safety reasons, terminal 81 rampfunction generator fast stop must remain energized when shutting down in an emergency. This means that the drive can be stopped in a controlled fashion along an adjustable setpoint ramp.
S Regenerative feedback power NE module

Generally, the NE module is dimensioned according to the rated output of the connected motor, reduced by a coincidence factor. When braking along the current limit, it should be observed that the braking power should not exceed the peak regenerative feedback power of the I/R modules (refer to Table 6.3) or the braking power of the pulsed resistors in the UI modules. For borderline cases, larger NE modules should be used, or additional pulsed resistor modules with external pulsed resistor.
S Setpoint and position actual value interfaces

A complete drive module with power module and control section with Standard interface and analog setpoint interface for 1FT5 motors is shown in the block diagram in Section 9.4.1. The setpoint is controlled via terminals 56/14. The setpoint and position actual value interface of the NC control, e.g. 840C analog, is only shown in principle in circuit example =1 These are no longer discussed in other circuits
9-266
05.01
The control modules are described in detail in Section 5.
S Motor holding brake

The holding brake must be controlled so that it is coordinated as far as the timing is concerned, e.g. using the PLC logic as a function of the pulse cancellation, controller enable and speed setpoint input. The time taken for the holding brake to mechanically open and close must be taken into account here. If the control has not been optimally set, this results in increased wear and premature reduction in the braking performance. In the circuit examples, in addition to being controlled from the PLC, the holding brake is disconnected with dropout delay per hardware for a drive stop. This means that a PLC fault cannot result in the brake being erroneously controlled when the drive is stopped. Depending on the particular application, it must be decided when stopping in an emergency, whether the brake is switchedoff with a delay or instantaneously. Using an internal sequence control, 611U closedloop controls allow a holding brake to be controlled in a coordinated fashion (refer to Description of Functions SIMODRIVE 611 universal). Damping devices must be externally connected to the holding brakes to dampen overvoltages. For a detailed description, refer to the reference /PJM/ for SIMODRIVE motors MSD and FD.
S Safe standstill
After the drives have been stopped, these are in the safe standstill operating condition as the energy feed to the motors has been safely disconnected. When the start inhibit is activated, the pulses are safely cancelled in the drive modules. Features
S Motors cannot undesirably start. S The energy feed to the motor is safely interrupted. S The motor is not electrically isolated from the drive module or DC link of the
drive converter. The machinery manufacturer must apply suitable measures to prevent undesirable motion after the energy feed to the motor has been disconnected. Secondary conditions, e.g. for vertical axes Safe standstill is only guaranteed if the kinetic energy, stored in the machine cannot result in unpredictable movement of the drives/axes. Movement can occur, e.g. as a result of vertical or inclined axes without weight equalization, as a result of nonsymmetrical rotating bodies or workpieces. The motor holding brake supports the safe standstill operating condition. Depending on the hazard analysis, additional measures may be required for personnel and machinery protection when manually intervening in the automatic mode, when traversing in the settingup mode as well during service and repair work. Equipment which is used in parallel with the holding brake, can be used to prevent axes falling or to safely clamp axes at a specific position. This redundant equipment can be e.g. electromechanical or pneumatic clamping devices with cyclic monitoring.
9-267
05.01
Circuit example =1 Cabinet supply, NC, PLC

S Cabinet layout and design regulations:
When designing cabinets to accommodate drive components, among others, the following essential regulations and specifications must be observed: DIN EN 604391 (VDE 0660 Part 500) 200008 LowVoltage Switchgear Combinations DIN EN 602041 (VDE 0113 Part 1) 199811 Electrical Equipment of Machinery, Safety DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 198303 Protection against Electric Shock. EMC and LowVoltage Directive Enclosure degree of protection IP 54 or corresponding to the ambient conditions. Selecting equipment:
S Q1 device to disconnect the equipment from the line supply (main switch)
with leading auxiliary contactor when disconnecting Section, refer to Section 7.1.7 and Catalog NSK The line supply disconnecting device electrically disconnects the equipment from the power supply.
S G11 SITOPpower power supply unit for 24 V DC, refer to Catalog KT 10.1.
The power supply and the connected circuits must fulfill the requirements of PELV (extra low function voltage with protective separation). We recommend currentlimiting regulated power supply units, e.g. SITOP power.
S F11F14 m.c.b.s 5SX or 5SY, refer to Catalog I2.1. The potential assignment of the circuit has been randomly selected. The max. permissible values of the protective elements must be carefully observed when fusing/protecting the safety switching devices and circuits.
S F21F23 line fuses for the NE modules, assignment, refer to Section 7.1.1
and 9.2.2.
S A21 line filter, refer to Section 7.2.1 and 7.2.3 and Catalog NC 60 S L21 line commutating reactor, refer to Section 7.1.3 and Catalog NC 60 S A25 NC SINUMERIK 840C control with analog setpoint interface and PLC
CPU 135WD, refer to Catalog NC 60.
9-268
05.01
Circuit example =2 Powering up/powering down/ stopping drives in an emergency
Application
Drive group comprising an NE module, three FD modules 611 A, control modules with standard interface and analogsetpoint interface for 1FT5 motors. This circuit concept can, e.g. be used for simple drive controls. When the drives are powered up and powered down, the complete drive group is switched through two channels in a safetyrelated fashion using line contactors and start inhibits.
Functions
Drives on
S Keyactuated switchS21, control on.

The poweroff circuit in front of the EMERGENCY STOP safety switching device K21 must be closed by the following conditions:
S Contactor K25 energized, NE module ready. (ready conditions, NE module,

refer to Section 9.2.2!) When the control is switchedon, the ready signal is still not present. This means that the PLC output A25 must be set to 1 via the PLC logic so that the poweroff circuit is closed through contactor K25. After the group has been powered up via contactor K21, if there is no fault message, the ready signal is received via PLC input E11. The ready monitoring is in the poweroff circuit now becomes active through the PLC logic. The feedback circuit from contactor K25 is now monitored through PLC E25.
S Contact =A1A25/12 NC ready at the NC control must have switched. S Interlocking circuit, terminal 3536 closed. S Feedback circuit, contactor K21 is closed:
The line contactor, the start inhibits and contactor K27 for the brake control are monitored to ensure that they are in the safe off condition at powerup cycle. When required, safetyrelevant functions associated with the user side machine control can also be incoroprated in the feedback circuit
S Pushbutton S23, drives on

Contactor K21 is energized and latches. The drive group is powered up. After the DC link has been precharged, the line contactor in the NE module is energized. The ready signal is received as long as there is no fault message. NC program, start/stop
S Pushbutton S29/S28
The axisspecific controller enable signals are activated using pushbutton S29 NCprogram start and the NC machining program is started. The drives are brought to a controlled standstill at the end of the program or using the pushbutton S28 stop.
9-269
05.01
Drives off The drives, if they have not already been shutdown by the NC program, are braked as quickly as possible and stopped along the selected current limit of the drive modules using pushbutton S24 EMERGENCY STOP or S22 off. Terminal 64, drive enable is inhibited and braking initiated using the instantaneous contact from contactor K21. After braking has been completed, the line contactor is opened in a safetyrelated fashion through two channels via terminal 48 NS1NS2 with a reliable overlapping shutdown time using the delayed dropout contacts of K21. The start inhibit functions become active by inhibiting terminal 663. -Any fault messages/signals of the drive system, logically combined and interlocked using the PLC logic, can be used, depending on the application, to brake along the current limit, or for controlled braking via a setpoint ramp. The off pushbutton also acts on PLCE22. The PLC logic can therefore be used to evaluate which power down command caused the drive group to be shut down. The PLC logic can also be used to shut down the drive group, independent of the ready signal of the NE module, using contactor K25. Holding brake The holding brake is controlled, coordinated in time by the PLC logic via PLC A27. When the drives are stopped, the brake is also additionally deenergized per hardware in a safetyrelated fashion using a delayed dropout contact of contactor K21. This means that a PLC fault cannot result in the brake being incorrectly controlled when the drive is stationary. Temperature monitoring Input PLCE12 is energized when the temperature monitoring responds, either as a result of a drive module overtemperature and/or a motor via relay 5.15.3 at the NE module. Depending on the application, the drives must be shut down, either instantaneously or with delay, e.g. using PLCA25 and contactor K25 via the logical interlocking in the PLC.
Circuit example =3 Starting/stopping/safe standstill for drives

Application The control is use for applications, where one or several drives must be selectively shutdown in an operational drive group using safety technology. A drive, in a drive group, can be shut down in a safetyrelated fashion using a twochannel keyactuated switch or, e.g. also using light barriers or limit switches. Beforehand, the drive must have been safely shut down via the NC control. The safe standstill operating condition is achieved using the start inhibit
9-270
05.01
Functions Start drives The twochannel stop circuit in front of safety switching device K11 must be closedvia keyactuated switch S11 and the EMERGENCY STOP circuit, =2K21. Contactor K11 is energized (switched in) with monitored start using pushbutton S12 start and closed feedback circuit. It latches. Terminal 65 controller enable and terminal 663 pulse enable are energized The drive is traversed and shut down in a controlled fashion using the NC program Stop drives The switching deviceK11 is opened via keyactuated switch S11 or an EMERGENCY STOP. The instantaneous contact deenergizes terminal 65 controller enable and the drive is braked along the current limit. Terminal 663 is deenergized, which activates the start inhibit via the delayed dropout contact K11. Start inhibit monitoring The start inhibit monitoring, terminals 3536 is effective in the EMERGENCY STOP circuit of contactor =K2K21. Under normal operating conditions, when the drive is being stopped, the NC contact AS1AS2 of the start inhibit relay should first be closed before the NO contact of contactor K13 opens. To realize this, the contactor coil K13 must be provided with a diode to extend the contactor dropout delay. For an erroneous start inhibit, the monitoring circuit opens and shuts down the complete drive group via the line contactor. The start inhibit is cyclically and actively monitored after every stop. Holding brake Function, similar to circuit =2
Circuit example =4 Powering up/powering down/stopping drives in an emergency; start/stop/safe standstill

Application Drive group comprising NE module, MSD module for 1PH7 motor and three FD modules 611A control modules with standard interface and analog setpoint interface for 1FT5 motors. The circuit =4 is the basis circuit for the driverelated control, e.g. a machine tool. The control can be expanded in a modular fashion using the following circuit components =5 to =10 with the necessary interlocking and monitoring circuits and the applicationspecific supplements/options. This means that it can be individually adapted to the particular application. Functions Drives on (NE module)
S Keyactuated switch S21 control on.

The poweroff circuit in front of the EMERGENCY STOP safety switching device K21 must be closed using the following conditions:
9-271
05.01
S The interlocking circuits of the subsequent expansions to circuits =7 to =9

are jumpered.
S Contactor K25 energized and contact =A1A25/12 NC ready is closed

The poweron conditions are almost comparable with those of circuit =2. The ready signal of the MSD module PLCE15 must be additionally logically combined with the ready signal of the NE module PLCE11 in the PLC.
S Pushbutton S23, drives on

Contactor K21 is energized and latches. Initially, only the NE module is powered up. After the DC link has been precharged, the line contactor is closed. As long as there are no fault messages at the NE module and at the FD modules (switch, ready/fault message is set to fault message), the ready signal is output.
Start drives (drive modules)
S The NE module must be powered up. The stop circuit in front of the safety
switching device K31 must be closed. The interlocking circuits of the subsequent expansions to circuits =5 and =7 are jumpered
S When the feedback circuit is closed, contactors K31 with expansion device
S32 and contactor K35, K33, K36 close and latch through pushbutton S32, start drives (monitored start).
S At the same time, terminal 63, central pulse enable, terminal 64 drive ena-
ble at the NE module and terminal 663 pulse enable are energized for the drive modules which withdraws the start inhibit signals.
NC program start/stop
S Pushbutton S29/S28
The axisspecific controller enable signals are activated via pushbutton S29 NC program start and the machining program is started. The drives are brought to a controlled standstill at the end of the program or using the pushbutton S28 stop.
Stop drives
S The drives, assuming that these still have not been shut down via the NC
program are braked down to standstill as fast as possible along the selected current limit via the twochannel pushbutton S31 stop drives.
S The instantaneous contact of contactor K31 deenergizes terminal 64

drive enable. After the drives come to a standstill, terminal 663 is deenergized and the start inhibits are active via the delayed dropout contacts of safety switching devices K32 and K35.
S The stopping times are adapted to the different braking times of the MSD
and FD drives and must reliably and safely covers these, e.g. MSD 5 s ; FD 0.5 s.
9-272
05.01
Start inhibit monitoring The start inhibit monitoring, terminals 3738 acts in the EMERGENCY STOP circuit in front of contactor K21. Under standard operating conditions, when the drives stop, the NC contact AS1AS2 of the drive inhibit relay in the drive modules must first be closed before the NO contacts of contactors K33 and K36 open. To realize this, the coils of these contactors must be provided with a diode to extend the contactor dropout delay. If the start inhibit is erroneous, the monitoring circuit opens, the EMERGENCY STOP contactor K21 drops out and powers down the complete drive group via the line contactor. The start inhibits are cyclically and actively monitored after each stopping operation.
Drives off
S The drives are braked to a standstill as fast as possible along the current
limit via pushbutton EMERGENCY STOP S24 or Off S22. The function is similar to circuit =2. After the spindle drive braking time has expired, the drive group is shut down via contactors K31/K32, i.e. the line contactor drops out and the start inhibit functions become active.
Holding brake The control is similar to circuit =2 Temperature monitoring The function similar to circuit =2. The temperature monitoring of the spindle drive must additionally evaluated via PLCE13 and E14.
Circuit example =5 Drives, automatic/settingup

operating mode with enable
Application For most machines/plants, the operating mode changeover is used, in order, e.g. to be able to traverse drives with a monitored, reduced speed in the setting up machine mode. In this operating mode, other subareas must be shut down in a safetyrelated fashion due to potential hazards. The operator must enable drive operation in the setting up mode with reduced speed. This enable signal can come, e.g. depending on the risk assessment, from a secure location outside the machine hazardous zone or from a handheld terminal with additional EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton in the machine working zone.
Notice The user must carefully observe special technological and machinespecific regulations and standards to remain in compliance with personnel and machinery protection legislation. Furthermore, the residual risks must be evaluated, e.g. as a result of vertical axes.
9-273
05.01
Functions Operating modes The operating mode selector switch S15 must be able to locked as keyactuated switch or another version must be used which can be disabled.
Notice The operating mode may only be changed over when the drives are stationary and this changeover may not result in a potentially dangerous machine condition.
Automatic mode The interlocking circuits, terminals 5152/5354/5556/5758/511512 must be inserted in the circuit =4. The interlocking circuit, terminals 611612/613614, is closed. Keyactuated switch S15 is set to automatic; contactor K15 energized. The monitoring circuit, drives stop, in front of contactor =4K31 is closed via terminals 5354/5556. This means that the drives can be started under the power on conditions, specified in circuit example =4, using the pushbutton, start drives =4S32. Settingup operation Keyactuated switch S15 is set to settingup, contactor K15 deenergized, contactor K16 pulled in. The monitoring circuit, terminals 5354/5556 are open. This means that the drives cannot be started. By opening the monitoring circuit, terminals 511512, pushbutton =4S32, start drives is not effective in the settingup mode. The dropout delay for the contactor =4K32, for the shutdown time of the spindle drive, is changed over from e.g. 5 s to the shorter time for FD drives, e.g. 0.5 s, via interlocking circuit, terminals 5758. Under fault conditions, the complete drive group is powered down, after this shortened time.When changing over to settingup, in addition, the speed setpoint for the drives is reduced via PLC E18. The speeds and feed velocity should therefore be reduced to values permitted in accordance with Type C standard or the hazard analysis.
Notice The setpoint limiting is not a safetyrelated function.
Enabling function The safety switching device K11 and contactors K13/K14 are switched in via pushbutton S11, enable (pushbutton with two positions), under the assumption that the feedback circuit is closed. The interlocking circuit is, in turn, closed through terminals 5354/5556. A start pulse must be generated via PLCA17 using PLCE17 with time delay >= 80 ms. Contactor K17 briefly pulls in and provides, via terminal 5152 the start command for contactors =4K31, K32, K33, K35 and K36. The start inhibits are withdrawn and therefore the drives are enabled in a safetyrelated fashion as long as the enable button is pressed.
9-274
05.01
The selected drives can now be individually moved with reduced parameters via the non safetyrelated PLC function keys in conjunction with the hardware enable
Notice It is not permissible that motion can be started when only the enable button is pressed. Note: By deenergizing terminal 81, rampfunction generator fast stop, after each enable command, the induction spindle motor must be again magnetized and therefore runs up with a delay w 0.5 s.
The drives can be shut down in a safetyrelated fashion by releasing the enable button when hazardous operating conditions occur, when the PLC function pushbuttons fail or for other unpredictable situations.
Notice For drives with high dynamic response with inadmissible speed increases, under fault conditions, potential hazards can occur as a result of human response times and the switching delay of the enable device. These potential hazards must be reduced by using additional measures, e.g. safe speed monitoring.Various type C standards, e.g. for machine tools require that the spindle drive speed is safely monitored in the settingup mode.
9
Circuit example =6 Drives, automatic operation with protective door monitoring
Application The working zone of a machine, in the automatic mode, is mechanically isolated using a closed protective door which can be moved. In the circuit example, the protective door is secured against being opened when the drives are operational or for hazardous operating conditions, using a position switch with tumbler mechanism. This tumbler mechanism is interlocked using springforce with sealed auxiliary release. Automatic drive operation is only enabled if the protective door is closed and interlocked using the position switch. Depending on the hazard analysis, the user must decide whether, e.g. second limit switch is additionally required for door monitoring. The protective door cannot be opened as long as there is still a hazardous condition, e.g. if the drives are still moving. The enable is realized with time delay after the drive with the longest braking time is safely shutdown or optionally using the standstill signal from an external speed monitoring in circuit =7. For several applications, e.g. if personnel can enter the working zone of a machine for safety reasons, the protective door is provided with a tumbler mechanism using a position switch, interlocked with solenoid force. If the line supply or control voltage fails, this position switch can release the protective door and it can be opened.
9-275
05.01
Functions Request protective door release The drives must first be shut down using pushbutton =4S31 drive stop or optionally, e.g. at the end of the NC program by the output of an NC auxiliary function, PLCA18 controls contactor K18. The protective door release is requested using pushbutton S15. Contactor K15 pulls in, logically combined using the PLC logic, if the drives are shut down and powered down, e.g. contactors =4K33 and =4K36 are deenergized. PLC logic: PLCA15 = 1, if =4E33 and =4E36 = 0 signal. When expanded using an external MSD speed monitoring, circuit =7, the PLC logic must be adapted: PLCA15 = 1, if =4E36 = 0 and =7E11 = 1 signal. With the protective door release request, in the secured working zone of the machine, all of the hazardous motion and other potential hazards associated with the users machine control must be shutdown. Finally, shutdown must be made in a safetyrelated fashion via the released or opened protective door. Protective door release The protective door is released via contactor K16 if the following conditions are fulfilled:
S Contactor K15 is energized S Drives, delayed stop, contactors =4K33 and =4K36 deenergized S MSD standstill signal n act < n min via relay =4K11. S Interlocking circuit on the user side closed via terminals 601602.
Optional:
S External standstill monitoring via terminals 7778 closed.

The interlocking solenoid of the door position switch S11 is energized and the safety switching device K11 and contactors K13/K14 deenergized via the position monitoring of the solenoids. The drives are shut down in a safetyrelated fashion through two channels via interlocking circuit terminals 611612/613614. The protective door is initially released but is still closed, relay K17 energized. This means that nonhazardous partialfunctions of the userside machine control can still be executed via the PLC. Opening the protective door By opening the protective door, the protective door safety circuit is opened via the actuator of the door position switch S11 in parallel to position monitoring of the solenoids. Closing the protective door The protective door must be closed. The contactors K15/K16 are deenergized and the protective door is interlocked again via pushbutton S16 interlock protective door. The interlocking circuit is reclosed via terminals 611612/613614 which means that in the selected automatic mode, the drives can be rereleased using pushbutton =4S32 start. For protective doors, which are only seldomly opened, we recommend that the control is adapted so that before the drives are powered up, the correct functioning of the position switch is checked by opening and closing the door again.
9-276
05.01
Circuit example =7 External speed monitoring, spindle drive

Application Several type C standards demand safe speed monitoring for the functions:
S Standstill monitoring for a spindle drive to release a protective door S Speed monitoring functions for max. speeds or velocities in the settingup
mode, e.g. 50 min1 or in the automatic mode, depending on the chuck size or the clamped workpiece as a result of the maximum permissible clamping and centrifugal forces. The max. limit is set, e.g. using a selector switch which can be locked. The speed is automatically monitored for zero speed when the automatic mode is cancelled or when the protective door is opened. The settingup speed (crawl speed) is enabled with the enable signal. After the enable signal has been withdrawn, the speed is again monitored for standstill after a delay. The speed sensing for the monitoring device e.g. be either realized using an incremental encoder or two proximity switches mounted onto the spindle. The device to provide the speed monitoring can be purchased from various manufacturers which is the reason that it is only shown in principle without any precise connection designations. The user must incorporate the device used into his control, taking into account the safetyrelated requirements and the manufacturers data.
Note The monitoring function of the device should be proven using an acceptance test and documented !
Functions Standstill monitoring The speed monitoring device is actively switched in via the control voltage. Contact A11/terminals 7778 at the monitoring unit is closed, via the safe standstill signal of the spindle drive and the door release is released in circuit =6. Therefore, the time until the protective door has been released can be significantly shortened with respect to the delayed release using contactor =4K33 MSD Stop. In this case, contact =4K33/8182 must be jumpered in circuit =6. For NC machining programs with low spindle speeds, the time for the drive to brake down to standstill is appropriately short so that it is not necessary to wait for the delay, set at contactor =4K33, for the max. braking time until the door is opened. The interlocking circuit, terminals 701702, changeover, stop drives t1 s for external standstill monitoring functions MSD should be inserted in front of contactor =4K32/A1. In this case, after the spindle drive has issued a safe standstill signal, the drives are already shut down after t1 s and go into safe standstill.
9-277
05.01
Speed monitoring Settingup operation When the automatic mode is cancelled, contactor =5K15 deenergized or the protective door released or opened, contactor =6K11 is deenergized, terminal 6970 opened, and the speed is monitored for standstill. When enabled via pushbutton =5S11, contactors =5K13/=5K14 are energized and the speed, set at the monitoring device, for settingup operation, monitored. When the permissible speed is exceeded, contacts A11/7980 and A11/7576 open. The pulses for the spindle drive are inhibited, and at the same time the emergency stop function is initiated via contactor =4K21 and the drives are shut down. Automatic operation When the max. permissible speed, set at the selector switch (the reduction is programmed as a %) is exceeded, the drives are also immediately shutdown as described before. The device should be adapted to the speed and pulse frequency of the speed encoder via the speed programming inputs. Depending on the hazard analysis, it may be necessary to use speed monitoring, e.g. also for the feed drives and/or also for the userside machine functions. The control must be appropriately adapted on the user side.
Circuit example =8 Limit switch end position monitoring
Application/functions Normally, the end position of the axis traversing range in the machine is monitored using software limit switches which become active after the reference point approach. If, under a fault condition, a software limit switch is passed, and therefore a hardware limit switch actuated, contactor =4K21 is deenergized via the interlocking circuit terminals 8182 in the EMERGENCY STOP circuit. The drives are braked along the current limit and are then shutdown. However, an axis can only be effectively braked if there is an appropriate distance between the hardware limit switch and the mechanical end stop of the axis to take into account brake travel. The actuated end position limit switches can be disabled via the PLC inputs. In the settingup mode, the axis can move away from the end position using key actuated switch S13 and be moved away in the opposite direction using pushbutton =5S11, enabling.
9-278
05.01
Circuit example =9 Armature shortcircuit braking

Application The armature shortcircuit braking is only possible using permanentmagnet motors and, for example, is only used when passing end position limit switches, at power failure, for fault messages or EMERGENCY STOP. Often, there is a fault/error in the NC PLC or in the drive module itself when the software limit switch is passed. This means that electrical braking via the position limit switches according to circuit =8 is no longer possible. For critical drives, e.g. vertical axes, in such cases, emergency braking is still possible using armature shortcircuit braking and optionally using a holding brake (fast stopping). The braking torque for armature shortcircuit braking is optimized using the additional braking resistor in the motor circuit.
Caution Shortcircuit braking without using a brake resistor can result in partial motor demagnetization.
Functions Armature shortcircuit When passing/actuating the end position limit switches or for power failure, the pulses are inhibited via terminal 663 and, at the same time, armature shortcircuit contactor K11 is deenergized. The drive is braked after the contactor dropout time. The interlocking circuit, terminals 9192 is simultaneously opened which initiates the EMERGENCY STOP function for all of the drives. The contactor coil has a varistor in order to achieve an extremely short contactor dropout time. The selected auxiliary contactor of the SIRIUS series with four pole auxiliary contact block fulfills the protective separation between the control voltage and 690 V AC motor circuit. The circuit must be appropriately adapted for operation when the power fails, buffering the +24 V control voltage or for other shut down functions. Holding brake The fast shutdown using the holding brake independent of the PLC cycle time via the armature shortcircuit contactor supports braking. The mechanical pull in delay of the holding brake acts somewhat delayed with respect to armature shortcircuit braking. In the settingup mode, the axis can be movedaway from the end position using keyactuated switch S13 and moved away again using pushbutton =5S11 enable.
9-279
05.01
Circuit example =10 Power contactors in the motor circuit FD

Application For special applications, the circuits allow the energy feed to the motor from the drive module to be electrically disconnected through contactors. The contactors may only be deenergized if the pulses are inhibited >=10 ms using terminal 663 before the power contacts open. When powering up, the pulses must be enabled at the same time that the power contacts close.
Notice The contactors are generally not suitable for disconnecting clocked inverter currents or disconnecting DC currents of a drive which is stationary in closed loop position control. If this is not observed when disconnecting, high voltage peaks can occur which could destroy, the drive module, motor winding and/or the contactor contacts can weld up.
Functions The drives are powered down, safetyrelated a) via the start inhibit and b) additionally via contactor by electrically isolating from the drive module using key actuated switch S11 through one channel or S15 through two channels. The pulse enable is first withdrawn before the power contacts of the power contactor separate with the dropout delay. The interlocking circuit, terminals 103104 or terminals 107108 should be incorporated in the start circuit of the safety combination =4K31/Y33Y34 stop drives.
9-280
05.01
9 Important Circuit Information 9.8 Information on applications with 611 digital/611 universal
9.8
Information on applications with 611 digital/611 universal
Fig. 9-24
Circuit example 611 digital with SINUMERIK 840D
9-281
05.01
9.8.1
Circuit example 611 digital with SINUMERIK 840D

A circuit example SIMODRIVE 611 digital and SINUMERIK 840D with the drive related control for a machine/plant, based on the circuit examples in Section 9-24 with 611A, is shown as block diagram in Fig. 9.7.
9.8.2
Circuits with 611 digital

The 611 digital control modules have a digital setpoint and position actual value interface to the 840D, 810D or 840C MC controls. The modules are available as 1axis or 2axis modules with Performance of Standard control. Furthermore, the modules differ by the connection type:
S Incremental encoder as motor encoder (indirect measuring system) or S Incremental encoder as motor encoder (indirect measuring system) and
connection for direct measuring system encoders An essential difference between 611 digital and 611 analog controls is, among other things that the motor encoder (incremental encoder cos/sin 1 Vpp) at the drive motors, in addition to the tachometer and rotor position signals (only for synchronous motors) also transfers position actual value signals to the measuring system input of the 611D. These signals are fed to the position controllers in the NC control via the digital drive bus where they can be processed for indirect position actual value/position sensing of the drive.
Description of the interfaces of the 611 digital control module > refer to Section 5. All of the communications of the NC control to the 611D drive modules is realized via digital drive bus. The axisspecific controller and pulse enable signals as well as the operating and monitoring messages are realized via NC/PLC interface signals on the digital drive bus. The hardwired terminal 65 axisspecific control enable is not available for the 611D modules. Terminal 663, pulse enable/start inhibit is available on a moduleformodule basis for the 611D modules as for the 611 A modules. The axisspecific pulse enable signals via the drive bus are ANDed with the signal status at terminal 663.
Control with SINUMERIK 840D
The NC control with the integrated PLCCPU SIMATIC S7300 is accommodated in a 50 mmwide housing, compatible to the SIMODRIVE drive modules. The control is integrated in the SIMODRIVE 611D drive group and can be expanded by up to 31 axes. It is located between the NE module and the first drive module in the drive group. The power supply for the internal control voltage is derived from the NE module power supply via the equipment bus. The NC ready signal acts on the ready signal, terminals 7274, of the NE module via the equipment bus.
9-282
05.01
Control with SINUMERIK 810D
SINUMERIK 810D is a highly integrated compact control, accommodated in a 150mm wide enclosure, compatible to the SIMODRIVE modules with integrated PLCCPU SIMATICS7300 and 611D power and control modules onboard. The control is available in two versions:
S CCU1 module with three integrated power modules (1x MSD, 2x FD) S CCU2 with two power modules (2x FD)
The control can be configured using axis expansion modules up to 5 (4) axes + 1 spindle with separately mounted power modules. The controls are already integrated in the CCu modules. The control power supply is realized, just like the SINUMERIK 840D, from the NE module power supply via the equipment bus. The NC ready signal acts on the ready signal, terminal 7274 of the NE module via the equipment bus. The control has, for all axes, a hardwired terminal 663 pulse enable/start inhibit. The controller and pulse enable signals are available for each specific axis, and are controlled using NC/PLC interface signals on the internal digital drive bus. The safetyrelated, driverelated control for a machinesystem with SINUMERIK 810D can be configured by the user based on the circuit examples in Section 9.7.
Control with SINUMERIK 840C
The SINUMERIK 840C control is located in a separate subrack, utilizing modular packaging technology, with integrated PLCCPU SIMATIC 135 WD. The control is available in two versions with digital or analog setpoint interface, and can be expanded up to 30 axes. The 840C has its own power supply with separate feed to connected to 115230 V AC or 24 V DC. The NC ready signal is available via a relay contact output. The digital drive bus is connected to the first drive module in the 611D group, also refer to the connection diagram, Section 12, Fig. 12-1. The safety and driverelated control for a machine/system can be based on the circuit examples in Section 9.7. The 840C control with analog setpoint interface is essentially used for circuit examples =1 to =10 in Section 9.7.
9.8.3
Circuits with 611 universal

The SIMODRIVE 611 universal control module is available as either 1axis or 2axis version. The setpoint can be entered either as analog signal or via PROFIBUS. The interfaces are described in Section 5. Safety and driverelated controls for a machine: The SIMODRIVE 611 universal control module with analog setpoint interface can be used essentially the same as in circuit examples =1 to =10 in Section 9.7 for SIMODRIVE 611 analog.
9-283
9 Important Circuit Information 9.9 Master/slave operation SIMODRIVE 611 analog
05.01
9.9
MSD
Master/slave operation SIMODRIVE 611 analog

Two SIMODRIVE main spindle drives can be mechanically rigidly coupled if the master drive is closedloop speed controlled and the slave drive is closeloop torque controlled. There are two operating modes available: 1. Openloop torque control and 2. Openloop torque control with slip monitoring
Master drive SIMODRIVE 611 MSD module T. A9n (DAU) Speed setpoint Torque setpoint T. 56/14 T. 24/8 Speed setpoint for the slave for open loop torque controlled operation with slip monitoring Slave drive SIMODRIVE 611 MSD module T. En Select terminal, openloop torque or control T. Em Select terminal, openloop torque control with slip monitoring M 3~
Speed setpoint T. 56/14
M 3~ Rigid or quasirigid connection, which can also be released in operation
Slave drive: with a rigid coupling, openloop torque controlled with the coupling released, closedloop speed controlled Fig. 9-25 Master/slave operation with an analog SIMODRIVE 611 system
Master drive: Slave drive:
Term. A9n: Term. En:
Torque setpoint Openloop torque controlled mode (function number 4)
The torque setpoint of the master drive is entered into the slave drive as torque setpoint (terminal 56/14) via a select analog output, terminal A9n. Warning If the mechanically rigid coupling is released, the slave drive must be simultaneously changed over to closedloop speed control.
!
FD
Parallel operation (master/slave function, only userfriendly interface and standard interface, 2-axis operation, max. 5 slave axes connected to a master) Frequently, for parallel operation, a closedloop speed controlled master drive is equipped with one or several subordinate closedloop current controlled drive axes. The master drive outputs the current setpoint of the speed controller output in parallel to the current controllers of the slave axes. The feed modules are equipped with a master/slave function which can be activated. Terminal 258 is used as the connection points. In the master axis, terminal 258 is used as current setpoint output; in the slave axes, terminal 258 is the current setpoint input.
9-284
05.01
9 Important Circuit Information 9.10 Stardelta operation
Note For SIMODRIVE 611 digital and SIMODRIVE 611 universal, the master/slave operation is realized via a speed setpoint coupling > also refer to the literature associated with the particular drives.
9.10
Stardelta operation
SIMODRIVE 611 main spindle modules support the operation of star/delta motors. At low speeds, the drive is operated in the star circuit configuration (high torque) and at higher speeds in the delta circuit configuration (high stall torque). Changeover is also possible during operation. The changeover speed from star to delta operation must lie within the stall power range for star operation (refer to the speedtorque diagram for Y/ operation).
Mrated Y
1 X n Y
Mstall Y
Mstall
Mrated
1 X n
nrated Y
nrated
Fig. 9-26
Speedtorque diagram for Y/ operation
Warning While changing over from Y to operation torque may not be demanded from the 1PH motor. In this case, a minimum deadtime of 0.5 s must be taken into consideration for contactor changeover times, safety times, demagnetization and magnetizing operations.
9-285
05.01
Connection diagram for Y/ changeover 611 analog system
SIMODRIVE 611 analog system MSD module
Selectable relay outputs2)
U2
V2 W2 PE
Term. 663 Term. En1) Term. An2) Term. An2) Term. 289
K2 Auxiliary contactor power supply K1h max. 30 V DC
Kx3)
K1 K2h
Kx3) K1 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2
K1h
K2h
K2 U2 V2 W2 K1 D K2 Y K2 K1
9
1PH Y/D
Pulse enable
Y/ changeover from NC/PLC
Fig. 9-27
Connection diagram for Y/ changeover SIMODRIVE 611 analog
1) One input terminal, which can be selected from terminals E1 to E9. 2) Two relay outputs which can be selected from terminals A11 to A61. 3) Safe standstill is not guaranteed by only opening K1 and K2.Thus, for safetyrelated reasons, electrical isolation must be provided by contactor Kx. This contactor may only be switched in the nocurrent condition, i.e. pulse enable must be withdrawn 40 ms before the contactor is opened (deenergized). Refer to Sections 9.4.2 and 9.7. Circuit example =10.
9-286
05.01
Connection diagram for Y/ changeover 611 digital system

SIMODRIVE 611 digital system, MSD module SINUMERIK 840D PLC outputs2)
U2
V2 W2 PE
Term. 663
EX.Y
AX.Y
AX.Z
K2 Auxiliary contactor power supply K1h max. 30 V DC
Kx1)
K1 K2h
Kx1) K1 U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2 W2 K1 D
K1h
K2h
K2 K2 K1
1PH Y/D Pulse enable Y/ changeover from NC/PLC
K2
Fig. 9-28
Connection diagram for Y/ changeover SIMODRIVE 611 digital
1) Safe standstill is not guaranteed by only opening K1 and K2.Thus, for safetyrelated reasons, electrical isolation must be provided by contactor Kx. This contactor may only be switched in the nocurrent condition, i.e. pulse enable must be withdrawn 40 ms before the contactor is opened (deenergized). refer to Sections 9.4.2 and 9.7. Circuit example =10. 2) Two relay outputs can be selected from terminals AX.Y to AX.Z.
The connection diagram for Y/ changeover for the 611 universal system can be configured, based on the specified examples. For a description of the function, refer to the separate Planning Guide and documentation SIMODRIVE 611 universal.
9-287
05.01
Dimensioning the contactors
The main contactors must be dimensioned according to the rated motor current and overload factor. The following table showing the assignment of 1PM4/6 motors/main contactors and auxiliary contactors can be used to support configuring:
Table 9-2
Dimensioning the main contactors for 1PM motors Output [kW] 3.7 7.5 11 18.5 3.7 7.5 11 18.5 22 Irated
[A]
AC motor 1PM41012LF8... 1PM41052LF8... 1PM41332LF8... 1PM41372LF8... 1PM61012LF8... 1PM61052LF8... 1PM61332LF8... 1PM61372LF8... 1PM61382LF8...
Recommended contactor type/K1/K2 duty category AC 1 3RT1023 3RT1025 3RT1026 3RT1035 3RT1023 3RT1025 3RT1026 3RT1035 3RT1035
Recommended auxiliary contactor type K1h, K2h 3RH11 3RH11 3RH11 3RH11 3RH11 3RH11 3RH11 3RH11 3RH11
13.0 23.0 41.0 56.0 13.0 23.0 41.0 56.0 58.0
9-288
05.01
9 Important Circuit Information 9.11 Induction motor operation 611A (611D/611U)
9.11
9.11.1
Induction motor operation 611A (611D/611U)

Several induction motors 611A operated in parallel
Several motors can be operated in parallel from an induction motor module. Several design guidelines must be observed when selecting the motor and module. A maximum drive constellation for parallel operation can include up to eight motors. Motors connected in parallel to an induction motor module must have the same V/Hz characteristics. Further, it is recommended that motors should have the same pole number. If more than two motors are operated from a single module, then these motors should have, as far as possible, the same output. For a twomotor constellation, the power differential between the motors may not exceed a ratio of 1:10. The following design guidelines should be observed:
S Selecting the induction motor module rating

Steadystate operation of the motors connected in parallel essentially in the closedloop controlled range (> nmin1)) and preferably in the rated speed range: Rated motor currentsv Rated current of the induction motor module Operation of motors connected in parallel with dynamic loading and in the openloop controlled range require a higher rating: 1,2 ( Rated motor currents) v Rated current of the induction motor module The current limit of the induction motor module is increased to 150% rated current for commissioning.
S The motors should not be loaded above rated torque. S For highspeed induction motors (e.g. for woodworking), a series reactor
must be connected between the induction motor module and the motor group: Rated reactor current: RMS current of the motor group2) When taking into account the above information, load and speed steps applied to individual motors, are corrected. By applying the selection guidelines, a stable, stallproof operation of the individual motors can be achieved. The speeds of individual motors are load dependent. The actually selected speeds can drift apart by several percent due to the summed slip control.
1) Standard motor:
Special motors:
2pole ! > 600 RPM 4pole ! > 300 RPM 6pole ! > 200 RPM 8pole ! > 150 RPM 40 V nrated nmin > Vrated motor
600 RPM > Pole pair number
2) Rated motor currents or, when taking into account the load duty cycle, the total RMS currents of the motor group.
9-289
05.01
Load surges and overload conditions in the fieldweakening range can result in oscillations and should be avoided. An induction motor module cannot identify if an individual motor is overloaded. Individual thermal monitoring devices should be provided for overload protection of the individual motors. We recommend that the motor is monitored using a PTC thermistor evaluation circuit.
3ph. 400 V AC 50/60 Hz
SIMODRIVE 611 SIMODRIVE 611 I/R IM
1)
9
PTC M1 3 Motor 1 PTC M2 3 Motor 2 PTC M3 3 Motor 3 PTC M8 3 Motor 8
Fig. 9-29
Parallel motor configuration with a SIMODRIVE 611 induction motor module
Notice For parallel operation, all of the motors must always be simultaneously operated. When a motor is shutdown (e. g. due to a fault), the motor data set must be adapted (e. g. by using a motor changeover function).
When connecting motors in parallel, the cable protection for the motor cables must be implemented outside the drive converter.
1) Rated motor currents or, when taking into account the load duty cycle, the total RMS currents of the motor group
9-290
05.01
9.11.2
Motor changeover, individual induction motors 611 analog

The SIMODRIVE 611 IM module allows up to four different motors to be changed over. Each motor has a dedicated motor parameter set.
Pulse enable
K1 K2 K3 K4
T.663
SIMODRIVE 611 IM
Output terminals
Aw11)
1st input 2nd input Motor selection
0 0 1
P24 Select terminal input En 1 0 1 En + 1 0 1 1 2 3 4 U2 2 W V2
Ax1 Ay1 Az1
K1H
2)
K2H
K3H 0V
K4H
K1
K2
K3
K4
K1H K2 K3 K4 1)
M1 PTC 3~ Motor 1
K2H K1 K3 K4
M2 3~
PTC
K3H K1 K2 K4
M3 PTC 3~ Motor 3
K4H K1 K2 K3
M4 3~
PTC
Motor 2
Motor 4
Several motors cannot be simultaneously controlled as this interlocked in the software. In addition, the recommended contactor interlocking ensures that only one motor can be operated. Only required for highspeed special motors.
Motor changeover at the SIMODRIVE 611 IM module
2)
Fig. 9-30
For motor changeover, an auxiliary contactor 3RH11 and a main contactor 3RT10 are required for each motor. A binarycoded switching command is connected to select input terminals En/En + 1 (max. two terminals for four motors) to changeover a motor. The changeover command is only executed when the drive pulses are inhibited. In this case, one of the terminals 663, 65 or 81 (function: Pulse inhibit) must be opened. After the pulses have been inhibited, the active motor parameter set is loaded and the motor auxiliary contactors controlled via select relay.
9-291
05.01
Induction motor operation for 611 digital/universal
Parallel operation of several induction motors and changeover of individual induction motors for SIMODRIVE 611 digital/SIMODRIVE 611 universal, refer to the separate configuring and documentation, SIMODRIVE 611 digital/ SIMODRIVE 611 universal.
Note The 611 digital control module allows two different induction motors to be changed over via the motor parameter sets.
Overload protection
Individual thermal monitoring functions must be provided for overload protection of the individual induction motors. We recommended that PTC temperature sensors are used in the motor and the 3RN1 thermistor motor protection evaluation units. If cable protection is required for the motor cables, for rated drive converter currents which are significantly higher than the rated motor current, then this must be implemented outside the drive converter.
Notice Motors may only be changed over using the power contactors in the motor circuit when terminal 663, pulse enable/start inhibit is inhibited. i.e. the motor circuit must be in a nocurrent condition.
For an additional explanation, also refer to the circuit examples =10 in Section 9.7
9-292
05.01
9 Important Circuit Information 9.12 Operation at power failure
9.12
9.12.1
Operation at power failure

Application and mode of operation
The operation at power failure function (power failure buffering) is used, e.g. for machines where personnel can be in danger or significant material damage could occur at power failure or for internal control fault messages as a result of collision hazard during machining. Furthermore, the function is used for machines performing complex machining operations, e.g. when machining gear wheels (hobbing, roller grinding) with expensive tools and workpieces which should, as far as possible, be protected against damage when line supply faults occur. For operation at power failure, shutdown and/or retracting drive movements, the energy, saved in the power DC link capacitors and kinetic energy of the moved masses when the drives regenerate can be used. In this case, a connection must be established from the P600/M600 power DC link to the auxiliary power supply via the P500/M500 terminals in the NE module or monitoring module, refer to Fig. 9-31. Beyond this, additional circuit measures are required, for example, buffering the +24V control voltage and a power failure and/or DC link monitoring to initiate the appropriate control functions. The machinery manufacturer must evaluate these risks and requirements using a hazard analysis and apply appropriate measures to prevent such hazards or damage from occurring. The requirements placed on power failure concepts differ widely depending on the particular user and machines and must therefore be individually configured.
9.12.2
Functions
The ability to quickly detect a line supply fault is an essential criterion when implementing power failure concepts (power failure, line supply undervoltage or phase failure). When a line supply fault occurs, the DC link voltage quickly collapses due to the energy drawn by the drives and the connected power supplies for the drive and control components. The discharge characteristic depends on the ratio between the stored DC link capacitance in the power circuit and the power drawn (load duty cycle) of the drive at the instant that the line supply fault occurs. For operation at power failure, regenerative feedback of one or several drives into the DC link must become effective before the DC link voltage drops from the rated voltage, e.g. 600 V DC to 350 V DC. At approx. 350 V, the impulses are inhibited in the drive group and the drives coast down. The 600 V DC link voltage is proportionally simulated at the control level and can be evaluated in the 611 digital and 611 universal control modules via the equipment bus. The DC link voltage can be monitored, with a fast response, using parameterizable limit value stages so that indirectly the system can immediately respond to a line supply voltage.
9-293
05.01
The ready signal via terminals 7274 in the NE module also responds when a line supply fault develops and inhibits the pulses in the NE module. The response time is, among other things, dependent on the line impedances and other quantities and therefore cannot be precisely calculated. Generally, the line supply failure detection time is >30ms and is therefore not sufficient to initiate functions for operation when the power fails. Operation at power failure with the SIMODRIVE 611 universal drive Example: The DC link voltage is monitored in the SIMODRIVE 611 universal group via the limit value stage of a 611 universal control module. When a selectable limit value is fallen below, e.g. 550 V DC link voltage, the limit value stage responds and switches a positive output signal from +24 V to 0 V via a digital output stage. For example, terminal 64, drive enable, can be inhibited in an and logic operation with the relay contact of the ready signal of terminals 7273.1 of the NE module. The drives are braked and stopped as quickly as possible along the current limit. In addition, e.g. via a second digital output of the 611 universal module, the setpoint polarity of a drive can be changed over and the drive retracted before the other drives are then braked, delayed using terminal 64. The safetyrelated circuit examples in Section 9.7 for the openloop drive control must be appropriately adapted on the userside for operation at power failure. Additional possibilities of braking when the power fails:
Braking via the armature shortcircuit braking for permanentmagnet servo motors, refer to the circuit example =9 in Section 9.7.
Note The power failure monitoring device must directly disconnect the coil circuit of the armature shortcircuit contactor, as a buffered +24 V power supply either responds too late or not at all.
Braking by quickly applying the holding brake, bypassing the PLC cycle time, refer to circuit example =9 in Section 9.7.
Note The holding brake is not an operating brake and can therefore only be used for such braking operations to a limit extend.
9-294
05.01
Operation at power failure with SIMODRIVE 611 digital in conjunction with SINUMERIK 840D and 840C: Extended shutdown and retraction: ESR These more complex functions can be used in conjunction with the optional software NC functions in SINUMERIK 840D and 840 C and the digital drives 611D with performance controls. For certain machining technologies, where several drives are used, e.g. interpolating through electronic gear functions, when power fails, these must be shut down or retracted in a coordinated fashion using special NC functions. These functions must be configured by the user for the special requirements of the machining technology. In this case, the DC link voltage is monitored against a parameterizable lower threshold value. If a limit value, which can be adjusted using a machine data, is fallen below, the NC quickly responds, within a few interpolation cycles via the digital bus to shut down the drives in a controlled fashion and/or raise, retract the tools from the machining contour. Beyond this, e.g. if communications between the NC and drives is interrupted, for a signoflife failure of the NC or other selectable fault messages in the drive system, the drives can be shut down/retracted, independent of the actual drive function. At power failure, the energy required to shut down/retract the drives must be provided from the energy stored in the power DC link capacitors. If the energy is not sufficient, the DC link capacitance can be increased using additional capacitor modules, refer to Section 6. In this case, it is not permissible that the charge limit of the I/R module is exceeded. For situations, where the energy in the DC link is still not sufficient to shut down/ attract the drives, additional energy storage can be activated using regenerative operation. This provides the necessary energy for the drive DC link as an autonomous drive operating mode when line supply faults occur. The detailed description extended shutdown and retraction ESR is included in the SINUMERIK 840D and 840C documentation, in the sections:
S 840D: Function description, special functions axis couplings and ESR. S 840C: Startup Guide 840C ESR
9-295
05.01
When configuring/engineering line supply failure concepts, the following control and secondary conditions should be taken into account:
S The braking energy must be converted into heat using one or several
pulsedresistor module(s) or for uncontrolled rectifier units, using the internal pulsed resistor (an external resistor may be additionally required). When the drives brake, it is not permissible that the DC link voltage violates the max. set monitoring thresholds.
S At power failure, the safetyrelated hardware control must briefly maintain,

e.g. the enable signals via terminals 48, 63, 64, NS1, NS2 and 663. Furthermore, the internal, axisspecific enable signals of the NC/PLC interface must also be kept until the drives come to a standstill via the digital drive bus.
S For controlled retraction movements, if required, until the operation has been
completed, holding brakes must remain energized and mechanical clamps must released.
S The external +24 V power supply for the control voltage must be buffered,
using power supply units, e.g. SITOP power with capacitor or battery back up in order to maintain the drive enable signals, the PLC functions and the openloop control and machine functions on the user side.
S During the braking and retraction phases, it is not permissible that the NC
and PLC controls generate fault/error signals which inhibit the drives.
S The power supply of the SINUMERIK 840 D with integrated PLCCPU is
supplied through the NE module DC link when the line supply fails. The SINUMERIK 840C power supply with 115230V AC or 24V DC must be separately buffered. Information on the subsequent circuit example, Fig. 9-31 Terminals P500,M500 for the auxiliary power supply in the NE module and monitoring module must be connected to the power DC link P600,M600 using shortcircuit proof cables, which are twisted and shielded in compliance with EMC Guidelines. The cable shields should be connected to the mounting panel at both ends through the largest possible surface area. Crosssection: 1.5 mm@ , max. cable length: 3 m.
Notice In order to safely and electrically isolate the DC link from the line supply, when the line contactor is opened or when changing over to the settingup mode, the connection P600,M600 to terminals P500,M500 must be reliably and safely disconnected, e.g. via the power contacts of contactor K1, also refer to Section 9.2.4.
This is also valid for the connection to terminals P500,M500 when using monitoring modules. Contactor K1 must be safely deenergized via the drive EMERGENCY STOP, OFF functions together with the poweroff function of the internal line contactor in the NE module or when changing over the operating mode to settingup.
9-296
05.01
In addition to the main contacts, positivelydriven auxiliary contacts (NC contacts) of contactor K1 must be incorporated, in a safetyrelated fashion, into the drive control as follows: An NC contact must incorporated in the feedback circuit of the safety combination to control the line contactor; a second NC contact must be incorporated in the feedback circuit of the safety combination for the enable function in the settingup mode or, alternatively the enable circuit for the settingup mode. The NO contact can be processed in the PLC for the contactor energized signal.
Notice If the power supply is supplied through P500/M500 at connector X181, it is not permissible to use a six conductor connection, electronic power supply connection via terminals 2U1, 2V1, 2W1 in front of the HF commutating reactor, refer to Section 9.13.
9-297
Fig. 9-31
9-298
PLC
Driverelated control
Circuit example: Operation at power failure
2) K1 1. Cable routing according to EN 602041/VDE 0113 Part 1: Crosssection 1.5 mm2 (AWG16) and cable length, max. 3 m shortcircuit proof cable, twisted and routed e.g. in metal piping. The cable screens must be connected to the mounting panel at both ends through a large surface area. 2. Contactor 3TC44170AB4, 2 pole, Auxiliary contacts NC+2NO 24 VDC coil voltage; 3TX 74023G; Varistor. The connection between the power DC link P600 / M600 and the electronics auxiliary supply P500 / M500 electrically isolated using contactor contacts K1 for the functions Open line contactor and Settingup operation. 3. Terminals L1 and L2, only available for I/R modules 80 kW and 120 kW. 1)
NEmodule,
2A 14 22 32 44 2 4 1A 13 21 31 43 1 3
Drive 1
Drive n
1)
P600 C DCl. X181

M500 P500 2U1 1U1 2V1 1V1 2W1 1W1
C DCl. Drive 1
C DCl. Drive n
C DCl. Pulsed resistor
Aux. power supply
M600
U1 V1 1 WL1 L2 X131 PE
1R 2R 3R PE
Option Connection to the P500 / M500 monitoring modules max. 4 units
3) M PE Ext. optional pulsed resistor M
05.01
05.01
9.12.3
DC link buffering
The energy, available in the DC link of the drive units is calculated as follows at power failure: E = 1/2 * C * (VDC link2 Vmin2) In this case, E= energy in Watt seconds [Ws] C= total capacitance of the DC link in Farad [F] VDC link= DC link voltage (response limit, line supply failure) Vmin= lower limit for safe reliable operation (taking into account the motorspecific EMF, in any case, above the switchoff threshold of e.g.350V)
C= 6000F (refer to Table 9-3, 1. line) 20% = 4800 F VDC link= 550V Vmin= 350V is obtained as follows: E = 1/2 * 4800mF *((550V)2 (350V)2) = 432Ws This energy, under load conditions is available for a time of tmin = E / Pmax * h in order to initiate emergency retraction. In this case, tmin = buffer time in milliseconds [ms] Pmax = power in Kilowatt [kW] h = efficiency of the drive unit
Example: For
For the example above, with: E = 432Ws Pmax = 16kW (refer to Table 9-3, 1. line) h = 0.90 is obtained as follows: tmin = 432Ws / 16kW * 0.9 = 24.3ms as minimum achievable buffer duration for emergency retraction.
9-299
05.01
The values for various I/R units are summarized in the following table. In this case, nominal and minimum capacitances are taken into account. The maximum possible capacitance (charge limits) comprises the sum of the capacitance of the I/R module and the axis/spindle modules and external supplementary capacitors (to be provided by the user).The minimum capacitance, used in table, takes into account a component tolerance of 20% (worst case)
Table 9-3 Nominal and minimum buffer times as a function of various I/R units Max. possible capacitance Cmax [mF] 6000 20000 20000 20000 20000 Energy contents (Cmax) [Ws] 540 1800 1800 1800 1800 Energy contents (Cmin) [Ws] 432 1440 1440 1440 1440 Buffer time tn at Pmax [ms] 30.38 45.00 29.46 20.25 13.50 Buffer time tmin at Pmax [ms] 24.30 36.00 23.56 16.20 10.80
Power Pmax of the I/R unit [kW] 16 36 55 80 120
Energy flow
When engineering emergency retraction, the energy must always be investigated in order to evaluate whether additional capacitor modules or a generator axis/spindle is required or not (with approximately dimensioned inertia).
9-300
05.01
9 Important Circuit Information 9.13 Special applications
9.13
Special applications
Fig. 9-32
Sixconductor connection NE and monitoring module
9-301
9 Important Circuit Information 9.14 SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
05.01
9.14
SINUMERIK Safety Integrated
General information
SINUMERIK Safety Integrated offers typetested safety functions which can be used to implement highly effective personnel and machinery protection in line with that required in practice. All of the safety functions fulfill the requirements of safety Category 3 according to EN 9541 and are a fixed component of the basic system. Neither additional sensors nor evaluation devices are required, i.e. less installation costs at the machine and a favorablypriced cabinet The following are included in the scope of supply, e.g.:
S Safe monitoring of velocity and standstill S Safe traversing range limiting and range identification
Direct connection of twochannel peripheral signals
With the additional, integrated functions in the safety package Safety Integrated for SINUMERIK 840D/611D, for the first time, it is possible to directly connect twochannel peripheral (I/O signals). For example, an Emergency Stop pushbutton or light barriers. The logical interlocking and response is realized internally using safetyrelated technology.
Professionally master extreme situations
All safetyrelevant faults in the system result in the hazardous motion being safely stopped or the energy being disconnected to the motor contactlessly. The drives are always stopped, optimally adapted to the operating status of the machine. This means, for example, in the settingup mode, with the protective door open, motion can be stopped as quickly as possible and in the automatic mode with closed protective door, the machine can be shut down pathrelated. This means: A high degree of personnel protection in the settingup mode and additional protection for the machine, tool and workpiece in the automatic mode.
Safety concept with a high degree of effectivity
These safety functions offer intelligent system access directly down to the electric drives and measuring systems, to a level which was previously unknown. Reliable function, fast response, and a wide degree of acceptance make these certified safety concepts extremely effective.
Safety functions redundantly integrated
A twochannel, diverse system structure is formed using the multiprocessor structure. The safety functions are redundantly integrated into the NC, drive and internal PLC. A special feature of this safety concept is that already with a measuring system the standard motor measuring system safety category 3 according to EN 9541 (SIL2 in accordance with IEC 61508) can be implemented. A second measuring encoder is not required, however, can be integrated as additional, direct measuring system (e.g. linear scale).
Innovative safety technology on the way to a new standard
It has been clearly shown, that this innovative safety technology can be used to implement new machine operator concepts inline with those required in practice. This results in a new standard for machines which enhances their safety and flexibility in use and also increases the plant or system availability.
9-302
05.01
Safety Integrated literature
The detailed description of SINUMERIK Safety Integrated can be taken from the following documentation:
S SINUMERIK 840 D Safety Integrated

Description of functions: 6FC52975AB800.P1
S SINUMERIK 840 C Safety Integrated

Description of functions: 6FC52970AC500.P0
S Safety Integrated: The safety program for the Industrial World

Application Manual: E20001A110M103 J
9-303
05.01
9-304
Cabinet Design and EMC
10
10.1
Installation and connection regulations

Warning The filters become extremely hot in the vicinity of the internal line supply resistors. If other components are mounted above a filter module (clearance < 400 mm) then a heat barrier can be mounted which deflects the heat away from these components. The mounting position must guarantee that the cooling air flows vertically through the filter.
Caution Ensure that the line filter is correctly connected to the line supply in accordance with the regulations: LINE L1, L2, L3 for line filters for the UI module and I/R module for sinusoidal current operation. If this is not observed, the line filter could be damaged. Also refer to the connection diagrams 10-1.
10
Caution The listed line filters conduct a high leakage current through the protective conductor. A permanent PE connection of the line filter and the cabinet is required as a result of the high leakage current of the filter. Measures in accordance with EN 50178/94 Part 5.3.2.1 must be applied, e.g. protective conductor ( 10 mm2 Cu) or a second conductor must be routed in parallel to the protective conductor through separate terminals. This conductor must fulfill the requirements for protective conductors according to IEC 3645543 itself.
General information
The EMC Guidelines for SINUMERIK and SIROTEC controls (Order No.: 6FC52970AD300AP1) should be observed, refer to the documentation overview on the first cover page.
10-305
10 Cabinet Design and EMC 10.1 Installation and connection regulations
05.01
Applications
The line filters described are designed to provide noise suppression for SIMODRIVE 611 drive converters; they are not designed to provide noise suppression for other loads in the cabinet. A dedicated filter must be provided for other loads in the cabinet. If the electronics power supply is connected to a separate line supply, then the feeder cable must be connected through a second filter. The feeder to the electronics power supply (connector X181) must be screened and the screen must be connected at both ends, at the connector side, as close as possible to connector X181, and at the cabinet mounting panel. The fan units must also be connected to the line supply through a second filter.
Cabinet mounting
For high frequency noise currents, the housing of the drive converter and line filter must be connected in a lowohmic fashion to the cabinet rear panel. The cabinet rear panel, must, in turn, be connected through a lowohmic connection to the motors/machine. The optimum solution is to mount the modules on a common bare metal mounting panel so that there is an electrical connection through the largest possible surface. This mounting panel must then be connected to the motor/machine, also through the largest possible surface area so that a good electrical connection is established. Painted cabinet panels as well as mounting rails or other similar installation equipment with small mounting surfaces do not fulfill this requirement. The line filters must arranged close to the NE modules (not at the cabinet entry, but directly next to the NE module). The shielded connecting cable between the line filter and the NE module should be as short as possible. The incoming cables to the line filter should be separately routed from one another. Recommended design, refer to Fig. 10-1.
Cable routing
10
Power and signal cables must always be routed separately from one another. In this case, the power cables from the converter module should be routed away towards the bottom and the encoder cable towards the top in order to achieve the largest possible separation. All of the control cables connected to the function terminals, e. g. terminals 663, 63, 48 etc. should be grouped together and routed away towards the top. Individual cores which are associated with the same signal should be twisted. The function cable assembly is best routed away from the encoder cable assembly. Clearance between the cable assemblies 200 mm (separate cable ducts). All cables and conductors inside the cabinet should be routed as close as possible to the cabinet panels as loose random wiring can result in noise being coupledin (antenna effect). Fault sources in the vicinity should be avoided (contactors, transformers etc.) and if required, a shield should be located between the cable and noise source. Cables and conductors should not be extended or lengthened through terminals. To protect the equipment from noise being coupledin from external noise sources on the filter cable, screened cables must be used up to where the cable is connected to the cabinet terminals.
10-306
05.01
Power cables
Screened cables must be used for all of the motor and line supply feeder cables. A covered metal cable duct which is connected through the largest possible surface area, can alternatively be used. In both cases, it should be ensured that the shield/cable duct are connected through the largest possible surface area to the appropriate components (converter module, motor).
Note If the system is subject to a highvoltage test using an AC voltage, a line filter must be disconnected in order to achieve a correct test result.
Connecting the cable shield
All of the cable shields must be connected as close as possible to the particular terminal point through the largest possible surface area; for components which do not have a special shield connection, e.g. using the appropriate clamps or serrated rail on the bare cabinet mounting panel. The length of the cable between the screen connection point and the terminal must be kept as short as possible. Screen connecting plates are available on the NE and power modules to connect the screens of screened power cables. These connecting plates have clamp connections and mounting points for brake terminals (Order No., refer to Table 10-1. Also refer to the dimension drawing EMC measures Section 13).
Table 10-1 Order numbers for the shield connecting plates Shield connecting plate for modules with internal cooling 6SN11620EA00 50 100 150 200 300 300 for fan/pipe 0AA0 0BA0 0CA0 0JA0 0DA0 0KA0 external cooling 6SN11620EB00 0AA0 0BA0 0CA0 0JA0 0DA0
Module width [mm]
10
If the motor is equipped with a brake, then the screen of the brake feeder cable must be connected at both ends with the screen of the power cable. If there is no way of connecting the shield at the motor side, then a gland must be provided in the terminal box which allows the shield to be connected through the largest possible surface area (e. g. UNI IRIS DICHT U71.Pg from the PFLITSCH company).
Warning Cable shields and unused cores in power cables (e. g. braking conductors) must be connected to PE potential in order to discharge capacitive crosscoupling charge effects. If this is not observed, lethal contact voltages can occur, i.e. the voltages could cause serious injury or death.
10-307
05.01
Cabinet mounting panel
Encoder cables
Fuses 3 1) 1) 3 I/R module or U/I module MSD module

LINE
Function cables
Feed drive module
1) Main switch Filter
1)
P600 M600
U1 V1 1 W PE U2 V2 2 W PE U2 V2 2 W PE
LOAD
PE
1) 3
1) 3
2) Reactor 1) 4) 3
2)
2)
Incoming terminals
1)
1)
PE
L1 L2 L3 PE
10
Supply 3) PE rail is connected through a large surface area to the cabinet mounting panel
1) Shield connection, connected through the largest possible surface area with the cabinet mounting panel. 2) Shield connection at the modulespecific connecting panel 3) The PE cables can be alternatively connected via PE rail, taking into consideration EN50178 (protective connections). 4) Refer to Sections 3.4.2 and 3.1 for permissible commutating reactors for I/R module sinusoidal operation Refer to Section 3.4.2 for permissible commutating reactors for the 28 kW UI module A clearance of > 100mm around the HF reactor must be provided at the cable entry into the cabinet. Fig. 10-1 Connection diagram for line filters for 5 kW and 10 kW UI modules, for I/R modules, 16 kW to 120 kW. The connection diagram is also valid for UE 28 kW, however, as a result of the uncontrolled infeed, 6pulse squarewave current is present
10.1.1
Shield connecting plates

Shield connecting plates, which can be retrofitted, are available for the infeed modules and power modules. Mounting points are available on these plates to attach terminals to connect a brake.
10-308
05.01
10.1.2
Internal cooling
Mounting surface
100 mm
Discharged air
10
100 mm
Cooling air
Fig. 10-2
Air flow in the cabinet
10-309
05.01
10.1.3
Twotier unit arrangement

If space is restricted, the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system modules can be arranged in two tiers one above the other. The distance between the tiers may not be less than 200 mm. The maximum clearance is obtained depending on the arrangement as a result of the equipment bus cable. When arranging the wiring ducts which may be required for the wiring, it should be ensured that the necessary minimum clearance to the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system is not fallen below. Larger modules and the infeed module must be located in the upper tier. For a twotier arrangement for the SIMODRIVE 611 drive converter system, a connecting cable is required for the equipment bus. For the digital SIMODRIVE 611 drive group, in addition, a connecting cable is required for the drive bus. For twotier arrangements, a parallel cable should be used to connect the DC link (max. length 5 m). For subsequently connected modules, 300 mm wide, the copper conductor crosssection must be 70 mm2 and for smaller modules, 50 mm2 . The cable must be routed so that it is shortcircuit proof and ground fault proof. A potential bonding conductor having the same crosssection must be used and connected to the housing of the two modules which are connected. The three conductors should be bundled. DC link adapter terminals are available to connect the DC link. The maximum expansion of a drive group is limited by the rating of the infeed module. Only one equipment bus extension is permissible: Either to the left, e.g. for a second tier or to the right, e.g. to bypass a cabinet panel.
10
10-310
05.01
To the NC control
Adapter terminals, order number for module width 50 200 mm 6SN11611AA010BA0 for module width 300 mm 6SN11611AA010AA0
Cable length max 5 m !
Route the PE cable so that it is close to the P600/M600 conductors along the mounting panel. Warning label
10
Fig. 10-3
Connection example, for a twotier arrangement
Data on the system arrangement
1. The continuous bus cable for a drive group at an input module or monitoring module may be a max. of 2.1 m (from the supply point). (from the supply point) For twotier arrangements, two equipment bus branches, each max. 2.1 m long can be used from the branch point at the supply point. 2. The drive bus may be a max. of 11 m. 3. Equipment bus extension, 1500 mm.
Note Refer to the dimension drawing for connection details of the DC link adapter set For multitier arrangements, a warning label must attached to the first module of each tier referring to the DC link voltage. The warning information is supplied on a sheet with the line supply infeed.
10-311
10 Cabinet Design and EMC 10.2 EMC measures
05.01
10.1.4
Wiring
All of the power cables, such as the line supply feeder cable, must be shielded. The shields must be connected to ground through the largest possible surface area. The mounting surfaces for the line supply infeed and drive modules as well as the commutating reactors and line filter must be mounted on mounting panels with a good conducting surface (e.g. galvanized mounting panels).
10.2
EMC measures
The screens of preassembled original manufacturers cables are automatically connected when the connector is inserted. Exceptions: Setpoint cable from an analog NC In this case, the shields of the setpoint pairs must be connected to the upper side of the module. The threaded holes can be used for this purpose. (M5x10/3 Nm). SINUMERIK 840C drive bus cable Here, the shield is connected to the above mentioned threaded socket using the clamp provided Drive bus and equipment bus extensions for twotier designs. In this case, the screens at each end of the cable must be connected to the above mentioned threaded holes using the clamps provided. Motor power cables The screens of the motor power cables are connected to the screen connecting plates (accessories) of the modules using the clamp connectors provided.
Screen connection cables
10
Connecting up the shield to the front panel Connection, electronics ground Protection against overvoltages
Additional measures, refer to Section 7.2.1 In order to ensure a good connection between the front panel and the housing, the front panel screws must be tightened up to 0.8 Nm. Terminal X131 (electronics ground) at the NC.
A varistor module Order No.: 6SN11110AB000AA0 can be inserted at connector X181 at the NE module to protect against overvoltage conditions (line supplies which are not in compliance with VDE (this measure is not required for UI 5 kW and monitoring module).
Additional measures
Note All of the measures described here are only valid for supply networks which are not compatible with VDE. In normal industrial supply networks, it is guaranteed, without having to use other measures that the disturbance and noise values remain below the permissible limits, thus ensuring disturbancefree operation
10-312
05.01
L1 F10 F20 L2 L3 F30 PE F13 C13 R13 L1
L2
U1 Fig. 10-4 Additional EMC measures
V1
W1
PE1
The drive converters are designed for operation on industrial line supplies in accordance with EN 50178. In this case, it is assumed that the ratio between PN/PK is 1/100. Under this condition, the series reactor limits the line supply dips, caused by the general converter operating principle, to permissible values, which allows other loads, which are suitable for industrial applications, to be used on the same line supply network. For unfavorable line supply and grounding characteristics at the location where the unit is installed, under exceptional cases, cableborne noise and disturbances can occur, which are the result of an excessively high line supply reactance. Line filters should be used in cases such as these (they can be used for line supply voltages up to 415 V).
10
Note We recommend that the preassembled cables are used, as perfect screening is required for an optimum EMC connection. Further, for optimum signal transfer appropriate cable parameters are required. A guarantee for the correction functioning is only given when the original manufacturers cables are used. Reference: /EMC/ EMC Design Guideline SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE
10-313
05.01
10
10-314
Block Diagrams
11
11
11-315
11 Block Diagrams
05.01
11
Parameter board
Fig. 11-1
Block diagram, speed control loop FD closedloop control, analog
Option board
feed drive
MSD
11-316
Connection Diagrams
12
12-318 12-319 12-320
Fig. 12-1 Terminal overview SIMODRIVE 611 digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 12-2 Terminal overview SIMODRIVE 611 analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fig. 12-3 Terminal overview 611 analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note
The diagram is only intended to show the terminal connections. Furthermore, the external components arent shown complete. In this case, refer to Section 9.
12
12-317
12 Connection Diagrams
05.01
12
Fig. 12-1
Terminal overview, SIMODRIVE 611 digital
12-318
05.01
12
Fig. 12-2
Terminal overview, SIMODRIVE 611 analog
12-319
05.01
12
Fig. 12-3
Terminal overview, 611 analog
12-320
Dimension Drawings
Fig. 13-1 Fig. 13-2 Fig. 13-3 Fig. 13-4 Fig. 13-5 Fig. 13-6 Fig. 13-7 Fig. 13-8 Fig. 13-9 Fig. 13-10 Fig. 13-11 Fig. 13-12 Fig. 13-13 Fig. 13-14 Fig. 13-15 Fig. 13-16 Fig. 13-17 Fig. 13-18 Fig. 13-19 Fig. 13-20 Fig. 13-21 Fig. 13-22 Fig. 13-23 Fig. 13-24 Fig. 13-25 Fig. 13-26 Fig. 13-27 Fig. 13-28 Fig. 13-29 Fig. 13-30 Fig. 13-31 Fig. 13-32 Fig. 13-33 Fig. 13-34 Fig. 13-35 Fig. 13-36 Fig. 13-37 Fig. 13-38 Fig. 13-39 Fig. 13-40 Fig. 13-41
13
13-322 13-323 13-324 13-325 13-326 13-327 13-328 13-329 13-330 13-331 13-332 13-333 13-334 13-335 13-336 13-337 13-338 13-339 13-340 13-341 13-342 13-343 13-344 13-345 13-346 13-347 13-348 13-349 13-350 13-351 13-352 13-353 13-354 13-355 13-356 13-357 13-358 13-359 13-360 13-361 13-362
Internal cooling, 2GE.462008.9000.00 MB e, Sheet 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . Module 300 mm int. cooling, 2GE.462008.9001.00 MB c, Sheet 1 . Hose cooling, 1GE.462008.7017.00 MB ac, Sheet 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hose cooling, 2tier, 1GE.462008.7018.00 MB ac, Sheet 1 . . . . . . . EMC measures, 2GE.462008.9000.10 MB ad, Sheet 1 . . . . . . . . . . EMC measures, 2GE.462008.9000.10 MB ad, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . Line filter 5 kW, 4GE.581793 TA ab, Sheet 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line filter 10 kW, 4GE.581785 TA ab, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line filter 28 kW, 3GE.585455 TA aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase line filter 16kW, 2GE.586867 TA aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase line filter 36kW, 2GE.586875 TA aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase line filter 55kW, 2GE.586883 TA aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase line filter 80kW, 2GE.586891 TA aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase line filter 120kW, 1GE.586909 TA aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . 3phase reactor 16kW, 3GE.586743 TA aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase reactor 36kW, 3GE.586750 TA aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase reactor 55kW, 3GE.586768 TA aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase reactor 80kW, 2GE.587022 TA ab, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase reactor 120kW, 2GE.587014 TA ab, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . 3phase reactor Type HF, TA 585034, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 1 . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 3 . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 4 . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 5 . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 6 . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 7 . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 8 . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 9 . . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 10 . . . . . . . . . External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 11 . . . . . . . . . Fan assembly, ext. cooling, 1GE.462108.9000.50 Z aa, Sheet 1 . . Fan assembly, ext. cooling, 1GE.462108.9000.50 Z aa, Sheet 2 . . Fan assembly, ext. cooling, 1GE.462108.9000.50 Z aa, Sheet 3 . . Fan assembly, ext. cooling, 1GE.462108.9000.50 Z aa, Sheet 4 . . Fan assembly, ext. cooling, 1GE.462108.9000.50 Z aa, Sheet 5 . . Module, 300 mm ext. cooling, 2GE.462108.9001.00 MB ad, Sheet 1 Module, 300 mm ext. cooling, 2GE.462108.9001.00 MB ad, Sheet 2 Encoder signal amplifier, 3GE.462250.9006.00 MB aa . . . . . . . . . . . External pulsed resistor, 3GE.577015 TA ab, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulsed resistor for 28kW, 3GE.585679 TA ab, Sheet 2 . . . . . . . . . . .
13
13-321
13 Dimension Drawings
05.01
13
Fig. 13-1
Internal cooling, 2GE.462008.9000.00 MB e, Sheet 1
13-322
05.01
13
Fig. 13-2
Module 300 mm int. cooling, 2GE.462008.9001.00 MB c, Sheet 1
13-323
05.01
13
Fig. 13-3
Hose cooling, 1GE.462008.7017.00 MB ac, Sheet 1
13-324
05.01
13
Fig. 13-4
Hose cooling, 2tier, 1GE.462008.7018.00 MB ac, Sheet 1
13-325
05.01
13
Fig. 13-5
EMC measures, 2GE.462008.9000.10 MB ad, Sheet 1
13-326
05.01
13
Fig. 13-6
EMC measures, 2GE.462008.9000.10 MB ad, Sheet 2
13-327
05.01
13
Fig. 13-7
Line filter 5 kW, 4GE.581793 TA ab, Sheet 1
13-328
05.01
13
Fig. 13-8
Line filter 10 kW, 4GE.581785 TA ab, Sheet 2
13-329
05.01
13
Fig. 13-9
Line filter 28 kW, 3GE.585455 TA aa, Sheet 2
13-330
1 CADDrawing Manual modification prohibited 480 477 465.5 10.8 0
05.01
4 x 45 6.5
13
100
2.5
12.5
2 x 45 12.5
130
6.5
100
20 3) 4) 149.5 3) 2
( 31 )
( 31 )
62
1.5
62
17.5
C 2) M5 60 1 3 (2x) M4 (2x) 1) 19
15
30
30 60 M4 (2x) 3 (2x)
15 35 60 1
17.5
Confiado como secreto industial. Nos reservamos todos los derechos
Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Reservados todos os direitos
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.
Line filter verpackt in: Karton Item No. 339101.0134.02 Einlagen enspr. Anforderungen, siehe Bl. 1 Mains filter packed in: Box part no. 339101.0134.02 Paddings as required, see page 1
13-331
3
Page: 2 2 P. 4 5
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung dieser Unterlage, Verwer tung and Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrcklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere for den Fall der Patenterteilung or GMEintragung. 1 2 * Pro/E *
Belonging to this: Surface: Gen.tolerance kg/piece: Gen. tolerance Scale: 2:5 DIN 6 ISO 2768mk . . . Tolerance . . . ISO 8015 . . 15.01.98 Date Handled Zahorsky 3phase line filter by Masatz Tested by 16 kW Standard Type/MLFB: 6SN11110AA012BA0 MC E45 Dept. Siemens AG A& D 2 GE. 000000586867 TA aa aa 501156 15.01.98 Za Equipment Plant Erlangen Cond. Message Date Name Replacement for / replaced by:
PRO/ECAD
3) 3) 440 489 2 3) Terminals, 10 mm Terminal sleeve: M4 screw thread Tightening torque: 1.5 ... 1.8 Nm Terminals 10 mm2 Sleeve: Screwtype thread M4 Tightening torque 1.5...1.8 Nm 4) M5 grounding studs Grounding stud M5 Bar code standard; Bar code identifier : Code 39 for MLFBno. = 1P for version = 2P for part no. = no identifier Barcode standard: Barcode identifier: Code 39 for Order No. = 1P for Version = 2P for Item No. = no identifier Labels labeled with: Line filter for I/R 16 kW In=30A 460/265 V/4566 Hz Bar code Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012BA0 ( = Order No. ) Bar code part No. 000000586867 ( = part No. ) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status ) 2) Warning label labeled with : ACHTUNG, hoher Ableitstrom Warning sign inscribed with : ATTENTION, high leakage current
35
Fig. 13-10 3phase line filter 16kW, 2GE.586867 TA aa, Sheet 2
60
1) TypenSchild labeled with the following data: Line filter for I/R 16 kW In=30A 460/265 V/4566 Hz Barcode Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012BA0 ( = Order No. ) Barcode Item No. 000000586867 ( = Item No. ) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. version release )
Confie a titre de secret d entreprise. Tous droits reserves
13
13
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 CADDrawing Manuel modification prohibited 480 477 465.5 10.8 0
A 4 x 45
6.5
100
2.5
12.5
2 x 45
12.5
130 440
6.5
100
3) 244.5 4)
( 54 )
1.5
105
1.5
3)
( 54 )
108.5
40
40
1.5
M8
Line filter verpackt in: Karton Item No. 339101.0134.02 Einlagen entspr. Anforderungen, siehe Bl. 1 Mains filter packed in: Box part no. 339101.0132.02 Paddings as required, see page 1
05.01
71 1 2) 1) Labels labelled with: Line filter for I/R 36 kW In=67A 460/265V/4566 Hz Bar code Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012CA0 (= Order No. ) Bar code part no. 000000586875 ( = part no. ) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status ) Sleeve: Screwtype thread M6 Tightening torque 6...8 Nm 4) Erdungsbolzen M8 Grounding stud M8 2) Warning label labelled with : ACHTUNG, hoher Ableitstrom Warning sign iscribed with: ATTENTION, high leakage current 2 3) Anschluklemmen 50 mm Terminal sleeve: Schraubengewinde M6 Tightening torque 6...8 Nm Terminals 50 mm2 3 4 5
Belonging to this: Surface: Gen.tolerance kg/piece: Scale: 2:5 DIN 6 ISO 2768mk . . . . . Tolerance . ISO 8015 . . 19.01.98 Date Handled Zahorsky 3phase line filter by Masatz Tested by 36 kW Standard Type/MLFB: 6SN11110AA012CA0 MC E45 Dept. Siemens AG A& D 2 GE. 000000586875 TA aa aa 501156 19.01.98 Za. Equipment Plant Erlangen Cond. Message Date Name Replacement for / replaced by:
Page: 2 2 P.
PRO/ECAD
15 526 3 (2x) M4 (2x) 60
30
30 60 M4 (2x) 3 (2x) 71 1
15 35 25 1 D
35
25
29
Barcode standard: Barcode identifier:
Code39 for MLFBNo. = 1P for Version = 2P for Item No. = no identifier Bar code standard: Bar code indentifier: Code 39 for MLFBno. = 1P for version = 2P for part no. = no identifier E
1) TypenSchild labeled with the following data: Line filter for I/R 36 kW In=67A 460/265V/4566 Hz Barcode Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012CA0 ( = MLFBNo. ) Barcode Item No. 000000586875 ( = Item No. ) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. version release )
108.5
1.5
13-332
13 20 1
05.01
1 CADDrawing Manuel modification prohibited 480 477 465.5 10.8 0 4 x 45
6.5
13
100
6.5 6.5
2.5 2.5
2 x 45
12.5
130
440
12.5
100
1.5
( 54 )
108.5
105
1.5
40
1.5 1.5
108.5
1.5
( 54 ) ( 54 )
Barcode standard: Barcode identifier:
M 8
Confie a titre de secret d entreprise. Tous droits reserves Confiado como secreto industial. Nos reservamos todos los derechos Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Reservados todos os direitos
Line filter verpackt in: Karton Item No. 339101.0134.02 Einlagen entspr. Anforderungen, siehe Bl. 1 Mains filter packed in: Box part no. 399101.0134.02 Paddings as required, see page 1
Page: 2 2 P. 3 4 5
13-333
Belonging to this: Surface: Gen.tolerance kg/piece: Scale: 2:5 DIN 6 ISO 2768mk . . . . . Tolerance . ISO 8015 . . 15.01.98 Date Handled Zahorsky 3phase line filter by Masatz Tested by 55 kW Standard Type/MLFB: 6SN11110AA012DA0 Dept. MC E45 Siemens AG A& D 2 GE. 000000586883 TA aa aa 501156 15.01.98 Za. Equipment Plant Erlangen Cond. Message Date Name Replacement for / replaced by:
PRO/ECAD PRO/ECAD 4) Erdungsbolzen M8 Grounding stud M8

279.5 4) 3) 3) 4 20 1 C
15 526 3 (2x) 2) 1) M4 (2x) 35 71 1 60
30
30 M4 (2x) 29 3 (2x) 60 71
15 35 1 25 1 D
25
Code 39 for MLFBNo. = 1P for Version = 2P for Item No. = no identifier E Bar code standard: Bar code identifier: indentifier: Code 39 for MLFBno. == 1 P for MLFBno. 1 P for version = 2 P for part no. = no identifier
1) TypenSchild labeled with the following data: Line filter for I/R 55 kW In=103A 460/265V/4566 Hz Barcode Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012DA0 ( = MLFBNo. ) Barcode Item No. 000000586883 ( = Item No. ) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. version release ) 2) Warning label labelled with : ACHTUNG,hoher Ableitstrom Warning sign inscribed with : ATTENTION, high leakage current 2 Terminals 50 mm Sleeve: Screwtype thread M6 Tightening torque 6...8 Nm
Labels labelled with: Line filter for I/R 55 kW In=103A 460/265 V/4566 Hz Bar code Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012DA0 ( = Order No. ) Bar code part no. 000000586883 ( = part no. ) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status )
2 3) Anschluklemmen 50 mm Terminal sleeve: Schraubengewinde M6 Tightening torque 6...8 Nm
40
13
13
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 CADDrawing Manuel modification prohibited 480 477 465.5 10.8 0 2 x 45 4 x 45
150
6.5
14.5
13
25
25
200 1
6.5
150
C 279.5
4)
1.5
128
74
74
1.5
25
1.5
D 3 (2x) 2) M4 (2x)
15
30
30 1) 29 M4 (2x) 3 (2x) 60 75 1
15 39.3 32 1
25
2) Warning label labelled with : ACHTUNG,hoher Ableitstrom Warning sign inscribed with : ATTENTION, high leakage current
4) Erdungsbolzen M8 Grounding stud M8
Line filter verpackt in: Karton Item No. 339101.0134.03 Einlagen entspr. Anforderungen, siehe Bl.1 Mains filter packed in: Box part no 339101.0134.03 Paddings as required, see page 1
05.01
Labels labelled with: Line filter for I/R 80 kW In=150A 460/265 V/4566 Hz Bar code Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012EA0 ( = Order No. ) Bar code part no. 000000586891 ( = part no. ) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status ) 2 3) Anschluklemmen 95 mm Terminal sleeve: Schraubengewinde M8 Tightening torque 15...20 Nm Terminals 95 mm 2 Sleeve: Screwtype thread M8 Tightening torque 15...20 Nm 3 4 5
Belonging to this: Surface: Gen.tolerance kg/piece: Scale: 2:5 DIN 6 ISO 2768mk . . . Tolerance . . . ISO 8015 . . 10.03.98 Date Handled Zahorsky 3phase line filter by Masatz Tested by 80 kW Standard Type/MLFB: 6SN11110AA012EA0 MC E45 Dept. Siemens AG A& D 2 GE. 000000586891 TA aa aa 501156 10.03.98 Za. Equipment Plant Erlangen Cond. Message Date Name Replacement for / replaced by:
Page: 2 2 P.
PRO/ECAD
150
128
480
1.5
13-334
539 440 69 0.1 3) Barcode standard: Barcode identifier: Code 39 for MLFBNo. = 1P for Version = 2P for Item No. = no identifier Bar code standard: Code 39 Bar code identifier: for MLFBno. = 1 P for version = 2 P for part no. = no identifier
3)
39.3
60
32
75
1) TypenSchild labeled with the following data: Line filter for I/R 80 kW In=150A 460/265V/4566 Hz Barcode Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012EA0 ( = MLFBNo. ) Barcode Item No. 000000586891 ( = Item No. ) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. version release )
1 CADDrawing Manuel modification prohibited
10
11
12
05.01
480 477
465.5 465.5
2 x 45
250 250
100
6.5 6.5
6.5
13 25
25 25
14.5
100
250
100
100
3) 3)
4 x 45
10.8 0
C 530 300 1 440
4)
135
279.5 4
135
85
85
25 25
1.5
25
25 25
DIN 6
Gen.tolerance
Surface:
Scale: 2:5 Line filter verpackt in: Karton Item No. 339101.0134.05 Einlagen entspr. Anforderungen, siehe Bl.1 Mains filter packed in: Box part no 339101.0134.05 Paddings as required, see page 1
ISO 2768mk Tolerance ISO 8015 . . . Date . . . 28.05.98 Handled by Zahorsky Tested by Masatz Standard Dept. MC E45 Siemens AG A&D Equipment Plant Erlangen aa 501156 28.05.98 Za.
H 4) Erdungsbolzen M10x30 Grounding stud M10x30
3) Anschlu asche Terminal lug
kg/piece: . . 3phase line filter 120 kW Type/MLFB: 6SN11110AA012F A0

Page:
13-335
4
1 GE. 000000586909 TA 5 6 7 8 9
Cond. Message Date Name Replacement for / replaced by:
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung dieser Unterlage, Verwer tung and Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrcklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere for den Fall der Patenterteilung or GMEintragung. 1 2 3 * PRO/E *
aa
2 2 P.
PRO/ECAD Belonging to this:
85
100
100
1.5
25 1 100 100 15 30 60 1) 3 (2x) M4 (2x) 480 M4 (2x) 3 (2x) 30 60 15 120 2) 11 1) TypenSchild labeled with the following data: Line filter f I/R 120 kW In=225A 460/265V/4566 Hz Barcode Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012F A0 ( = MLFBNo. ) Barcode Item No. 000000586909 ( = Item No. ) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. version release ) Labels labelled with: Line filter for I/R 120 kW In=225A 460/265 V/4566 Hz Bar code Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA012F A0 ( = Order No. ) Bar code part no. 000000586909 ( = part no. ) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status ) Barcode standard: Barcode identifier: Code 39 for MLFBNo. = 1P for Version = 2P for Item No. = no identifier Bar code standard: Code 39 Bar code identifier: for MLFBno. = 1 P for version = 2 P for part no. = no identifier 2) Warning label labelled with : ACHTUNG,hoher Ableitstrom Warning sign inscribed with : ATTENTION, high leakage current
120
Confie a titre de secret d entreprise. Tous droits reserves Confiado como secreto industial. Nos reservamos todos los derechos Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Reservados todos os direitos
13
13
1 TypenSchild gut sichtbar aut der 3phase reactor angebracht.
max. 145
3x45
0.5
136
8 8
Belonging to this: Barcode DIN 6 Gen.tolerance ISO 2768mk Tolerance ISO 8015 Surface: . . . Date . . . 21.10.97 Handled by Zahorsky Tested by Masatz Standard Dept. MC E45 Siemens AG A&D Equipment Plant Erlangen aa 2 3 4 Cond. 501156 Message 15.01.98 Date Sch Name . . Scale:
1:4
kg/piece:
for MFLBno. = 1P
Barcode
3phase reactor .
Type/MLFB:
for UL and CE Kennzeichnung for UL and CE marking
for UL and CE Kennzeichnung for UL and CE marking for UL and CE marking
6SN11110AA000BA1
3 GE.
586743
Replacement for / replaced by:
TA aa
Page: 2 2 P.
05.01
a aa
175 0.5 Beschriftungsbeispiel for Produktverpackungsaufkleber Labelling example of product packaging label
* Pro/E *
PRO/ECAD
Bar code identifier : for MLFBno. = 1P for version = 2 P for part no. = no identifier
Fig. 13-15 3phase reactor 16kW, 3GE.586743 TA aa, Sheet 2
13-336
Customer terminal connection Terminal designation 2 Terminal: 16 mm 2 Terminal: 16 mm Drossel verpackt in : Beschriftet with folgenden Angaben: 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 16 kW Barcode MFLBNo. 6SN11110AA000BA1 ( = MLFBNo.) Barcode SachNo. 000000586743 ( = SachNo.) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand) 1V1 1V2 1W1 1W2 PE Typenschild Labels Karton Polster Seite Polster oben Polster unten SachNo. SachNo. SachNo. SachNo. 399101.0134.02 399020.0613.00 399020.0612.00 399020.0611.00 Auf Verpackung ein Produktverpackungsaufkleber with SachNo.462008.0231.00 nach SN 186302 geklebt, Beschriftet with folgenden Angaben : MFLBNo. Barcode 6SN11110AA000BA1 ( = MLFBNo.) Barcode SachNo. 000000586743 ( = SachNo. ) 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 16 kW Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand) Barcode standard : 330 Barcode identifier : 0.5 Code 39 for MLFBNo. = 1P for Version = 2P for SachNo. = no identifier
CADDrawing Manuel modification prohibited
KundenKlemmenanschlu Klemmenbezeichnung:
1U1 1U2
Warning label Warningplate
150
1
C Labelled wi Version index Drawing index 586743 TA .. Choke packed in : Zeichnungs
Labels affixed in visible location on 3phase choke 3phasechoke, comm.HF 16 kW Bar code MFLBno. 6SN11110AA000BA1 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000586743 ( = part no.) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status)
15
Box part no. Side pad part no. Pad on top part no. pad on bottom part no.
399101.0134.02 399020.0613.00 399020.0612.00 399020.061 1.00
Product packaging label with part no. 462008.0231.00 acc.to SN 186302 SN 186302 affixed to the packaging. Bar code MFLBno. Labelled with : 6SN11110AA000BA1 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000586743 ( = part no. ) 3phasechoke, comm.HF 16 kW Version a ( = e.g. version status) Bar code standard : Code 39
Beschriftungsbeispiel for Typenschild
Labelling example of typeplate
1 TypenSchild gut sichtbar aut der 3phase reactor angebracht. Customer terminal connection Terminal designation Terminal: 35 mm 1V1 1V2 1W1 1W2 Terminal: 35 mm PE 2 2
05.01
KundenKlemmenanschlu Klemmenbezeichnung
1U1
1U2
Beschriftet with folgenden Angaben: 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 36 kW Barcode MFLBNo. 6SN11110AA000CA1 ( = MLFBNo.) Barcode SachNo. 000000586750 ( = SachNo.) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand) Drossel verpackt in :
Warning label Warningplate Typenschild Labels
Karton Polster Seite Polster oben Polster unten
SachNo. SachNo. SachNo. SachNo.
399101.0134.02 399020.0613.00 399020.0612.00 399020.0611.00
B 232
Auf Verpackung ein Produktverpackungsaufkleber with SachNo.462008.0231.00 nach SN 186302 geklebt, Beschriftet with folgenden Angaben : Barcode MFLBNo. 6SN11110AA000CA1 ( = MLFBNo.) Barcode SachNo. 000000586750 ( = SachNo. ) 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 36 kW Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand) Barcode standard : Barcode identifier : Code 39
max.
C Labels affixed in visible location on 3phase choke Labelled with :
3x45
136
Belonging to this: Barcode DIN 6 Gen.tolerance ISO 2768mk Tolerance ISO 8015 Surface: . . . Date . . . 22.10.97 Handled by Zahorsky Tested by Masatz Standard Dept. MC E45 . . Scale: 1:4 kg/piece:
Barcode
3phase reactor .
Type/MLFB: 6SN11110AA000CA1 Page: aa 501156 15.01.98 Sch Name Siemens AG A&D Equipment Plant Erlangen 2
for UL and CE Kennzeichnung
for UL and CE marking
3 GE.
3 4 Cond. Message Date
586750
TA
aa
P.
13-337
2
* Pro/E *
PRO/ECAD

330 0.5 150 1 for MLFBNo. = 1P for Version = 2P for SachNo. = no identifier
0.5
Version 3phasechoke, comm.HF 36 kW Bar code MFLBno. 6SN11110AA000CA1 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000586750 ( = part no.) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status) Box part no. Side pad part no. Pad on top part no. pad on bottom part no. Zeichnungs index Drawing index 586750 TA .. Choke packed in : aa a 399101.0134.02 399020.0613.00 399020.0612.00 399020.061 1.00 175 0.5 Product packaging label with part no. 462008.0231.00 acc. to SN 186302 SN 186302 affixed to the packaging. Bar code MFLBno. Labelled with : 6SN11110AA000CA1 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000586750 ( = part no. ) Beschriftungsbeispiel for Produktverpackungsaufkleber Labelling example of product packaging label Bar code standard : Bar code identifier : 3phasechoke, comm.HF 36 kW Version a ( = e.g. version status) Code 39 for MFLBno. = 1P for version = 2 P for part no. = no identifier
15
13
13
1 TypenSchild gut sichtbar aut der 3phase reactor angebracht. KundenKlemmenanschlu Klemmenbezeichnung Beschriftet with folgenden An 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 55 kW Customer terminal connection Terminal designation 2 Terminal: 70 mm 2 Terminal: 70 mm Typenschild Labels Drossel verpackt in : Barcode MFLBNo. 6SN11110AA000DA1 ( = MLFBNo.) Barcode SachNo. 000000586768 ( = SachNo.) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand)
CADDrawing
max. 278 278
0.5
3x45
136
DIN 6 Barcode
Gen.tolerance ISO 2768mk Tolerance ISO 8015
Surface: . . . Date . . . 21.10.97 Handled by Zahorsky Tested by Masatz Standard Dept. MC E45 . .
Scale:
1:4
kg/piece:
3phase reactor .
Type/MLFB: 6SN11110AA000DA1 Page: aa 501156 15.01.98 Sch Siemens AG A&D Equipment Plant Erlangen 2
Barcode
3 GE.
3 4 Cond. Message Date Name
586768
TA
aa
P.
05.01
Choke packed in : index 586768 TA .. a aa Beschriftungsbeispiel for Produktverpackungsaufkleber Labelling example of product packaging label Belonging to this: 2
* Pro/E *
PRO/ECAD for version = 2 P for part no. = no identifier
13-338
Karton Polster Seite Polster oben Polster unten SachNo. SachNo. SachNo. SachNo. 399101.0134.02 399020.0613.00 399020.0612.00 399020.0611.00 Auf Verpackung ein Produktverpackungsaufkleber with SachNo.462008.0231.00 nach SN 186302 : geklebt, Beschriftet with folgenden AngabenBarcode MFLBNo. 6SN11110AA000DA1 ( = MLFBNo.) Barcode SachNo. 000000586768 ( = SachNo. ) 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 55 kW Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand) Barcode standard: Barcode identifier : for MLFBNo. = 1P for Version = 2P for SachNo. = no identifier Code 39 Labels affixed in visible location on 3phase choke 330 0.5 1 150 Labelled with : 175 Version index Drawing Zeichnungs 0.5 3phasechoke, comm.HF 55 kW Bar code MFLBno. 6SN11110AA000DA1 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000586768 ( = part no.) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status) Box part no. 399101.0134.02 Side pad part no. 399020.0613.00 Pad on top part no. 399020.0612.00 pad on bottom part no. 399020.061 1.00 Product packaging label with part no. 462008.0231.00 acc. to SN 186302 SN 186302 affixed to the packaging. Labelled with : Bar code MFLBno. 6SN11110AA000DA1 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000586768 ( = part no. ) 3phasechoke, comm.HF 55 kW Version a ( = e.g. version status) Bar code standard : Bar code identifier : Code 39 for MFLBno. = 1P
Manuel modification prohibited
1U1 1U2 1V1 1V2 1W1 1W2 PE
15
1 CADDrawing Manuel modification prohibited Typenschild Labels TypenSchild gut sichtbar auf der 3phase reactor angebracht.
05.01
A 1V2 200 Drossel verpackt in : Karton 540 x 310 x 265 1W2
1U2
Beschriftet with folgenden Angaben: 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 80 kW Barcode Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA001EA0 Barcode Item No. 000000587022 ( = Item No.) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand)
1U1 1W1
1V1
Auf Verpackung ein Produktverpackungsaufkleber with Item No. 462008.0231.00 nach SN 186302 geklebt, labeled with the following data:Barcode MFLBNo. 6SN11110AA001EA0 ( = MLFBNo. ) Barcode Item No. 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 80 kW Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand) max. 225 Barcode identifier : Barcode standard : Code 39 for MLFBNo. = 1P for Version = 2P for SachNo. = no identifier B
Erdungsschraube M6 Earth screw M6
B Langloch 8x15 Slot Langloch 10x18 Slot Labels affixed in visible location on 3phase choke Labelled with :
0.5
3 x 45
142
Barcode
Barcode
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung dieser Unterlage, Verwer tung and Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrcklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere for den Fall der Patenterteilung or GMEintragung.
13-339
2 3
Page: 2 2 P. 4 5
Belonging to this: Surface: Gen.tolerance kg/piece: Scale: 2:5 DIN 6 ISO 2768mk . . . Tolerance . . . ISO 8015 . . 30.03.98 Date Handled Zahorsky 3phase reactor by Masatz Tested by fuer I/R 80 kW Standard Type/MLFB: 6SN11110AA001EA0 MC E45 Dept. Siemens AG ab 506123 06.07.98 Za. A& D 2 GE. 000000587022 TA ab aa 501156 30.03.98 Za. Equipment Plant Erlangen Cond. Message Date Name Replacement for / replaced by:
* Pro/E *
PRO/ECAD
0.5 170 3phase choke, comm.HF 80 kW Bar code Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110A1EA0 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000587022 ( = part no. ) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status) Box 540 x 310 x 265 156 Choke packed in : Product packaging label with part no. 462008.0231.00 acc. to SN 186302 affixed to the packaging. Labelled with : Bar code MFLBno. 6SN11110AA001EA0 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000587022 ( = part no. ) 3phasechoke, comm.HF 80 kW Version a ( = e.g. version status) Bar code standard : 10.5 175 224 325 max. 380 0.5 0.5 0.5 Bar code identifier : Code 39 for MFLBno. = 1P for version = 2P for part no. = no identifier Version Beschriftungsbeispiel for Typenschild Labelling example of typeplate Beschriftungsbeispiel for Produktverpackungsaufkleber Labelling example of product packaging label a Code 39 Zeichnungs index Drawing index 587022 TA.. aa
Fig. 13-18 3phase reactor 80kW, 2GE.587022 TA ab, Sheet 2
13
13
2 Typenschild Labels TypenSchild gut sichtbar auf der 3phase reactor angebracht. Beschriftet with folgenden Angaben: 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 CADDrawing Manuel modification prohibited
300
Erdungsschraube M6 Earth screw M6
0.5
170
0.5
156
3 x 45
Comunicado como segredo empresarial. Reservados todos os direitos Barcode
05.01
175 325 0.5 max. 380 0.5 10.5 Beschriftungsbeispiel for Typenschild Labelling example of typeplate Beschriftungsbeispiel fur for Produktverpackungsaufkleber Labelling example of product packaging label Barcode 2 3 4 5
Weitergabe sowie Vervielfltigung dieser Unterlage, Verwer tung and Mitteilung ihres Inhalts nicht gestattet, soweit nicht ausdrcklich zugestanden. Zuwiderhandlungen verpflichten zu Schadenersatz. Alle Rechte vorbehalten, insbesondere for den Fall der Patenterteilung or GMEintragung.
Page: 2 2 P.
Belonging to this: Surface: Gen.tolerance kg/piece: Scale: 2:5 DIN 6 ISO 2768mk . . . Tolerance . . . ISO 8015 . . 01.04.98 Date Handled Zahorsky 3phase reactor by Masatz Tested by fuer I/R 120 kW Standard Type/MLFB: 6SN11110AA001F A0 MC E45 Dept. Siemens AG ab 506123 06.07.98 Za. A& D 2 GE. 000000587014 TA ab aa 501156 01.04.98 Za. Equipment Plant Erlangen Cond. Message Date Name Replacement for / replaced by:
* Pro/E *
PRO/ECAD
Fig. 13-19 3phase reactor 120kW, 2GE.587014 TA ab, Sheet 2
142
13-340
1V2 1W2 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 120 kW Barcode Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA001F A0 ( = MLFBNo.) Barcode Item No. 000000587014 ( = Item No. ) Barcode, version release Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand) Karton 540 x 310 x 265 Drossel verpackt in: Auf Verpackung ein Produktverpackungsaufkleber with Item No. 462008.0231.00 nach SN 186302 geklebt, labeled with the following data: Barcode MFLBNo. 6SN11110AA001F A0 ( = MLFBNo.) Barcode Item No. 000000587014 ( = Item No. ) 3phase reactor, Komm.HF 120 kW Version a ( = e.g. Versionsstand) Barcode standard: Barcode identifier: 1V1 Labelled with: 1W1 Code 39 for MLFBNo. = 1P for Version = 2P for SachNo. =no identifier Labels affixed in visible location on 3phase choke max. Langloch 10x18 Slot Choke packed in: 225 3phase choke, comm.HF 120 kW Bar code Order No.[MLFB] 6SN11110AA001F A0 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000587014 ( = part no. ) Bar code version status Version a ( = e.g. version status) Box 540 x 310 x 265 Product packaging label with part no. 462008.0231.00 acc. to SN 186302 affixed to the packaging. Labelled with: Bar code MFLBno. 6SN11110AA001F A0 ( = MLFBno.) Bar code part no. 000000587014 ( = part no. ) 3phasechoke, comm.HF 120 kW Version a ( = e.g. version status) Bar code standard: Bar code identifier: Code 39 for MFLBno. = 1P for version = 2P for part no. = no identifier Version Zeichnungs index Drawing index 587014 TA.. a aa
1U2
1U1
Langloch 8x15 Slot
05.01
13
3Phasendrossel 28 kW Typ HF, Commutating reactor Ln=0.15 mH, In=65 A Order No.: 6SN11111AA000CA0
Fig. 13-20 3phase reactor Typ HF, TA 585034, Sheet 2
13-341
05.01
13
Fig. 13-21 External cooling, 2GE.462118.9000.00 MB aa, Sheet 1
13-342
05.01
13
13-343
05.01
13
13-344
05.01
13
13-345
05.01
13
13-346
05.01
13
13-347
05.01
13
13-348
05.01
13
13-349
05.01
13
13-350
05.01
13
13-351
05.01
13
13-352
05.01
13
Fig. 13-32 Fan assembly, ext. cooling, 1GE.462108.9000.50 Z aa, Sheet 1
13-353
05.01
13
13-354
05.01
13
13-355
05.01
13
13-356
05.01
13
13-357
05.01
13
Fig. 13-37 Module 300 mm, ext. cooling, 2GE.462108.9001.00 MB ad, Sheet 1
13-358
05.01
13
Fig. 13-38 Module 300 mm, ext. cooling, 2GE.462108.9001.00 MB ad, Sheet 2
13-359
05.01
13
Fig. 13-39 Encoder signal amplifier, 3GE.462250.9006.00 MB aa
13-360
05.01
13
Fig. 13-40 External pulsed resistor, 3GE.577015 TA ab, Sheet2
13-361
13
52.8
66
80
DIN 6
Gen.tolerance ISO 2768mk Tolerance ISO 8015
Surface: . . . Date . . . 30.07.97 Handled by Lehner/Kno. Tested by Masatz Standard Dept. ab aa 504737 504397 4 Cond. Message 31.07.97 10.06.97 Date Kno Bm Name E 245 Siemens AG Automation & Group Equipment Plant Erlangen . .
Scale:
1:1
kg/piece:
Pulsed resistor for 28 kW 0.3 kW/25 kW . Order No.: 6SN11131AA000DA0

Page: 2 3 P. Replacement for / replaced by:
05.01
196 210 Belonging to this: 2 3
* Pro/E *
PRO/ECAD
Fig. 13-41 Pulsed resistor for 28kW, 3GE.585679 TA ab, Sheet2

160 80
13-362
A B 210 5 72 C D
EC Declaration of Conformance
Note An excerpt from the EC Declaration of Conformation No. 002 V 18/10/95 is provided in the following. The complete EC Declaration of Conformance is provided in the brochure EMC Guidelines for SINUMERIK and SIROTEC controls.
A-363
A EC Declaration of Conformance
05.01
A-364
08.98 05.01
Attachment A to the EC Declaration of Conformance No. 002 V 18/10/95

It has been proven that the products are in compliance with the Directive of the Council Committee 89/336/EC. Relevant Standards: Product Standard EN 618003 status 07/96 Components are offered (e.g. filter etc.), which allow the basic standard to be met when correctly mounted/installed . Basic Standard: EN 500812 status 8/93 Basic Standards: EN 55011 status 1991 1)
Specialist standard prEN 500822 status 8/94 Basic Standards: ENV 50140 ENV 50141 EN 6100048 EN 6100042 IEC 8014 status 8/1993 status 8/1993 status 5/1994 status 10/1994 status 1988 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Other standards which are complied with to 1) to 2) to 3) to 4) VDE 0875, Part 11 VDE 0847, Part 3 IEC 8016 VDE 0847, Part 48 IEC 100048 VDE 0847, Part 42 EN 60801, Part 2 IEC 8012 VDE 0843, Part 2 VDE 0843, Part 4 status 7/1992 status 8/1993 status 2/1992 status 5/1994 status 1993 status 10/1994 status 3/1994 status 4/1991 status 3/1994 status 9/1987
to 5)
to 6)
A-365
05.01
Attachment A to the EC Declaration of Conformance No. 002 V 18/10/95 (excerpt)

A8: Typical system configuration SINUMERIK FM NC/SIMODRIVE 611A
S All of the components, which are permitted in accordance with the ordering
documentation for the SINUMERIK FM NC and SIMODRIVE 611A drive group fulfill, as a group, Directive 89/336/EWG
S Conformance with the Standards, refer to Attachment C

Note Only the basic measures requried for compliance with the Directive 89/336/EC of a typical system configuration are shown in the sketch of the system configuration. The installation information/instructions for EMC correct system design in the product documentation and the Siemens EMC Directive (Order No.: 6ZB54100HX010AA0) should be additionally observed, especially when deviating from system configuration.
A-366
05.01
Attachment A to EC Declaration of conformance No. 002 V 18/10/95 (excerpt)

A9: Typical system configuration SINUMERIK 840D / SIMODRIVE 611D
S All of the components which are permitted, in accordance with the ordering
documentation for the SINUMERIK 840D and SIMODRIVE 611D drive group fulfill, as a group, Directive 89/336/EWG

Note Only the basic measures required for compliance with the Directive 89/336/EC of a typical system configuration are shown in the sketch of the system configuration. The installation information/instructions for EMC correct system design in the product documentation and the Siemens EMC Directive (Order No.: 6ZB54100HX010AA0) should be additionally observed.
A-367
05.01
Attachment A to EC Declaration of Conformance No. 002 V 18/10/95 (excerpt)

A10: Typical system configuration SINUMERIK 840C / SIMODRIVE 611A/D
S All of the components, which are permitted in accordance with the ordering
documentation for the SINUMERIK 840C and SIMODRIVE 611A/D drive group fulfill, as a group, Directive 89/336/EWG

Note Only the basic measures required for compliance with the Directive 89/336/EC of a typical system configuration are shown in the sketch of the system configuration. The installation information/instructions for EMC correct system design in the product documentation and the Siemens EMC Directive (Order No.: 6ZB54100HX010AA0) should be additionally observed. J
A-368
05.01
Abbreviations and Terminology

611 A 611 D 611 U 611 UE Analog closed loop control Digital closed loop control Drive module EP EnDat External cooling FD module HGL I/R module IM IRM Internal cooling L2DP MCU Monitoring module MPI MRPD MSD module MSD option
A for Analog D for Digital U for Universal UE for Universal Eco Control board with analog interface
Control board with digital interface
General term for main spindle and feed modules Electronics weighting factor EncoderDataInterface (bidirectional synchronousserial interface) Module with heatsink for insertion, cooling on the customers side Feed drive module Highresolution position actual value Infeed regenerative feedback module with controlled DC link voltage Induction Motor Induction Rotating Motor Module with integrated heatsink, in some cases with pipe connection L2 distributed periphery MotionControlUnit (singleaxis positioning board) Monitoring module Multi Point Interface Machine Readable Product Designation Main spindle module Option board, main spindle options for FD module
B-369
B Abbreviations and Terminology
05.01
NCU NE module Operator panel interface PELV Power module PPU Pulsed resistor module SLM SRM SSI SVE UI module VDClink VE WSG
Numeric control unit Supply infeed module (general term for UI and I/R module) Operator panel interface
Protective Extra Low Voltage Power module Protected Power Unit Pulsed resistor module
Synchronous linear motor Synchronous rotating motor Synchronous Serial Interface Current amplification electronics Infeed module with uncontrolled DC link voltage and pulsed resistor DC link voltage Packing unit Angular encoder interface
B-370
05.01
References
General documentation
/NC60/
SIMODRIVE 611 Catalog NC 60 Order number: E86060K4460A101A8 Order number: E86060K4460A101A8 7600 (English)
/NCZ/
SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE Accessories and Equipment for SpecialPurpose Machines Catalog NC Z Order number: E86060K4490A001A7 Order number: E86060K4490A001A7 7600 (English)
/NSK/
LowVoltage Switchgear Automation and Drives Catalog NS K Order number: E86060K1002A101A1
Electronic documentation
/CD6/
The SINUMERIK System (10.00 Edition) DOC ON CD (includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FMNC and SIMODRIVE publications) Order number: 6FC5 2986CA000BG0
C-371
C References
05.01
User documentation
/PI /
PCIN 4.4 Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC module Order number: 6FX2 060 4AA004XB0 (German, English, French) Ordering location: WK Frth
a) Lists
/LIS/
SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FMNC SIMODRIVE 611D Lists Order number: 6FC5 2976AB700BP0
(10.00 Edition)
/ASA/
Safety Integrated Application Manual Order number: E20001A110M103
b) Hardware
/BHA/
SIMODRIVE Sensor Absolute value encoder with ProfibusDP User Manual (HW) Order number: 6SN11970AB100YP1
(02.99 Edition)
/EMV/
SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE EMC Design Guideline Planning Guide (HW) Order number: 6FC5 2970AD300BP1
(06.99 Edition)
/PHF/
SINUMERIK FMNC Configuring Manual NCU 570 (HW) Order number: 6FC5 2973AC000BP0
(04.96 Edition)
/PMH/
SIMODRIVE Sensor Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives Configuring/Installation Guide SIMAGH (HW) Order number: 6SN11970AB300BP0
(05.99 Edition)
C-372
05.01
C References
c) Software
/FBAN/
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital Description of Functions ANA module Order number: 6SN1 1970AB800BP0
(02.00 Edition)
/FBHLA/
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital Description of Functions HLA module Order number: 6SN1 1970AB600BP2
(04.00 Edition)
/FBSI/
SINUMERIK 840D / SIMODRIVE 611 digital Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (03.01 Edition) Order number: 6FC5 2976AB800BP0
/FBU/
SIMODRIVE 611 universal Description of Functions (05.00 Edition) ClosedLoop Control Component for Speed Control and Positioning Order number: 6SN1 1970AB200BP3
/KBU/
SIMODRIVE 611 universal Short Description ClosedLoop Control Component for Speed Control Order number: 6SN1 1970AB400BP3
(05.00 Edition)
/PJLM/
SIMODRIVE Planning Guide Linear Motors (10.00 Edition) (on request) ALL General Information about Linear Motors 1FN1 1FN1 ThreePhase AC Linear Motor 1FN3 1FN3 ThreePhase AC Linear Motor CON Connections Order number: 6SN1 1970AB700BP1
/PJM/
SIMODRIVE Planning Guide Motors ThreePhase AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives Order number: 6SN1 1970AA200BP4
(09.00 Edition)
/PJFE/
SIMODRIVE Planning Guide Synchronous Motors 1FE1 ThreePhase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives Order number: (on request)
C
(03.00 Edition)
C-373
C References
05.01
/SP/
SIMODRIVE 611A/611D, SimoPro 3.1 Program for Configuring MachineTool Drives Order number: 6SC6 1116PC000AAj Ordering location: WK Frth
d) Installation and startup /IAA/

SIMODRIVE 611A Installation and Startup Guide Order number: 6SN 11970AA600BP5
(09.00 Edition)
/IAD/
SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Startup Guide (10.00 Edition) (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D startup software) Order number: 6FC5 2976AB100BP0
C-374
Index
I
Closedloop main spindle control, with analog setpoint interface, 5-114 Closedloop main spindle control, analog, Select terminals, 5-115 Closedloop resolver control, 5-111 Interface overview, 5-112 Commutating reactor, 7-204, 7-205 Configurator, 1-21 Connecting cable 2tier arrangement, 8-218 Connection configuration, 1-22 Connection regulations, 10-305 Control modules, 1-19, 5-99 ANA module, 5-153 Closedloop drive control, digital, 5-124 Closedloop resolver control with standard interface analog, 5-110 Closedloop spindle control, analog, 5-114 Feed control with standard interface analog, 5-107 Feed control with userfriendly interface analog, 5-101 HLA module, 5-143 Induction motor control, 5-118 Overview, 5-99 SIMODRIVE 611 universal, 5-127 SIMODRIVE 611 universal E, 5-136 Cooling components, 6-175 Cooling types, 1-20, 2-39 Current controller on the parameter module, 5-102 Current derating, 4-88, 4-93
Numbers
1axis closedloop drive control, 5-124 1FK6 motors, 5-110 1FT5 motors, 5-101, 5-107 1FT6 motors, 5-124 1PH motors, 5-114, 5-124 2axis closedloop drive control Performance, 5-124 Standard, 5-124 2tier arrangement Cabinet arrangement, 10-310 Connecting cable, 8-218
A
Abbreviations, B-369 Ambient conditions, 2-25 Armature shortcircuit, 9-279 Arrangement of the modules, 2-24 Arrangement possibilities, 2-23 Autotransformer, 7-206
B
Block diagram, speed control loop, 11-316 Block diagrams, 11-315
C
Caxis operation, 3-77 Cable routing, 10-306 Cable shield, 10-307 Capacitor module, 1-18, 6-191 Charging/discharging times, 6-196 Configuring, 6-195 Technical data, 6-193 Charging times, 6-196 Circuit example Six conductor connection, 9-301 with SIMODRIVE 611 analog, 9-250 with SIMODRIVE 611 digital, 9-282 with SIMODRIVE 611 universal, 9-283 Closedloop drive control, 5-124 Closedloop feed control, with standard interface, 5-107
D
Danger information, vi DAU assignment, 5-152 DC link Adapter terminals, 8-218 Buffering, 9-299 Capacitor module, 6-191 Charging/discharge times, 6-196 Energy flow, 9-300 External pulsed resistors, 6-198 Overvoltage limiting module, 6-197 Pulsed resistor module, 6-197 DC link voltage, 9-231 Definition of the currents, 4-88 of the load duty cycles, 4-96 of the outputs, 4-88 Dimension Drawings, 13-321
I-375
D Index
05.01
Direct position sensing, 3-56 Discharge times, 6-196 Discharge voltage, 6-196 Drive bus, 5-124 Drive group, 2-23
HLA module Connection configuration, 5-146 System components, 5-145, 5-154 Holding brake, 3-55, 9-279 Hose package, 6-175
E
Electrical cabinet, 1-20 EMC Guidelines, 10-305 EMC law, 7-212 EMC measures Grounding, electronics ground, 10-312 Shield connections, 10-312 Encoder cables, Ordering information, 3-79 Encoder power supply Motor measuring system, 3-61 SSI encoders, 3-64 EnDat interface, 5-124 Engineering Description, 1-20 Phases, 1-22 Procedure, 1-21 Selection, 1-22 Engineering steps, 1-21 ESDS information, x Example Circuit example, 9-250 Motor changeover, 9-291 Motor parallel operation, 9-289 Stardelta operation, 9-285 External cooling, 2-42 External pulsed resistors, 6-198
I
I/R module, 6-161 Autotransformer, 7-206 Line filter, 7-214 Technical data, 6-171 Transformer, 7-208 Indirect position sensing, 3-56 Inductance motor control, 5-118 Induction motor for 611 digital/611 universal, 9-292 Motor changeover, 9-291 Parallel operation, 9-289 Infeed modules, 1-18, 6-161 Information on electrostatic discharge, x technical, vii Information on the motor -converter -selection FDDigital control, 4-91 Information on the motor -converter -selection IM -control, 4-93 Information on the motor -converter -selection MSD -control digital, 4-92 Installation altitude, 2-25, 4-93 Installation regulations, 10-305 Interface overview, Bus interfaces, 5-160 Internal cooling, 2-41, 10-309 Inverter clock frequency, 4-88
F
Fan, 6-176 Feed control Overview, speed controller, 11-316 with userfriendly interface, 5-101 Field weakening range, 5-123 Filter modules, Operating conditions, 7-213
L
Line filter, 2-46 Adapter set, 7-215 package, 7-215 Line filters, 7-212 Line supply connection, 1-18, 2-46 Line supply fuses, 7-203 Line supply types, 2-47 IT line supply, 2-50 TNC line supply, 2-48 TT line supply, 2-49 List of abbreviations, B-369 of terminology, B-369 of the dimension drawings, 13-321 Load duty cycle definitions, 4-96
G
Guarantee, 1-20
H
Heat deflecting plate, 10-305 HF commutating reactor, 2-46, 7-204 Highresolution position Connector assignment, 3-76 Principle of operation, 3-75 System configurations, 3-77 Technical data, 3-75
I-376
05.01
D Index
M
Main spindle drive Master drive, 9-284 Slave drive, 9-284 Main spindle module, Stardelta operation, 9-285 Main switch, 7-211, 9-219 Master/slave mode, 5-108 Master/slave operation, 5-111, 9-284 Modules ANA module, 5-153 Capacitor module, 1-18, 6-191 HLA module, 5-143 Infeed module, 1-18 Monitoring module, 1-18, 6-182 Overvoltage limiting module, 2-44, 6-197 Power module, 1-18, 4-81 Pulsed resistor module, 1-18, 6-197 Monitoring module, 1-18, 6-161, 6-182 LED display, 6-184 Mode of operation, 6-184 Technical data, 6-173 Motor Encoder, 3-56 Motordrive converter selection, 4-90 Overview, 1-19 Protection, 3-55 Selection, 2-26, 3-55 with holding brake, 3-55 Motor changeover, 5-123 Motor encoder, 3-56 Motor PTC thermistor, 5-104 Motor rotor position sensing, 3-56 Motor speed sensing, 3-56 MSD option Installation, 5-105 Interface overview, 5-106
Option module, main spindle functions, 5-105 Ordering information, 1-21 Overload protection, 9-292 Overview, 1-17 Overvoltage limiting module, 6-197
P
Parallel operation, 5-123, 9-289 Parameter board, 5-101, 5-102 PC tools, 1-21 Personnel qualified?, v Position sensing, 2-27, 3-66 Direct, 3-56 High resolution, 3-75 Indirect, 3-56 Position sensing, direct, 3-56 Positioning, 3-56 Power cables, 10-307 Power derating, 6-174 Power failure, 9-231 Circuit example, 9-298 Mode of operation, 9-293 Power module, 4-81 Internal cooling, 4-82 internal cooling, 2-31 Technical data, 4-83 Power modules, 1-18 Pulse enable, 9-234 Pulsed resistor module, 6-161, 6-197, 6-199 Connection types, 6-201 Technical data, 6-173
Q
Qualified personnel, v
N
NCSD configurator, 1-21 NE module Block diagram, 6-164 Interface overview, 6-177 Nominal load duty cycles, 6-173 Settings, 6-165 Technical data, 6-173 NE modules, Commutating reactors, 7-205 No ground fault, 6-173 Nominal load duty cycles FD, 4-96 MSD/IM, 4-96 Notes, Danger and warning information, vi
R
Radial blower, 6-175 Ready, 9-231 References, C-371 Remote/sense operation, 3-61 Resolver, 5-110 Resolver control, 5-110
S
Safety Integrated, 9-302 Select relay functions, 5-116, 5-120
O
Oneaxis closedloop drive control, 5-124 Operation at power failure, 9-293
I-377
D Index
05.01
Select terminal functions, 5-119 Integrator inhibit, speed controller, 5-115 M19 operation, 5-115 Openloop torque controlled operation, 5-115 Positioning, 5-115 Slip monitoring, 5-115 Stardelta operation, 5-115 Selecting components, 1-22 Settingup operation, 9-231 Shield, 10-307 Shield connecting plates, 10-308 Shield connecting rail, 8-218 Signal amplifier electronics, 8-217 Signal cables, 10-306 SIMODRIVE 611 universal, 5-127 SIMODRIVE 611 universal E, 5-136 SINUMERIK, 5-124 Speed controller on the parameter module, 5-102 SSI encoders, 3-64 Standard induction motors, 5-118 Stardelta operation, 9-285 Start inhibit, 9-240 Supplementary components, Technical data, 6-175 Supply connection, 5-147, 5-156, 7-212 Supply infeed, 6-161 SVE (signal amplification electronics.), Ordering information, 3-79 Symbol explanations, vi System configuration, 1-17, 2-23, 2-23
Toothedwheel encoder, Ordering information, 3-79 Transformers, 2-53 Twoaxis closedloop drive control Performance, 5-124 Standard, 5-124
U
UI module, 6-161 5 kW, 6-180 Commutating reactor, 7-205 Line filter, 7-215 Technical data, 6-173
W
Warning information, vi Wiring, cabinet, 10-305 WSG interface, 5-110
X
X101, 5-148, 5-156 X102, 5-148, 5-156 X111, 5-149, 5-157 X112, 5-149, 5-157 X121, 5-150, 5-158 X122, 5-150, 5-158 X141, 5-160 X151, 5-160 X181, 10-306 X341, 5-160 X431, 5-151, 5-159 X432, 5-151, 5-159
T
Temperature monitoring, 5-104 Terminal overview SIMODRIVE 611 analog, 12-319, 12-320 SIMODRIVE 611 digital, 12-318 Terminology, B-369 Threephase fan, 6-176
I-378
To SIEMENS AG A&D MC BMS Postfach 3180 D91050 Erlangen

Tel. / Fax: 0180 / 5050 222 [Hotline] Fax: 09131 / 98 2176 eMail: motioncontrol.docu@erlf.siemens.de
Recommendations Corrections For documentation:

SIMODRIVE 611 Planning Guide Drive Converter
From Name Your company address/Dept. Street Postal code: Telephone: Telefax: City: / /
Planning Guide, Drive Converter

Order No.: Edition: 6SN11970AA000BP5 05.01
If you come across printing errors in this document, please let us know using this form. We would also be grateful for any recommendations and suggestions.
Recommendations and/or corrections
Documentation Overview SIMODRIVE

General Documentation / Catalogs
SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK SIROTEC SIMODRIVE Accessories
SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
Catalog NC 60 S 2000/2001 Automation Systems Machine Tools for
Catalog NC Z Connection Systems & System Components
Catalog CA 01 Components for Automation & Drives
SIMODRIVE 611
SIMODRIVE
SIMODRIVE
SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK SIROTEC SIMODRIVE
Planning Guide Inverters Drive converters
Planning Guide Motors Threephase AC motors for feed and main spindle drives
Planning Guide AC motors for main spindle drives 1FE1 builtin synchronous motors
Planning Guide Linear motors 1FN1/1FN3
EMC Design Guideline SINUMERIK SIROTEC SIMODRIVE
Electronic Documentation
SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
SINUMERIK SIMODRIVE
840D/810D/ FMNC/611/ Motors
DOC ON CD
840C
DOC ON CD

611 Pju

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

611 Pju

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

611 Pju

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this document?

What is the purpose of this document?

What components are discussed in this document?

What components are discussed in this document?

SIMODRIVE 611

Planning Guide 05.2001 Edition

Foreword, Contents Overview of the Drive System System Configuration

Motor Selection and Position/Speed Sensing Power Modules

Planning Guide Drive Converter

Valid for 6SN11- series

Siemens AG 2001 All rights reserved.

Order No. 6SN11970AA000BP5 Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany

S General Documentation/Catalogs S Manufacturer/Service Documentation S Electronic Documentation

Definition: Who are qualified personnel?

S trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance

S trained in rendering first aid

Explanation of the symbols

The following symbols are used in this documentation

Note When handling cables observe the following

S all work must be undertaken with the system in a novoltage condition

S When handling components which can be destroyed by electrostatic

S Boards may only be placed on conductive surfaces (desk with ESDS

S Boards may not be brought close to data terminals, monitors or television

S Measuring work may only be carried out on the boards, if

Line supply types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Space for your notes

Overview of SIMODRIVE 611

Switches, contactors, fuses Section 7 Filter optional

Closed Closed loop control loop control

Cables, reactors, VPM, cable protection

Motor with position/ speed sensing

Principle system configuration

1 Overview of the Drive System 1.1 Overview of SIMODRIVE 611

Infeed modules refer to Section 6

Power modules refer to Section 4

TN supply 3ph. 400 V AC 3ph. 415 V AC

Capacitor module refer to Section 6.6.1 Uncontrolled infeed module

or 600 V DC Monitoring module

Power module with external cooling

Matching, isolating transformer

External pulsed resistor 0.3/25 kW Pulsed resistor module

External pulsed resistor 1.5/25 kW

Power module with hose cooling

Overview of the SIMODRIVE 611 drive system

1 Overview of the Drive System 1.1 Overview of SIMODRIVE 611

Motors refer to Section 3

For 1FK6 motors with resolver 1axis version 2axis version

For 1FT5 motors 1axis version 2axis version

Control modules with universal setpoint interface

1 Overview of the Drive System 1.1 Overview of SIMODRIVE 611

S Special modules and additional accessories

S Internal cooling S External cooling S Hose cooling

1 Overview of the Drive System 1.2 Engineering steps

A SIMODRIVE drive group is engineered in 2 phases:

Selecting the components Connection configuration

(refer to Fig. 1-4) (refer to Fig. 1-5)

Note A PC tool is available to configure the 6SN series, e.g.:

1 Overview of the Drive System 1.2 Engineering steps

Phase 1 when engineering